JP7127719B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Some game machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a display device that displays symbols in a variable manner. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a prize is won in an operation port provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state. Variable display is started. When the lottery is won, a specific symbol combination or the like is stopped and displayed, and the game state shifts to a specific game state (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-074175 A

Here, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing interest in gaming machines such as those exemplified above .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest in a game.

The present invention
a shooting means capable of shooting game balls based on a predetermined shooting operation;
Predetermined ball entry means capable of entering the game ball shot by the shooting means;
information acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means;
a specific determination means for executing a specific determination based on the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means;
variable ball entry means capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can enter or is likely to enter, and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state;
variable control means for executing variable ball entry control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state based on the result of the specific determination;
display means capable of variably displaying patterns;
It is regarded as one game round that the variable display of the pattern is started on the display means based on the specific determination being made by the specific determination means, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the specific determination is stopped and displayed. , game round control means for controlling the game round to be performed;
with
The game cycle control means has means for setting a stop display period during which symbols are stopped and displayed,
In a situation where the result of the specific determination is the first result corresponding to the execution of the variable ball entry control, a predetermined game ball launched in a manner capable of reaching the variable ball entry means reaches the variable ball entry means a first means for enabling stop display of the stop result corresponding to the first result in a first specific period longer than a predetermined period until the
In a situation where the result of the specific determination is a second result that does not correspond to the execution of the variable entry control, the stop display of the stop result corresponding to the second result is performed in a second specific period longer than the predetermined period. a second means for allowing the
characterized by comprising

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to improve interest.

1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. (a) A front view showing the configuration of the game board, (b) a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the unit at the operating port. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows a prize-winning process for operation openings. It is a flow chart which shows information acquisition processing. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by an MPU of a main control device; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing data setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. 9 is a flow chart showing a variable display time setting process; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a pending notice; It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for reservation advance notices. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram for explaining a fixed display time; 9 is a flow chart showing processing for confirmation display. 7 is a flow chart showing processing at the start of stop. (a) is a flow chart showing processing for grasping the number of executions of special period setting, and (b) is a schematic diagram for explaining the grasp pending number. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a variable display of symbol rows; (a) is a schematic diagram showing the first kind of advance notice effect, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the second kind of notice effect, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the execution timing of the first and second notice effects. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display control process by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. 10 is a flow chart showing a process for starting fluctuation. 7 is a flow chart showing stop/start processing. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a reservation notice in modification 1 of the first embodiment; It is a schematic diagram showing a re-variation effect. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display control process by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram for explaining information included in a first stop display command; 7 is a flow chart showing stop/start processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for re-fluctuation. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a stop result table for holding notice; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for during stop display; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing stop result setting processing for complete failure; FIG. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing a reservation notice in modification 2 of the first embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a stop start time process by MPU of a main control unit. 9A is a flow chart showing processing for grasping the number of times of execution of stop-side special period setting, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram for explaining an execution mode of a suspension notice; 9 is a flow chart showing a variable display time setting process; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for setting a variable display time for complete failure; FIG. 9A is a flow chart showing processing for grasping the number of executions of variable side special period setting, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram for explaining an execution mode of a suspension notice; It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram for explaining an information format of a variation command in modification 3 of the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for a win/fail lottery or the like in the second embodiment; (a) is a general map propriety table, (b) is a general map open pattern, and (c) and (d) are schematic diagrams showing a general map distribution table. It is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time and fixed display time of normal figure game times. It is a schematic diagram showing the state of the display screen in the normal figure game times. It is the schematic which shows the distribution table for normal figure fixed display time. 4 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support by the MPU of the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing normal figure game round control processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of normal figure fixed display time. It is a flow chart showing normal figure game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows role object opening and closing processing. 4 is a flowchart showing setting processing for each round; It is a flowchart which shows normal figure fluctuation display control processing. It is a flow chart showing normal figure fluctuation start processing by the MPU of the notification/production control device. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a special display effect, and (b) is a timing chart showing the relationship between the execution start timing of the special display effect and the fixed display time. It is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time and fixed display time of the normal figure game times in the modification of the second embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by an MPU of a main control device; It is a flowchart which shows a game pause determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of normal figure fixed display time. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. It is a flow chart which shows the error handling processing by MPU of the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. 7 is a flow chart showing processing at the start of stop. 7 is a flow chart showing stop/start processing. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a delayed effect is performed; It is a timing chart showing how a delayed effect is performed. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing error handling processing in a modification of the third embodiment; FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing processing at the start of stop. It is a flowchart which shows the error elimination process by MPU of a main control unit. (a) is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to a fourth embodiment, and (b) is a flow chart showing operation corresponding processing by the MPU of the main control unit. (a) is a flowchart showing a stop start time process, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a delay effect is performed. (a) is a flow chart showing a stop start time process in a modification of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game. 7 is a flow chart showing processing at the start of stop. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. FIG. 10 is a front view for explaining the operation of the second ball-entering section; (a) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the fifth embodiment as seen from the side, and (b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the variable winning device as seen from the back side. It is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process for big hits. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for mid-variation. It is a flowchart which shows the deceleration process of a medium pattern row|line|column. It is a schematic diagram showing the variation speed of the middle pattern row. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing execution timings of early result notification and immediate result notification; It is a flowchart which shows the stop processing of a middle pattern row|line|column. It is a schematic diagram showing a driving notification effect. 4 is a timing chart for explaining execution timings of early result notification and immediate result notification. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing stop start processing in a modified example of the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing V operation processing by the MPU of the main control unit in the sixth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a flow chart showing a stop start process, and (b) is a flow chart showing a V distribution start process. (a) and (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first fixed display time according to the number of reservations, (c) and (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the number of reservations and the V occurrence rate is. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table; FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram showing a success/failure table and a sorting table in the seventh embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. 7 is a flow chart showing processing at the start of stop. It is a flow chart which shows processing for opening. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result determination processing for big hits. It is a flow chart which shows stop result decision processing for reach. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game.

<First embodiment>
A first form of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded state. 2, the configuration within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 1, has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. . The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting a plate-like frame member or the like to four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. A pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by fixing an outer frame 11 to an island facility. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not have to have the outer frame 11, and the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with the outer frame 11 on the island facilities of the game hall.

The game machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 . More specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. It is said that As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. It is considered movable.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at the tip of the rotation, and has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that the game machine main body 12 cannot be opened. In addition, it has a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 that has substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 . A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21 . A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21 . When the game board 24 is attached to the resin base 21, the game area PE formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.例文帳に追加Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. 4(a). FIG. 4(a) is a front view of the game board 24. FIG.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, an operating port unit 33 having an upper operating port 33a and a lower operating port 33b, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a main display section 43, and a display section for role items. 44 etc. are provided respectively.

When a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the variable winning device 32, and the operation holes 33a and 33b, it is detected by a detection sensor arranged on the back side of the game board 24, etc., and based on the detection result, a predetermined A payout of a number of prize balls is executed.

In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 37. - 特許庁The game board 24 is also provided with a large number of nails 38 for appropriately distributing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening, but also the game ball in the game area PE after passing through the opening. Also included is a mode in which it is not discharged from the However, in the following description, in order to distinguish clearly from the entry of a game ball into the out port 37, the entry of a game ball into the variable winning device 32, the operation ports 33a, 33b or the through gate 35 is also referred to as winning. express.

The upper working port 33a and the lower working port 33b are vertically arranged side by side, and both open upward. Further, the operation port unit 33 is provided with an electric accessory 34 having a pair of left and right movable pieces 34a and a driving portion for operating the movable pieces 34a.

The electric accessory 34 (specifically, the drive unit) is connected to a main control device, which will be described later, and based on a signal from the main control device, it is in an open state (support state or guide state) and a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) in which the ball cannot be entered into the lower working opening 33b. It should be noted that it is sufficient for the electric accessory 34 to be able to switch between the first state and the second state in which winning is more likely to occur than in the first state, and it is not necessary to be able to switch between the open state/closed state. .

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes in which the forms of support by the electric accessory 34 are different are set. Specifically, in the support mode, the frequency of the electric accessory 34 being in the open state per unit time is higher than that in the situation where the shooting of the game ball is continued in the same manner to the game area PE. A low-frequency support mode (or low-frequency guide state) and a high-frequency support mode (or high-frequency guide state) are set to be relatively high and low.

In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the operation opening is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Then, when a winning prize is generated in the operating hole, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can play the game while suppressing the consumption (investment) of the balls in his possession.

Here, with reference to FIG. 4(b), a supplementary description will be given of the operating port unit 33 provided with the operating ports 33a and 33b. FIG. 4(b) is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the operating port unit 33. As shown in FIG.

The operation port unit 33 is formed with a guide passage 33c that guides the game balls that have flowed into the upper operation port 33a to a recovery passage provided on the back side of the game board 24. As shown in FIG. The guide passage 33c is branched into a first branch passage 33d and a second branch passage 33e at an intermediate position.

Distributing means 33g for alternately distributing game balls that have reached the branch position in the guide passage 33c to the first branch passage 33d and the second branch passage 33e are provided. The sorting means 33g can be switched between a first guide state in which the game ball that has reached the branch position is guided to the first branch passage 33d and a second guide state in which the game ball is guided to the second branch passage 33e. This sorting means 33g is configured to switch from one guide state to the other guide state based on the guide of the game ball. Therefore, the game balls that have flowed into the upper working port 33a are distributed to the first branch passage 33d/second branch passage 33e in sequence.

The lower operation port 33b is connected to the second branch passage through the communication passage 33f, and the game ball flowing into the lower operation port 33b directly flows into the second branch passage. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the upper working port 33a flows into both branch passages, while the game ball that has flowed into the lower working port 33b flows only into the second branch passage.

A detection sensor 211c for detecting a game ball is provided in the first branch passage 33d (hereinafter also referred to as the first ball entering portion 33d), and in the second branch passage 33e (hereinafter also referred to as the second ball entering portion 33e) A detection sensor 211d for detecting a game ball is arranged at a position downstream of the communicating portion of the communication passage 33f. These detection sensors 211c and 211d are connected to the main controller, and the main controller determines whether the ball enters the branch passages 33d and 33e, that is, the operation opening 33a, based on detection information (detection signals) from the detection sensors 211c and 211d. , 33b is determined.

The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a leading to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32b for opening and closing the large winning opening 32a. The opening/closing door 32b is normally in a closed state in which entry of a game ball into the large winning opening 32a is prohibited, and when the internal lottery wins the shift to the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution state), the large winning opening is opened. It can be switched to an open state in which winning of game balls to 32a is permitted. Here, the open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a jackpot is won. As for the opening mode of the variable prize winning device 32 in the open/close execution mode, variable prize winning is possible with the lapse of a predetermined time (eg 30 sec) or the winning of a predetermined number of prizes (eg 10) as one round, and a plurality of rounds (eg 15 rounds) as the upper limit. There are aspects in which device 32 is repeatedly opened. It is sufficient that the variable winning device 32 can be switched between the first state and the second state in which winning is more likely to occur, and it is not necessary to switch between the open state/closed state.

The main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 are provided on the decorative member 39 arranged along the outer edge of the lower side of the game area PE. The decoration member 39 protrudes from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 . More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces a window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 to make the game area PE visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between is narrower than one game ball. As a result, game balls are prevented from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.例文帳に追加

A main display portion 43 and a character object display portion 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39 . That is, the main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and the game balls can be seen in front of these display portions 43 and 44. It is restrained from falling. It should be noted that, on the upper surface of the decorative member 39, a part of the plurality of general prize winning openings 31 described above is installed in a state of being open upward.

Although detailed description by illustration is omitted, the main display section 43 has a segment display, and the segment display is provided with a result display section for the operating port. The result display section for the operation opening has a display area for the first ball entry section 33d and a display area for the second ball entry section 33e, corresponding to the ball entry sections 33d and 33e on a one-to-one basis. In these display areas, the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the operation openings 33a and 33b (more specifically, the ball entering the ball entering sections 33d and 33e) are clearly displayed. In this case, in the same display area, the variable display (variable display) of the pattern is performed by sequentially lighting and extinguishing each display segment with the winning of the operation openings 33a and 33b as a trigger, and the variable display is stopped. As a result, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning prize is clearly indicated. That is, the lottery result based on the ball entering the first ball entering section 33d is clearly displayed in the display area for the first ball entering section 33d, and the lottery result based on the ball entering the second ball entering section 33e is displayed in the second ball entering section 33e. It is clearly indicated in the display area for the department.

Like the main display unit 43, the character object display unit 44 also has a segment display, and the segment display unit is provided with a character object result display unit. The role item result display section is a display section for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 . In this case, in the character object result display unit, the variable display (or variable display or switching display) of the pattern is performed by sequentially lighting and extinguishing each display segment with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger. , as a result of stopping the variable display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 is clearly displayed. When the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed in the accessory result display part and the variable display is performed. is stopped, it shifts to the electric power open state. In the electric operation open state, the electric accessory 34 provided in the lower operation opening 33b is opened in a predetermined manner.

The variable display unit 36 is provided with a pattern display device 41 which has a display screen 41a and variably displays (variably displays) patterns on the display screen 41a. A center frame 42 is arranged in the variable display unit 36 so as to surround the pattern display device 41 (specifically, the display screen 41a). The upper portion of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen 41a, and the drop of the game ball reduces the visibility of the display screen 41a (for example, the above-mentioned patterns and images for holding, which will be described later). It has a configuration in which it is difficult for this to occur.

The pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device which will be described later. The pattern display device 41 displays, for example, upper, middle, and lower pattern rows, and these pattern rows are scrolled in the left-right direction so as to be variably displayed. In this case, the variable display on the symbol display device 41 is started based on the winning of the operation openings 33a and 33b. Then, for example, in the opening and closing execution mode, the pattern display device 41 is preset in the game cycle to shift to the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to 16 rounds in which the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened 16 times. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

At the bottom of the center frame 42, a holding lamp section 47 corresponding to the role item result display section of the role item display section 44 is provided. The number of times the game ball passes through the through gate 35 is reserved up to four times, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the reservation lamp part 47.例文帳に追加It should be noted that the pending information corresponding to the through gate 35 may be configured to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 .

An inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the game board 24. The inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52 constitute a guide rail, and the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 53. A ball is guided to the upper part of the game area PE. The game ball shooting mechanism 53 is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21, as shown in FIG. action is performed.

The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 has a window portion 61 that allows almost the entire game area PE to be visually recognized from the front. formed (see FIG. 1 or FIG. 2). As shown in FIG. 1, the window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape and is fitted with the above-described window panel 62 . The window panel 62 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but is not limited to this and may be made of transparent and colorless synthetic resin.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window portion 61 . A display lamp portion 63 is provided above the window portion 61 as part of the various lamp portions. Further, on both left and right sides of the display lamp section 63, there are provided speaker sections 64 for outputting sound effects according to the game state.

Below the window portion 61 of the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66, which bulge forward, are vertically arranged side by side. The upper bulging portion 65 is provided with an upper plate 71 that opens upward, and the lower bulging portion 66 is provided with a lower plate 72 that similarly opens upward. The upper tray 71 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device, which will be described later, and guiding them toward the game ball launching mechanism 53 while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 71 . Game balls paid out from the payout device 96 of the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper tray 71 and the lower tray 72 through a passage forming unit 73 (see FIG. 2) provided on the rear surface of the front door frame 14.

In addition, in the area facing the front of the pachinko machine 10 in the upper bulging portion 65, a performance operation portion 75 (specifically, an operation button) manually operated by the player is provided. For example, by manually operating the effect operation section 75 in accordance with a suggestion or the like displayed on the display screen 41a of the pattern display device 41, the effect content on the display screen 41a of the pattern display device 41 or the like corresponds to the same operation. It will be the content of the production.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and a notification/effect control device 82 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

The main control device 81 includes a main control board that controls the main game and a power outage monitoring board that monitors the power supply. Contained and configured. The board box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are inseparably connected by a box connecting portion 85 as separation preventing means (or connecting means), thereby sealing the substrate box 83 . Since the box coupling portions 85 are inseparably connected, the circuit board box 83 needs to be destroyed or partly excised when the internal space of the circuit board box 83 is opened. A plurality of box joint portions 85 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used for the joint processing.

Any configuration can be applied to the box coupling portion 85 as long as it is configured to couple the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened. It is connected to the box cover so that it cannot be opened. The connection processing by the box connection unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the connection, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening should occur. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one long hole of the plurality of box coupling portions 85 . When the board box 83 is to be opened, such as when a problem occurs with the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box coupling portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box coupling portion 85 are separated from each other. and the connecting part with the box body. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the connection process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other box connection portion 85 . If a history of opening the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it is possible to easily find out that the board box 83 has been illegally opened.

A plurality of coupling pieces 86 are provided on one of the short sides of the board box 83 so as to protrude laterally. These connecting pieces 86 are in one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of connecting pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main controller 81. A join process is performed between

As a trace means for detecting unauthorized opening of the circuit board box 83, a seal may be pasted across the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the sealing seal is peeled off from the affixed portion, the adhesive layer of the sealing seal remains on the board box 83 side, leaving a trace. Furthermore, an IC tag that transmits a response wave containing identification information in response to a calling wave of a predetermined frequency is provided on the sealing sticker, and when the sealing sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response wave is removed. A configuration in which wave transmission is disabled may be adopted.

The notification/effect control device 82 is equipped with a notification/effect control board that controls the sound, lamp display, and display control device (not shown) according to instructions from the main control device 81. It is housed in a substrate box 84 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, as shown in FIG. The back pack 91 is made of a synthetic resin having transparency, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81 and the notification/production control device 82 from behind. have.

The payout mechanism part 92 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover part 94, and includes a tank 95 to which the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and the game balls stored in the tank 95. and a payout device 96 for putting out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper tray 71 or the lower tray 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided downstream of the payout device 96 . The payout mechanism 92 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board provided with a power switch for turning the power on and off.

Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal plate 99 on the side of the rotation shaft of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal plate 99 includes an output terminal for outputting a signal when game balls are insufficient in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. an output terminal for outputting a signal each time the machine is rented, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the game machine main body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and state transitions such as opening and closing execution mode An output terminal is provided for signaling when (or during state transitions). Through these output terminals, signals relating to the state of the frame side are output to the management control device on the game hall side. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are rented is unnecessary in a so-called cash machine.

The control device assembly unit 93 includes a payout control device 97 and a power/launch control device 98 . The payout control device 97 and the power supply/launch control device 98 are arranged so that the payout control device 97 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is accommodated in a board box. In this case, the board box of the payout control device 97 may be subjected to fraud prevention means similar to the board box 83 of the main controller 81 .

The power supply/emission control device 98 is configured by housing a power supply/emission control board in a board box. The launching of the game ball accompanying the operation of the shooting handle 54 is controlled. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a memory holding function of various data, so that even in the event of a power failure, the state at the time of the power failure can be retained and the state at the time of the power failure can be restored when the power failure is restored. It's like

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

An MPU 202 is mounted on a main control board 201 provided in the main controller 81 . The MPU 202 is a ROM 203 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 202, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 203. It is an element containing a RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. A part of the functions of the MPU 202, for example, the functions of the ROM 203 and the functions of the RAM 204 may be provided as separate elements.

The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 202 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 205 provided in the main control device 81, a payout control device 97 and various detection sensors 211a to 211e. In this case, the power supply/emission control device 98 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 205 , and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205 . In addition, as part of the various detection sensors 211a to 211e, the general prize winning port 31, the variable prize winning device 32, the operation ports 33a and 33b (specifically, the first ball entering portion 33d and the second ball entering portion 33e), the through gate 35, etc. Detecting sensors provided in the various winning corresponding ball entering parts (payout corresponding ball entering parts) are respectively connected, and based on the detection information (detection signal) from these detection sensors, each entry is detected by the MPU 202 of the main controller 81. Winning determination for the ball section (entering ball determination) is performed. Further, the MPU 202 executes a jackpot generating lottery based on the winning to the operation ports 33a and 33b, and executes a support generating lottery based on the winning to the through gate 35. - 特許庁

The output side of the MPU 202 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, and a notification/production control device 82. A winning ball command is output to the payout control device 97 based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding ball entering portion such as the operation ports 33a and 33b described above, for example. In this case, the command information storage area 224 of the ROM 203 is referred to when outputting the prize ball command. When the winning to the general winning opening 31 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the variable winning device 32 is specified, 15 game balls are output. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout is output, and when the winning to the first ball entering portion 33d is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output to the second ball entering portion 33e When the winning is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is output.

Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, a variation end command, an opening command, an ending command, a hold command, and a shift command are output from the main control device 81 to the notification/production control device 82 . In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area 224 of the ROM 203 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each of the above commands is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various types of information are included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes.

In addition, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning drive unit 32c for opening and closing the open/close door 32b of the variable winning device 32, an electric accessory driving unit 34b for opening and closing the movable piece 34a of the electric accessory 34, and a main display unit. 43 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 201, and the MPU 202 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

In other words, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 202 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 32c so that the big winning opening 32a is opened and closed. Further, when the support lottery for the electric accessory 34 is won, the MPU 202 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34 is opened and closed. Further, display control of the main display section 43 is executed by the MPU 202 .

Furthermore, an external output terminal board 99 is connected to the output side of the MPU 202. Through this external output terminal board 99, ball entry information to various ball entry sections is sent to the game hall side management control device (hall computer HC). Information about lottery results such as winnings and jackpots is output. As a result, the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be grasped by the hall computer HC.

The blackout monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power/launch control device 98, and the blackout monitoring board 205 has a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power/launch control device 98. is provided with the ability to monitor The payout control device 97 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81 .

The power supply/launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 201 and the payout control device 97 etc. are generated with the necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. do. The power/shooting control device 98 is responsible for controlling the shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 53, and the game ball shooting mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met.

Based on various commands input from the main control device 81, the notification/production control device 82 controls the holding lamp portion 47 provided in the variable display unit 36, the display lamp portion 63 and the speaker portion 64 provided in the front door frame 14. etc., and controls the display control device 212 .

The display control device 212 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on the command input from the notification/effect control device 82 . In this case, in the notification/effect control device 82, based on various commands input from the main control device 81, the pattern display device 41 fluctuates the display mode of the pattern (for example, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win effect and the contents of the ready-to-win effect, etc.), the pattern (type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed upon completion of variable display), and an overview of the fixed display mode by the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed.

Here, the configuration related to the variable display of symbols in each game cycle and the contents of the same variable display will be described. 6 and 7 will be referred to as necessary in the following description. 6 and 7 are schematic diagrams for explaining the display contents on the display screen 41a of the pattern display device 41. FIG.

The display control device 212 is provided with a character ROM. In the character ROM, data of 9 types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" (see FIGS. 6(a) to (i)) and data of sub-symbols without numbers. (see FIG. 6(j)) are stored in advance.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41 has three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3, ie upper, middle and lower rows. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. On the display screen 41a, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left) with periodicity.

In the upper pattern row Z1, 9 types of main patterns "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-design is arranged between each main design. In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 kinds of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1" A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the upper part, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 7B, the display screen 41a is designed so that three symbols are statically displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3×3 are statically displayed. It is designed to be Five effective lines are set on the display screen 41a, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a downward-sloping line L4, and an upward-sloping line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols with the same number) is formed on any of the activated lines. When the variable display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed in this state, a moving image for the big win (for example, an opening movie) is displayed as the result of the big win.

Considering that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). 2 pattern row), and the middle pattern row Z2 can be called a third pattern row (or a third pattern row).

Of the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to the “specific symbols”, and when the first type jackpot result (16R compatible jackpot result) occurs , for example, a combination of the same specific symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when the second type jackpot result (4R corresponding jackpot result) occurs, for example, the same A combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed.

The pattern display device 41 may arbitrarily display the patterns in any manner, and is not limited to the above. can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be arranged horizontally, and the direction of the variable display of symbols in the symbol rows may be set in the vertical direction.

In the display screen 41a, a reserved display area NE is set in a portion below the variable display area ME having the variable display area for the upper symbol row, the variable display area for the middle symbol, and the variable display area for the lower symbol. ing. In the holding display area NE, the same number of unit holding display areas Da1 to Da8 as the maximum holding number when the game ball wins the operation openings 33a and 33b (when the ball enters the ball entering portions 33d and 33e) There is provided a reserved number display area Da that is partitioned so as to line up in the left-right direction.

Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls is four when the game ball enters the first ball entering section 33d, and the maximum number of reserved balls is four when the game ball enters the second ball entering section 33e. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a total of eight pieces of hold information are stored in order of winning to the first ball entering section 33d and the second ball entering section 33e. Corresponding to this, in the number of pending display areas Da, the first unit pending display area Da1, the second unit pending display area Da2, the third unit pending display area Da3, the fourth unit pending display area Da4, the fifth unit pending display An area Da5, a sixth unit reserved display area Da6, a seventh unit reserved display area Da7, and an eighth unit reserved display area Da8 are set.

For example, when the number of reservations (total number of reservations) when the game ball wins the operation openings 33a and 33b is 1, the predetermined reservation display image MP is displayed only in the first unit reservation display area Da1. , When the number of reservations when the game ball wins the operation openings 33a and 33b is 4, a predetermined reservation display image MP is displayed in the first unit reservation display area Da1 to the fourth unit reservation display area Da4 It is configured to be Note that FIG. 6B illustrates a case where the number of pending items is three.

In addition, in the pending display area NE, the pending display image corresponding to the game round to be executed (in progress) is arranged side by side with the pending number display area Da (more specifically, the first unit pending display area Da1) An execution target display area Db in which MP is displayed is provided.

When the game cycle ends and the next game cycle is started, the pending display image MP displayed in the pending number display area Da (first unit pending display area Da1) moves to the execution target display area Db, The pending display image MP displayed in the pending number display area Da is shifted to the lower side.

A special display area OE is set in the display screen 41a above the variable display area ME. A display portion KP is provided in the special display area OE, and variable display is possible by switching the display color of the display portion KP. The special display area OE is smaller than the variable display area in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the display area KP in the special display area OE is smaller than each symbol (main symbol and sub symbol).

The special display area OE corresponds to the main display section 43, and when the main display section 43 performs the variable display, the special display area OE also performs the variable display. Specifically, the variable display on the display unit KP is performed by matching the variable display of the pattern on the main display unit 43 with the variable display start timing and variable display time. Furthermore, for the stop display on the display section KP (the state in which the display color is not switched and the display color is fixed), the stop display of the pattern on the main display section 43 is made to coincide with the stop display start timing and the stop display time. It is done in this way.

In the present embodiment, the stop display on the display KP does not show the result of winning or failing judgment based on the winning of the operation openings 33a and 33b. may be provided to explicitly or suggest the above results. Moreover, the display unit KP is not limited to being configured with a single display image, and may be configured with a plurality of display images.

<About various counters>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

During the game, the MPU 202 uses various counter information to set the lottery for the occurrence of big wins, display settings of the main display section 43, outline settings of the pattern display of the pattern display device 41, display settings of the accessory display section 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 8, when judging the jackpot type such as the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the jackpot occurrence and the jackpot result of the first type jackpot and the result of the second jackpot A jackpot type counter C2 to be used, a reach random number counter C3 to be used for reach lottery when the pattern display device 41 loses and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI to be used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a main display unit. 43, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in the variable display area ME of the pattern display device 41, and the variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time of the display part KP in the special display area OE. there is Further, an electric accessory release counter C4 is used for lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 34 of the lower operating port 33b is to be in the electric role open state.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204 . In the lottery counter buffer 231, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is the winning to the operation ports 33a and 33b (more specifically, the first ball entering section 33d or the second ball entering section 33e), it is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 as acquired information storage means.

The reserved ball storage area 232 includes a reserved area RE for an actuation opening and an execution area AE. The reservation area RE comprises a first area Ra1, a second area Ra2, a third area Ra3, a fourth area Ra4, a fifth area Ra5, a sixth area Ra6, a seventh area Ra7 and an eighth area Ra8, and is operated. The jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the lottery counter buffer 231, the jackpot random number counter C1, and the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 in accordance with the winning history to the openings 33a and 33b (more specifically, the history of winning balls to the first ball entering section 33d and the second ball entering section 33e). Numerical information of the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as reserved information in one of the areas Ra1 to Ra8. Note that the pending information corresponds to special information.

In the 1st area Ra1 to the 8th area Ra8, when a winning prize to the operation openings 33a and 33b (more specifically, a ball entering the first ball entering section 33d and the second ball entering section 33e) occurs consecutively multiple times. Further, each numerical information is chronologically displayed in the order of first area Ra1→second area Ra2→third area Ra3→fourth area Ra4→fifth area Ra5→sixth area Ra6→seventh area Ra7→eighth area Ra8. will be stored in Since the eight areas Ra1 to Ra8 are provided in this way, there are four entry histories of game balls to the first ball entry portion 33d and the second ball entry portion 33e, that is, to the operation ports 33a and 33b. Up to eight winning histories are reserved and stored. In addition, a total number of reserved balls storage area is provided in the reserved ball storage area 232, and the total number of reserved balls is stored in the total number of reserved balls storage area. Information for specifying the number of stored pending information is stored.

For example, if a ball enters only one of the first ball entering portion 33d and the second ball entering portion 33e, and the number of balls entering is 4 or more, the maximum number of winnings to the operation openings 33a and 33b is stored. is limited to four, but as long as game balls are alternately entered into the first ball entry portion 33d and the second ball entry portion 33e by the distribution means 33g already described, the winning to the operation openings 33a and 33b The maximum number of memories related to will be raised to eight. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the number of stored pending information from peaking out at four even in a situation where it is difficult to win a prize to the lower opening 33b. .

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area Ra1 of the reserve area RE when starting the variable display on the main display section 43, and when starting one game cycle, the execution area AE Based on the various numerical information stored in the AE, determination of success or failure is performed.

For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 299, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 299). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 299). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the actuation openings 33a and 33b, more specifically, the timing at which the game ball that has flowed into the ball entry portions 33d and 33e is detected by the detection sensors 211c and 211d. is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204.

Random number values for winning a jackpot are stored as a success/failure table (success/failure information group) in a success/failure table storage area 221 as success/failure information group storage means in the ROM 203 . Here, the contents of the success/failure table will be described.

In the success/failure table, address information consisting of binary number information and jackpot numerical value information likewise consisting of binary number information are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Specifically, the address information is expressed in decimal numbers and 10 types from "1" to "10" are set, and the jackpot numerical information is expressed in decimal numbers as "7", "36", and "67". , ``100'', ``131'', ``164'', ``195'', ``223'', ``241'', and ``272''. are mapped. The numerical value of each jackpot numerical value information is included in the numerical range of random number information "0" to "299" that can be updated in the jackpot random number counter C1.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a low-probability mode (low-probability state) and a high-probability mode (high-probability state) are set as the lottery mode of the win/fail lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the low-probability mode and the number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the high-probability mode are different, and the former is smaller than the latter. Specifically, in the low-probability mode, only the jackpot numerical information whose address information is "1" is referred to in the lottery, and in the high-probability mode, the jackpot numerical information corresponding to all the address information is referred to in the lottery. Referenced. That is, in the low-probability mode, there is one piece of numerical information for winning the jackpot, and in the high-probability mode, there are ten pieces, which is more than in the low-probability mode. As a result, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability mode is 1/300, whereas the probability of winning a jackpot in the high-probability mode is 1/30, and the high-probability mode is higher than the low-probability mode. Higher chance of winning. As long as the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of random numbers for winning are arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 29). The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when the game ball enters the actuation openings 33a and 33b, specifically the timing at which the game ball that has flowed into the ball entry portions 33d and 33e is detected by the detection sensors 211c and 211d. is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203 . Then, as the allocation destination, the first type jackpot result (16R special game result) and the second type jackpot result (4R special game result) are set.

When the result of the first type jackpot and the result of the second type jackpot are won, the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode, and after the shift to the support mode. is a jackpot result in which the high-frequency support mode is established until the number of games reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times). In addition, after the end reference number of times (prescribed number of times) has passed, the normal game state corresponding to the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode is entered. In the following description, a game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode is called a high probability game state.

The variable winning device 32 is opened 16 times when the first type jackpot result is obtained, and the variable winning device 32 is opened four times when the second type jackpot result is obtained. In other words, the number of game balls that can be acquired in the open/close execution mode is set to be larger in the result of the first type jackpot than in the result of the second type jackpot, and the degree of advantage is set to be different.

In addition, in the distribution table corresponding to the first ball entering portion 33d, "0 to 9" correspond to the first type jackpot results, "10 to 29" correspond to the second type jackpot results, and the second In the distribution table corresponding to the ball-entering portion 33e, "0 to 19" correspond to the first-class jackpot results, and "20 to 29" correspond to the second-class jackpot results. Thus, the difference is provided so that the sorting based on the ball entering the second ball entering portion 33e is more advantageous for the player than the sorting based on the ball entering the first ball entering portion 33d.

The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the actuation openings 33a and 33b, more specifically, the timing at which the game ball that has flowed into the ball entry portions 33d and 33e is detected by the detection sensors 211c and 211d. is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204. Then, whether or not to generate reach is determined based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203 . However, in the game round in which the open/close execution mode is entered, the MPU 202 determines whether or not to generate a reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Although the number of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, it may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach indication may be set larger than in the low-frequency support mode.

Here, the ready-to-win display (ready-to-win state) is provided with a pattern display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of patterns (patterns), and the open/close execution mode of the variable winning device 32 is a high-frequency winning mode. In the gaming machine where the stop display result after the variable display is the special display result in the game round, the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the pattern (picture) in the pattern display device 41 is started. It is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to result in the above-mentioned special display before being displayed.

In other words, by stopping and displaying the symbols of some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode can be obtained. It is a display state in which possible combinations of ready-to-win symbols are displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a step prior to ending the variable display of symbols, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is displayed on a preset active line in the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41. To form a ready-to-win line by stop-displaying a combination of ready-to-win patterns that can be established, and to perform variable display of patterns by a final stop pattern row under the condition that the ready-to-win line is formed.

Referring to FIG. 7, an example of a display mode in the above reach display will be described. In the case of the ready-to-win display, the variable display of symbols is first terminated (stopped display) in the upper symbol row Z1, and then the variable display of symbols is terminated (stopped display) in the lower symbol row Z3. In this state, a reach line is formed by stop-displaying main symbols having the same number on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. Under the condition that the ready-to-win line is formed, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the middle symbol row Z2 to provide the ready-to-win display. When the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbols having the same number as the main symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2. The variable display of the symbol ends.

In addition, in the ready-to-win display, while the combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. It includes those that perform production, and those that perform ready-to-win production by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen after reducing or hiding the combination of ready-to-win patterns. In addition, when the ready-to-win display is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, it is determined whether or not to perform an omen display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. can be

The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 202 to determine the variation display time on the main display section 43 and the variation display time on the variation display area ME and the special display area OE of the pattern display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is obtained when determining the variation pattern when the symbol display device 41 starts varying the symbols.

When determining the fluctuation display time in the pattern display device 41 and the main display section 43 (more specifically, the result display section for the operation port), the buffer values of the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS, the display time table storage area of the ROM 203 223 is referenced. Also, in the MPU 202, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE are used to determine the stop result in the result display section for the operation port. , the stop result determination table stored in the ROM 203 is used.

The electric accessary product release counter C4 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 199, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 199). The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 233 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is made as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34 to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4=0 to 99, the electric accessory 34 is controlled to open state, and if C4=100 to 199, the electric accessory 34 is not controlled to open state.

(Regarding various processes executed by the main controller 81)
Next, the timer interrupt processing and normal processing which are executed in advancing the game in each game round by the MPU 202 in the main control device 81 will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 202 executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). , the description of these various processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started by the MPU 202 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various winning detection sensors is executed. That is, it reads the states of various winning detection sensors connected to the main controller 81, determines the states of the winning detection sensors, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

After that, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204 .

In the subsequent step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and cleared to 0 when those counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 204. FIG.

In the subsequent step S104, a prize-winning process for through accompanying the prize-winning to the through gate 35 is executed. In the win-through processing, it is determined whether or not a prize-winning detection flag for through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. If the flag is stored, it is stored in the electric work holding area. On the condition that the number of stored accessory pending memories is less than 4, the value of the electric role product release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electrical role pending area. In addition, the notification/production control device 82 executes processing for lighting the pending lamp portion 47 of the variable display unit 36 corresponding to the pending memory number. Then, when the prize winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 235, the prize winning detection flag is erased and the prize winning processing for the through gate is terminated.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, in which the winning process for the working openings accompanying the winning of the working openings 33a and 33b is executed, and this timer interrupt process ends. do.

<Winning process for operating port>
Here, the prize winning process for the working opening will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG.

In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first ball entering portion 33d (winning a prize). When it is determined that the game ball has entered the first ball entering portion 33d, the process proceeds to step S202, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out three game balls is set.

In the following step S203, external signal setting processing is performed to output information indicating that the game ball has entered the first ball entering portion 33d as a signal to the hall computer HC on the gaming hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that the ball has entered the first ball entering portion 33d. After that, in step S204, information acquisition processing for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, etc. is performed, and the prize winning processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the first ball entering section 33d, the process proceeds to step S205. In step S205, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (won) the second ball entering portion 33e. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second ball entering portion 33e, the process proceeds to step S206, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out four game balls is set. Incidentally, the prize ball commands set in steps S202 and S206 are transmitted to the payout control device 97 in the external output processing S401 of the normal processing to be described later.

In the following step S207, external signal setting processing is performed to output information indicating that the game ball has entered the second ball entering portion 33e as a signal to the hall computer HC on the gaming hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that the ball has entered the second ball entering portion 33e. After that, information acquisition processing is performed in step S204, and the prize winning processing ends.

If a negative determination is made in the process of step S205, that is, if there is no ball entry in either the first ball entry section 33d or the second ball entry section 33e, the main winning process is terminated.

Here, the information acquisition processing in step S204 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Information Acquisition Processing>
In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, the number N of the start holding storage stored in the holding number storage area FE of the holding ball storage area 232, specifically, the relevant It is determined whether or not the start pending storage number N related to the ball-entering unit that triggered the information acquisition process is less than the upper limit value ("4" in the present embodiment). If the number N of starting pending memories is equal to the upper limit, this information acquisition process is terminated, and if it is less than the upper limit, the number N of starting pending memories of the corresponding ball-entering section is incremented by 1 in step S302. At the same time, the total number of reservations stored in the number of reservations storage area FE (hereinafter referred to as common number of reservations CRN) stored in step S303 is incremented by one.

In the following step S304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in step S103 are first stored in the empty storage area of the operating port reservation area RE. , that is, the storage area corresponding to the common reservation number CRN incremented by one in step S302.

In subsequent steps S305 and S306, the notification/production control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side (secondary side), indicates that a prize has been won into the actuation openings 33a and 33b (a ball has entered into the ball entry portions 33d and 33e). Then, confirmation processing for pending notice and processing for setting a pending command, which are processing for causing the display control device 212 to recognize and execute a pending notice to be described later, are executed, and this information acquisition processing ends. The hold command includes information as to which one of the first ball-entering section 33d and the second ball-entering section 33e is based on winning a prize.

The pending command set in the pending command setting process of step S306 is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process described later. Upon receiving the pending command, the display control device 212 executes processing for changing the display in the pending number display area Da described above in accordance with the increase in the pending number.

Specifically, when the display control device 212 receives the same command via the notification/production control device 82, the display control device 212 displays the pending display image MP in the pending number display area Da. Execute processing for (for example, adding). In the pending number display area Da, the pending images are displayed sequentially from the left side. For example, if the common pending number CRN is 1, the pending image is displayed in the first unit pending display area Da1 at the left end, and the common pending If the number CRN is 8, the pending image is displayed in the eighth unit pending display area Da8 from the left.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated when the power is turned on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processing of steps S401 to S406 is executed as regular processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of steps S408 and S409 is executed during the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, an external signal output processing is executed in step S401. In the external signal output process of step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97 . In addition, if various commands such as command for effect such as command for variation, type command, command for end of variation, hold command and command for shift to be described later are set, it is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 do.

Next, in step S402, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204 .

In the following step S403, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In this game round control processing, big hit determination, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the main display section 43, and the like are performed.

After executing the game round control process of step S403, it progresses to step S404 and executes a game state transition process. Although the details will be described later, this game state transition processing causes the game state to shift to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode (high probability game state). Details of the game round control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be described later.

In the following step S405, an electric role support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34 provided in the operation opening unit 33 is executed. In this electric role support process, numerical information obtained from the electric role product release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 233 of the RAM 204 is used to determine whether or not to open the electric role product 34. A lottery is conducted, and opening/closing processing of the electric accessory 34 is executed when the electric role open state is won. In addition, display control of the accessory display unit 44 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric role opening lottery.

As already explained, as modes of support by the electric accessory 34, a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set, and transition to one of the support modes is performed in the game state transition process. After this processing, if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204, the high frequency support mode is set, and if the flag is not set, the low frequency support mode is set.

In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 . Then, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34 is in the open state is set larger than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role open state is won, and one time Set a longer open time. In addition, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role open state is won and the open state of the electric accessory 34 occurs a plurality of times, the next open state is started after one open state is completed. Set so that the closing time up to is shorter than the opening time of one time.

Incidentally, when shifting to the open/close execution mode, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode even if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 .

Thereafter, in step S406, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball launch control process, once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on the condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power/shoot control device 98 (i.e., the launch operation is being performed). , excites the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 53 . As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In the following step S407, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process.

That is, in step S408, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204 . Also, in step S409, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204 .

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S406 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated. The variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, the game round control processing in step S403 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 13 to 16 and the like.

In the game round control process, first, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 13, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress. If it is in the open/close execution mode, the process after step S502, that is, the game round start process of steps S503 to S506 and the game round progress process of steps S507 to S510 are not executed. End the control process.

If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the result display section for the operating port of the main display section 43 is in the variable display mode. If the result display section for the working port is not displaying the variation, the process proceeds to step S503. In step S503, it is determined whether or not the confirmation display in the result display section for the operating port of the main display section 43 has ended. That is, after the end of the variable display, the display of the result is continued for a predetermined period of time. End the control process. In other words, the start of the next game round is restricted during the confirmation display.

If negative determinations are made in both steps S502 and S503, the process proceeds to the game round start processing of steps S504 to S506. In the game round start process, first, in step S504, it is determined whether or not the total number of start-reserved balls (common reserved number CRN) is "0". When the common number of reservations CRN is “0”, it means that the reservation information is not stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 . Therefore, this game round control process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the common reserved number CRN is not "0", in step S505 data setting processing for setting the data stored in the reserved area RE of the reserved ball storage area 232 for variable display is executed, Further, in step S506, after executing the variation start processing for starting the variation display on the main display section 43 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41, the game round control processing is terminated.

Here, the data setting process in step S505 and the variation start process in step S506 will be described in detail. First, the data setting process in step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Data setting process>
In the data setting process, first, in step S601, of the starting hold storage number N stored in the hold number storage area FE, the one targeted for the current setting process and the common hold number CRN are decremented by one. In subsequent step S602, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the reservation area RE is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S603, a process of shifting the data (that is, the reservation information) stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra8 of the reservation area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8 to the lower area side. First area Ra1, third area Ra3→second area Ra2, fourth area Ra4→third area Ra3, fifth area Ra5→fourth area Ra4, sixth area Ra6→fifth area Ra5, seventh area Ra7→ The data in each area is shifted in the order of sixth area Ra6, eighth area Ra8→seventh area Ra7.

In the subsequent step S604, a shift time command is set which is information for making the notification/effect control device 82 recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. After that, the data setting process is terminated. The shift command set in step S604 is transmitted to the display control device 212 via the notification/effect control device 82 in step S401 of the normal processing (FIG. 12). The display control device 212 receives the shift command, and executes processing for changing the display in the reserved number display area Da for the operating port in accordance with the decrease in the reserved number.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing of step S506 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S701, a success/failure judgment process for judging whether or not the reservation information referred to in the fluctuation start process of this time corresponds to the winning of the jackpot is executed. Specifically, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information obtained from the information for judging the jackpot, ie, the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1, is grasped. Then, when the success/failure lottery mode is the low-probability mode, the success/failure table for the low-probability mode stored in the success/failure table storage area 221 of the ROM 203 is referred to, and the grasped information corresponds to the jackpot winning. If the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, the win/fail table for the high probability mode stored in the win/fail table storage area 221 of the ROM 203 is referred to, and the grasped information is used as a jackpot. Identify whether it is included in the information corresponding to winning.

In the following step S702, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination process in step S701 corresponds to the winning of the jackpot. If the result corresponds to the jackpot winning, a type determination process is executed in step S703.

In the type determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, information for type determination, that is, information obtained from the information updated by the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Also, the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 222 of the ROM 203 is referred to, and it is specified whether or not the grasped information for type determination is included in the information corresponding to the first type jackpot result. Specifically, when the hold information corresponds to a ball entering the first ball-entering unit 33d, the allocation table for the first ball-entering unit 33d is referred to, and the hold information corresponds to the ball entering the second ball-entering unit 33e. If the ball is compatible with the ball entering into the second ball entering section 33e, the classification table is referred to to determine the type.

In subsequent step S704, it is determined whether or not the type of the current jackpot winning is the first type jackpot result based on the information specified in the type determination processing in step S703. If it is the result of the first kind jackpot, the stop result setting process for the first kind jackpot is executed in step S705, and if it is not the result of the first kind jackpot, the stop for the second kind jackpot is executed in step S706. Execute result setting processing. If it is determined in step S702 that the jackpot has not been won, then in step S707 stop result setting processing for the time of loss is executed.

In each stop result setting process in steps S705 to S707, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 203 is referred to for information on the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43. The specified information is stored in the RAM 204 . Further, in steps S705 and S706, information (first-class jackpot flag or second-class jackpot flag) for specifying by the MPU 202 that the winning/failure determination result of the current game round is a jackpot result is stored in the RAM 204 by various Stored in the flag storage area 235 .

After executing any of the processes of steps S705 to S707, in step S708, a variable display time setting process for performing variable display is executed. In the subsequent step S709, a variation command and a type command are set. The variation command includes information on the presence or absence of a big win, information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and information on the variation display time. Also, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes information on the result of the first-type jackpot, information on the result of the second-type jackpot, information on the result of losing, etc. as information on the game result.

The variation command and type command set in step S709 are transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The notification/effect control device 82 determines the emission pattern of the display lamp portion 63 and the output pattern of the sound from the speaker portion 64 in the game cycle based on the received variation command and type command, and determines the determined effect. The display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled so that the contents are executed. In addition, the notification/effect control device 82 transmits the variation command and the type command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form thereof. The display control device 212 grasps the variation display pattern of the symbol display device 41 in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls the symbol display device so that the variation display pattern thus grasped is executed. 41 is displayed and controlled. After that, in step S710, after the variable display of the pattern is started in the operating port display section of the main display section 43, the variable start processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of the game round control process (FIG. 13), when the main display unit 43 is in the variable display, the game round progressing process of steps S507 to S510 is executed. In the game round progress processing, first, in step S507, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204 has become "0". The value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 17), as described above. Also, the value of this set variable display time information is decremented (subtracted) by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is started.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, a variable display process is executed in step S508. In the variable display process, the display mode on the main display section 43 is changed. After that, the game round control process is terminated.

If the variable display time has passed, the fixed display process is executed in step S509. The confirmation display process is for confirming and displaying the picture on the main display section 43 based on the stop result set in any one of the above steps S705 to S707. After execution of step S509, this game round control process is terminated. Details of the confirmation display processing in step S509 will be described later.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing of step S404 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the change display→fixed display in the main display section 43 (more specifically, the result display section for the operation port) of the first game cycle has ended. If it is not the timing when the confirmation display ends, the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if it is the timing at which the confirmation display ends, it is determined in step S803 whether or not the game result of the current game round corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first type jackpot flag or the second type jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 . If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If any of the above flags is stored, an opening process is executed in step S804. In the opening processing, the opening time at the start of the opening/closing execution mode is set. Then, in step S805, in the round counter area RC provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, a value determined according to the jackpot type, specifically "16" in the case of the first jackpot, In the case of a double jackpot, "4" is set. The round counter area RC is a counter area for counting the number of times the big winning opening 32a is opened. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S801, and the process proceeds to step S806. In step S806, a big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. In the big winning opening opening/closing process, when the big winning opening 32a is closed, the variable winning driving section 32c is brought into a driving state on condition that the round counter area RC is "1" or more. The mouth 32a is opened. In addition, when the big winning opening 32a is open, a predetermined time (30 sec in this embodiment) has passed since the opening of the big winning opening 32a, or a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) ) game balls have won, the driving state of the variable winning drive unit 32c is stopped, and the big winning opening 32a is closed.

In the subsequent step S807, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is "0". If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", the game state transition processing is terminated. When the value of the round counter area RC is "0", in step S808, transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed.

In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the win/fail lottery mode is set to the high-probability mode, and the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are terminated when the game cycle continues for a specified number of times (100 times) or when a jackpot is won during the specified number of times. The support mode shifts to a normal game state in which the low-frequency support mode is used.

After that, in step S809, after the end processing of the open/close execution mode is executed, the game state transition processing is ended. In the end processing of the opening/closing execution mode, the jackpot flag stored in the various flag storage area 235 is erased, and an ending command as a command indicating the end of the opening/closing execution mode is output to the notification/effect control device 82. process.

The notification/effect control device 82 displays a moving image (ending movie) indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is terminated based on this ending command. This moving image includes information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode will end and the game will shift to a high-quality game state.

In the present embodiment, the progress speed of the game is changed according to the game situation, thereby suppressing the monotonous progress of the game. Here, the variable display time setting process shown in step S708 (see FIG. 15) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Processing for setting variable display time>
In the variable display time setting process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the first special jackpot flag or the second special jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 .

If a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss result, the process proceeds to step S902. In step S902, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur on the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach indication, an affirmative determination is made in step S902 as the occurrence of the reach indication. The reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to when identifying the presence or absence of the reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3.

If an affirmative determination is made in either step S901 or step S902, the process proceeds to step S903, and the fluctuation display time table for reach generation stored in the display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is referred to. Variation display time information corresponding to the value of the type counter CS, etc. is obtained, and in step S904, the variation display time information is stored in the variation display time counter area (variation display time measuring means) provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. set to After that, the setting process is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a jackpot winning result or when the result of the same lottery is a losing result and the lottery for the occurrence of the reach is won, the reach display is executed. ing.

Here, the reach display is provided with normal reach display and super reach display which are different from each other in variable display modes. Variable display time information corresponding to each normal reach display and super reach display is set in the variable display time table for reach generation, and by referring to the table, variable display time information corresponding to each reach display can be obtained. is obtained. Regarding the determination of the type of reach display, a table is provided in which the type of reach display corresponds to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. A corresponding reach indication is determined.

In more detail, the variable display time table for reach generation corresponds to the type of jackpot. Specifically, in the case of the first type jackpot result, the variable display time is set so that the combination of specific symbols can be stopped and displayed, and in the case of the second type jackpot result, the combination of non-specific symbols is set. A variable display time is set so that the display can be stopped. By the way, the variable display time table for reach generation to be referred to is common in both the normal game state and the high probability game state.

Returning to the description of step S902, if a negative determination is made in step S902, the process proceeds to step S905. In step S905, it is determined whether or not the game state is a high-probability game state. When an affirmative determination is made in step S905, the process proceeds to step S906, and the variable display time table for reach non-occurrence corresponding to the high certainty gaming state stored in the display time table storage area 223 is referred to, and the current variation type counter is displayed. A variable display time corresponding to the value of CS is acquired, and the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area in step S906. After that, the setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S905, the process proceeds to step S907, and the variable display time table for reach non-occurrence corresponding to the normal game state stored in the display time table storage area 223 is referred to, and the current variation type A variable display time corresponding to the value of the counter CS is acquired, and the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area in step S906. After that, the setting process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the variable display time information at the time of reach non-occurrence is set to be, for example, 8 seconds. Further, the variable display time information at the time of reach non-occurrence is set so that the variable display time becomes shorter as the number of common pending numbers CRN increases. Specifically, when the number of holds is 3 or more, the time is set to be shorter than 8 sec (for example, 4 sec) (number of holds time reduction function). Furthermore, when the high probability gaming state (the support mode is the high frequency support mode), the number of pending information is the same as when the normal gaming state (the support mode is the low frequency support mode). The variable display time table for reach non-occurrence is set so that a variable display time that is shorter than a certain case is selected.

As described above, the variable display time of each game round is determined by the presence or absence of reach occurrence, the type of reach display, the number of pending information stored (the number of subsequent pending information), and the value of the variable type counter CS, etc. as parameters. determined (so-called time-saving function). However, the variable display time of each game round is the content of other pending information, specifically, the information for judging the jackpot, the information for judging the type, and the information for judging reach, which are included in the other pending information, as parameters. determined without

Some of the recent pachinko machines are set so that the number of winning balls associated with the entering ball section to which the electric accessory is attached is "3" or more. In this type of gaming machine, the electric accessory picks up a large number of game balls, so that the player can be given a privilege more than expected. Therefore, in order to avoid such an event, the opening time etc. in the high frequency winning mode is suppressed so that the ball entering the electric accessory is not excessive, and accordingly, the variable display time per game is determined. In other words, suppressing the occurrence of incoming balls is a factor that hinders shortening of the variable display time. In addition, in such a configuration, it is possible to increase the number of balls held in a high accuracy game state by shooting game balls in accordance with the release of the electric role by technical intervention such as so-called stop hitting. If such an action becomes easy, there is concern that the function of improving the digestion speed will not be used well, and speedy progress of the game will remain unrealized.

In the present embodiment, as already explained, the number of winning balls based on the ball entering the second ball entering portion 33e is "1". By setting the number of winning balls to ``1'' for the number of winning balls of ``1'', the opening time of the electric accessory 34 is more than twice that of the conventional game machine (approximately ``6 sec'' in this embodiment). Even if it is configured so as to be left on, it is possible to avoid giving the player a privilege exceeding the assumption described above. In other words, even if most of the game balls that are shot enter the electric accessory 34 → the second ball entering portion 33e, the above-mentioned inconvenience caused by this does not occur. Therefore, the above-mentioned time-saving function can be suitably exhibited, and the improvement of the holding digestion speed in the high certainty gaming state is realized.

Here, in the present embodiment, the production related to the pending notice suggesting the contents of the pending information stored in the pending ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 is performed before the game cycle related to the pending information is started. It is configured to run. The performance corresponding to the reservation information not yet targeted for the lottery is executed at the timing before the game turn related to the reservation information. According to this configuration, not only the game for confirming the lottery result of the reservation information corresponding to the game round currently in progress, but also the result when the reservation information to be the lottery target later becomes the lottery object is the content of the above effect. A game of confirming or making a prediction is added to diversify the game. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

<Regarding pending notice>
Next, the flow of the pending notice will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 18 . The suspension notice is performed using the fixed display time in the game round before the game round (specific game round) for which the suspension notice is intended. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 18(a1) and 18(a2), after the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41 completes the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, as shown in FIG. 18(a3) In addition, a plurality of effect images (bubble images) imitating bubbles are displayed upward from the lower end of the display screen 41a.

This bubble image is an opaque or translucent display image, and is displayed on the front side of the symbols while the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed. Therefore, when the bubble image passes in front of the pattern, the pattern is hidden behind the bubble image. However, the passage area of the bubble image does not overlap the display portion KP in the special display area OE, or even if it does overlap, the amount is small, and the visibility of the display portion KP is not hindered by the bubble image or is hardly hindered. .

This advance notice display effect is executed over a plurality of game rounds before the specific game round. Specifically, two times is set as the number of executions of the notice effect, and it is performed in each game round from the game round two games before the specific game round. That is, as shown in FIGS. 18(a1) to (a3), after the bubble image is displayed in the confirmation display in the previous game round, as shown in FIGS. 18(a4) to (a6), the The confirmation display in the next game round is performed by similarly displaying the bubble image.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 18(a7) to (a10), in the specific game round, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed with the stop result corresponding to the result of the win/loss determination. At that time, the bubble image as the suspension notice is not displayed in the fixed display of the specific game round. In addition, in FIG. 18, as a specific game round, after the start of fluctuation of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, a big hit result or a losing reach result is notified via a reach performance.

As the processing related to the reservation notice, confirmation processing for the reservation notice (step S305 in FIG. 11) is set. The winning process (FIG. 10), more specifically, is configured to be executed as part of the information acquisition process in step S204. That is, the confirmation process for the reservation notice is configured to be executed based on the winning of the operation openings 33a and 33b. Hereinafter, confirmation processing for the reservation notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 19 .

<Confirmation processing for hold notice>
In the confirmation process for the pending notice, in step S1001, the starting pending storage number N and the common pending number CRN stored in the pending number storage area FE of the pending ball storage area 232 are read, and the information on the pending number is sent to the MPU 202. Store in a register. After that, in steps S1002 to S1006, it is confirmed whether or not the reservation information acquired by the current winning includes information on winning the big prize.

Specifically, first in step S1002, information for judging the big hit among the pending information acquired in step S304 (FIG. 11) based on the current winning to the operation ports 33a and 33b, that is, the acquired big hit random number counter Grasp the value of C1.

In subsequent step S1003, it is determined whether or not the mode is the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the low-probability mode by determining whether or not the high-probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 . In the case of the low-probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1004, and the information for determining the jackpot (the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S1002 by referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is information corresponding to the jackpot winning. Identify inclusion in a group. In addition, in the case of the high-probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1005, the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to, and the information for judging the jackpot (the value of the random number counter C1 for the jackpot) grasped in step S1002 is determined as the jackpot winning. Identify whether it is included in the set information.

After step S1004 or step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006, and it is determined whether or not the information for judging the big win (the value of the random number counter C1 for the big win) grasped in step S1002 corresponds to winning the big win. If it corresponds to the jackpot winning, the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1007, and the confirmation processing for this pending notice is terminated.

In addition, in the process of step S1007, the information for judging the jackpot type among the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the winning of this time, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that has already been obtained is grasped, and the distribution table is changed. Refer to it and determine the type of jackpot. Therefore, the information stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1007 includes information on the type of jackpot (whether it is a normal jackpot or a variable probability jackpot).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1006, the process proceeds to step S1008. In step S1008, out of the hold information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning to the operation openings 33a and 33b, information for out-reach determination, that is, the value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 is grasped.

In the following step S1009, the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to, and grasped in step S1008 It is specified whether the information for reach determination (the value of the reach random number counter C3) is included in the information set as reach winning.

After executing the process of step S1009, the process advances to step S1010 to determine whether or not the reach determination information (the value of the reach random number counter C3) grasped in step S1008 corresponds to the occurrence of reach. If reach occurrence is supported, the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1011, and then this confirmation process ends. On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, the confirmation process is terminated as it is.

The jackpot information and reach occurrence information stored in the register of the MPU 202 in steps S1007 and S1011 are referred to when setting the pending command in step S306 in the information acquisition process (FIG. 11). The pending command is set so as to include information on the presence or absence of the jackpot and the type of jackpot.

Here, in the present embodiment, the confirmation display time for confirming and displaying the pattern on the main display unit 43 is set in association with the result specified by the confirming process for the pending notice. That is, when executing the suspension notice, the length of the fixed display time is changed in order to secure a period (effect period) for displaying the bubble image. Therefore, in the following, first, the fixed display time will be explained, and then the specific control processing for changing the fixed display time will be explained.

<About fixed display time>
As shown in FIG. 20, in the game cycle on the main display unit 43, the variable display of the patterns is started based on the result of the lottery. The fixed display is performed once. In other words, the game round consists of the variable display of the pattern and the fixed display of the variable display of the pattern.

Here, the fixed display of the pattern is not completed when the variable display ends, but is completed when the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery is continuously displayed for a predetermined fixed display time. This is intended to clarify the boundaries between subsequent game rounds while securing time for the player to recognize the game results.

For this reason, the next game round (variable display) is started after the start of the variable display of the pattern, after the variable display time, which is the actual execution period of the game round, has passed, and the waiting period is fixed. After the display time has elapsed. Hereinafter, the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the next game round, that is, the total period of the execution period of the game round and the standby period is referred to as "game time for one game round". By the way, the term “fixed” is based on the fact that the stop display during the above-mentioned fixed display time is performed to display a fixed stop result with the display content (picture) unchanged.

As shown in FIG. 20, in this embodiment, the fixed display time is divided into a first fixed display time and a second fixed display time. Specifically, the first fixed display time is from the start of the fixed display time to the middle of the fixed display time, and the remaining time until the end of the fixed display time is the second fixed display time. As for the first fixed display time, the time length is set based on the specified result specified in the confirming process for the suspension notice. Types of the length of the first fixed display time include normal time for normal use, special time longer than normal time, and reduced working hours shorter than normal time. On the other hand, the second fixed display time is set to a predetermined length of time regardless of the specified result.

In the main display section 43, the same pattern is continuously stopped and displayed during both the first fixed display time and the second fixed display time. In other words, the pattern stopped and displayed as a result of stopping continues to be displayed even after the first fixed display time elapses, and the stopped display ends when the second fixed display time elapses. At that time, if there is pending information that has not yet been selected for the lottery, the variable display of the pattern is started after the second fixed display time elapses, and conversely, if there is no pending information that has not yet been selected for the lottery. , the stop display state is continued even after the second fixed display time elapses.

In the following description, in order to distinguish between the fixed display performed during the first fixed display time and the fixed display performed during the second fixed display time, the former will be referred to as "first fixed display", and the latter will be referred to as "first fixed display". is sometimes referred to as "second confirmation display".

Next, control processing for changing the fixed display time will be described. In the present embodiment, a confirmation display process (step S509 in FIG. 13) is set as the process. This process is executed in the game round control process (FIG. 13) set as part of the normal process (FIG. 12), and is executed at the start of the confirmation display. The confirmation display processing will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Confirmation display processing>
In the confirmation display processing, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the result display section for the operating port of the main display section 43 is in the second confirmation display. If it is not during the second confirmation display, it is determined in step S1102 whether or not the result display section for the operating port of the main display section 43 is during the first confirmation display.

If a negative determination is made in step S1102, it means that confirmation display has not started on the main display section 43. FIG. In this case, the process advances to step S1103 to execute stop start time processing for starting the first fixed display. Here, the stop start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22 .

In the stop start time processing, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not a special setting flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 . The special setting flag is set when the first fixed display time is set to the special time for holding notice.

If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1202 whether or not special setting flags are stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. FIG. The special setting flag is set when the first fixed display time should be set to a special time.

If a negative determination is made in step S1202, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the subsequent hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 232 corresponds to the occurrence of a big hit or reach. Here, all of the pending information acquired after this step is executed at the final display timing of the previous game round is targeted. The process of step S1203 is performed by referring to the information stored in the register of the MPU 202, that is, the result of the confirming process for the holding notice. Specifically, in the register, it is determined whether or not big hit occurrence information (step S1007) or ready-to-win occurrence information (step S1011) is stored as information corresponding to subsequent hold information. Then, if any of the information is stored, an affirmative determination is made, and if none of the information is stored, a negative determination is made.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, the process advances to step S1204 to execute processing for grasping the execution count DN. The execution count DN indicates the number of times the first fixed display time is set to the special time. Here, the processing for ascertaining the execution count DN will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23(a).

In the processing for grasping the number of executions DN, first, in step S1301, the common reservation number CRN stored in the reservation number storage area FE is read to grasp the common reservation number CRN. The common pending number CRN in this case is not the number at that time, but the common pending number when the pending information (special pending information) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot or reach is stored. For this reason, for example, as shown in FIG. 23(b), after the timing tA which is the previous set timing, winnings to the operation openings 33a and 33b occur at the timings tB and tC. If the hold information stored in step S1301 is the special hold information, 2, which is the common hold number CRN at timing tB, is grasped in step S1301.

After step S1301 is executed, in step S1302, the comprehended common hold number CRN is compared with the preset number of times AN (2 times in this embodiment) as the number of executions of the hold notice. It is determined whether or not the number CRN is greater than or equal to the set number AN.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1302 (for example, if the common reservation number CRN is 4), then in step S1303 the set number AN is set as the execution number DN as it is. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1302 (for example, when the common hold CRN is 1), in step S1304, the common hold number CRN is set as the execution number DN instead of the set number AN. In this way, when the common hold number CRN is less than the set number AN, by reducing the number of execution times DN in accordance with the common hold number CRN, even if the common hold number CRN is less than the set number AN execution becomes possible.

Returning to the description of the stop start time processing (FIG. 22), after grasping the number of executions DN in step S1204, in the following step S1205, within the range of the number of executions DN, the hold information before the special hold information It is determined whether or not there is something corresponding to the occurrence of a big hit or reach. Also in this step, as in the case of step S1203, information stored in the register of the MPU 202, that is, the result of the confirming process for the above-described holding notice is referred to.

In this step, for example, if the number of times of execution DN is 2, the identification result (result of confirming process for advance notice of suspension) related to two times of suspension information before the special suspension information is referred to, and among the suspension information determines whether or not there is something corresponding to the occurrence of a big hit or reach. If even one piece of the pending information corresponds to a big win or reach occurrence, a negative decision is made, and conversely, if none of the pending information corresponds to a big win or reach occurrence, affirmative decision is made. . By the way, the reason why this step is provided is to prevent the occurrence of game rounds in which a big win or reach occurs, which is unrelated to the suspension notice, while the suspension notice is being executed. As a result, it is possible to clarify the correlation between the suspension notice and the game round, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the performance intention of the suspension notice.

If a negative determination is made in step S1205, a lottery is performed in step S1206 to determine whether or not the first fixed display time should be set to the special time. That is, on the condition that the specific game times corresponding to the jackpot or the unreachable reach are forthcoming, and the game times corresponding to the jackpot or the unreachable reach do not exist in the game times before the specific game times within the range of the number of times of execution DN. , whether or not to execute the pending notice is determined by a lottery.

Specifically, a lottery table stored in the ROM 203 is referred to, and a lottery for whether or not to hold the advance notice is performed. Regarding the lottery table, the lottery table corresponding to the jackpot that is referenced when the holding information that triggered the jackpot corresponds to the jackpot It is roughly divided into a lottery table corresponding to normal reach and a lottery table corresponding to super reach, which is referred to when the holding information that triggered it corresponds to super reach. As a result, the appearance probability of the pending notice can be varied according to the content corresponding to the pending information, such as the execution frequency of the pending notice increases in the order of loss normal reach, loss super reach, and big win. As the lottery value used for the lottery, an existing counter value such as the jackpot random number counter C1 may be used, or a dedicated counter value for the lottery may be provided.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main control device 81 determines whether or not the pending notice is possible. Processing such as permission/inhibition determination is not executed.

If it is determined in step S1207 that the lottery has been won, the process advances to step S1208 to set an execution counter DC in an execution counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 . Here, the execution number DN is set as the value of the execution number counter DC. The number-of-executions counter DC is a counter for counting the number of times that the first fixed display time is set to the special time.

In the subsequent step S1209, the waiting number counter WC is set in the waiting number counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. FIG. When the common pending number CRN is greater than the execution number DN, it is necessary to wait for the special setting of the fixed display time. In this step, a subtracted value obtained by subtracting the execution number DN from the common reservation number CRN is set as the value of the waiting number counter WC.

After execution of step S1209, a special setting flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 in step S1210. In subsequent step S1211, it is determined whether or not the value of the waiting number counter WC is zero. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1211, a special setting flag is set in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 in step S1212.

In the subsequent step S1213, "750" (equivalent to 1.5 sec) is set in the first fixed display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. FIG. The count value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, at a cycle of 2 msec. As a result, the first fixed display time is set to 1.5 sec as the special period.

In this way, in the present embodiment, at the start of the confirmation display, it is determined whether or not the hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot or reach is specified in the confirmation process for the hold notice, and based on the determination result It is configured to set the first fixed display time of the fixed display. As a result, when the hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the big win or ready-to-win is generated during the variable display, the result can be quickly reflected in the fixed display time of the fixed display.

After execution of step S1213, in step S1214, the value of the execution number counter DC is decremented by 1 and updated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1211, that is, if the value of the waiting number counter WC is not 0, the value of the waiting number counter WC is decremented by 1 and updated in step S1215. In the following step S1216, it is determined whether or not the common pending number CRN stored in the pending number storage area FE is equal to or greater than a predetermined value K preset as the time reduction setting number. The time reduction setting number K is for shortening the first fixed display time based on the common reservation number CRN, and is set to 3, which is the same as the setting number for variable display in the present embodiment.

If a negative determination is made in step S1216, "100" (equivalent to 0.2 sec) is set in the first fixed display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1217. As a result, the first fixed display time is set to 0.2 sec as the normal time. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1216, "0" (equivalent to 0 sec) is set in the first fixed display time counter area in step S1218. As a result, the first fixed display time is set to 0 sec as the working time saving time.

After steps S1214, S1217, and S1218 are executed, in step S1219, the pattern confirmation display (first confirmation display) is started in the operation opening display section of the main display section 43, and then the main stop start time processing is terminated. do.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in steps S1203 and S1207, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1205, the process proceeds to step S1216, and the first fixed display time is either normal time or reduced working time based on the common number of reservations CRN set to

In addition, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1202, that is, when only the special setting flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 among the special setting flag and the special setting flag, the later game round means that it is in the standby period for setting the first fixed display time to the special time. In this case, the process advances to step S1211 to determine whether or not the standby is completed, and depending on the result, the process from step S1212 or the process from step S1215 is executed.

In this way, by skipping the processing of steps S1203 to S1210 when an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, while the special setting flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204, the holding destination in step S1203 Execution of a specific result determination process is restricted. As a result, even if new pending information corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot or reach occurs during the waiting period, it is suppressed from being reflected in the setting of the first fixed display time, and duplication of setting and change in the middle are prevented. can be suppressed.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1201 is affirmative, that is, if the special setting flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204, the process advances to step S1220 to determine whether the value of the execution count counter DC is 0. determine whether If the value of the execution number counter DC is not 0, that is, if the game round for the number of execution times DN determined in steps S1303 and S1304 in FIG. is set to a special time (1.5 sec). As a result, the first fixed display time is set to the special time in each game round of the number of execution times DN before the specific game round is started.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1220, that is, if the number of game times for which the first fixed display time should be the special time has reached the number of times of execution DN, the process proceeds to step S1221 and is stored in the various flags storage area 235 of the RAM 204. Clears the special setting flag and special setting in progress flag. Thereafter, the process advances to step S1216 to execute the processes after step S1216. In other words, when the start timing of the confirmation display is reached with the value of the execution counter DC reaching 0 (when it is the start timing of the confirmation display of the specific game round), either the normal time or the time saving time is set as the first fixed display time.

Returning to the description of the confirmation display process (FIG. 21), after step S1103 is executed, the first stop display command is set in step S1104, and the confirmation display process is terminated. The first stop display command includes information about the length of the first fixed display time. The set first stop display command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) in the normal process (FIG. 12).

Based on the received first stop display command, the notification/effect control device 82 determines the light emission pattern of the display lamp portion 63 and the output pattern of the sound from the speaker portion 64 in the game round, and performs the determined effect. The display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled so that the contents are executed. In addition, the notification/effect control device 82 transmits the first stop display command to the display control device 212 while maintaining its information format.

The display control device 212 grasps the length of the first fixed display time based on the received first stop display command. Then, the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the display portion KP are kept in the stop display state at the grasped length. Further, the display control device 212, based on the received first stop display command, grasps the stop display timing of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 in the game round, and displays all the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at the timing. The symbol display device 41 is controlled to stop and display the symbol of . Also, the display portion KP in the special display area OE is controlled so that the stop display is started based on the first stop display command.

By the way, in the game machine, when the symbols in the variable display area ME of the symbol display device 41 are stopped and displayed, the symbols in the final stop row (in the present embodiment, the symbol row Z2) are not suddenly stopped, but the variable display speed is changed. It is common to stop gradually while decreasing . Under such circumstances, in the present embodiment, for example, in response to the display control device 212 receiving the first stop display command, the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 (final stop row) are started to stop. , the deceleration time required for the symbols to stop shortens the time during which the symbols are stopped, resulting in a substantial shortening of the stop display time.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 including the final stop row are stopped (temporarily stopped) before receiving the first stop display command, and then the first stop display command is received. Based on this, the temporarily stopped symbols are finally stopped (determined display). In this case, the timing of the temporary stop is determined based on the information of the variable display time included in the variable command from the main controller 81, and the type of pattern to be temporarily stopped is determined based on the type command from the main controller 81. do. These decisions may be made by the notification/production control device 82 or by the display control device 212 .

The display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the temporary stop is different from that in the final display. For example, at least one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 gently reciprocates, or at least a part of characters such as octopuses (see FIG. 6) constituting the main symbols and sub-symbols move. In other words, the temporary stop is performed so as to maintain an imperfect stop state (stop display), although the pattern appears to be stopped at first glance. On the other hand, the confirmation display is performed in such a way that the reciprocating fine movement and character movement are not performed and the character is completely stopped. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which the display modes of the temporary stop and the confirmation display are not different from each other, and it is impossible or difficult to distinguish between them.

On the other hand, the display portion KP in the special display area OE is controlled to suddenly stop from the variable display state, unlike the case of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. This is because the mode of the variable display and stationary display on the display section KP is matched with that of the pattern on the main display section 43 . Therefore, when viewed from the relationship with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the display unit KP still continues the variable display when the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are temporarily stopped, and the fixed display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started. At the same time, the display section KP is stopped and displayed.

Returning to the description of the confirmation display processing (FIG. 21), if the affirmative determination is made in step S1102, that is, if the first confirmation display is in progress, then in step S1105, the It is determined whether or not the first fixed display time has elapsed. If the first fixed display time has elapsed, the process advances to step S1106 to set the first fixed display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 to "250" (equivalent to 0.5 sec). The count value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, at a cycle of 2 msec. As a result, the second fixed display time is set to 0.5 sec. It should be noted that the second fixed display time is set irrespective of the specified result specified in the confirmation process for the suspension notice (FIG. 19), and is uniformly fixed to 0.5 sec.

After step S1106 is executed, a second stop display command is set in step S1107, and the final display processing ends. This set second stop display command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) in the normal process (FIG. 12).

The second stop display command includes information about the length of the second fixed display time. 2 By grasping the start timing of the second fixed display and the length of the second fixed display time, the fixed display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the display part KP is completed 0.5 sec after receiving the second stop display command. Then, the symbol display device 41 is controlled.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1101 is affirmative, that is, if the second confirmation display is in progress, it is determined in step S1108 whether or not the second confirmation display time set in step S1106 has elapsed. When the second confirmation display time has elapsed, in step S1109, the confirmation display (second confirmation display) of the pattern in the operation opening display section of the main display section 43 is terminated, and then the main stop start time processing is terminated. do. If negative determinations are made in steps S1105 and S1108, the final confirmation display process is terminated.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the notification/production control device 82 and the display control device 212>
Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 5, the electrical configurations of the notification/effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 will be additionally described.

An MPU 242 is mounted on a notification/production control board 241 provided in the notification/production control device 82 . The MPU 242 includes a ROM 243 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 242, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 243. A RAM 244 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit are incorporated. In addition, it is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 242, and they may be individually integrated into chips. This also applies to MPUs of other control devices.

The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main control device 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242, and from the main control device 81, the game cycle control such as the variation command, the type command, the first stop display command, and the second stop display command, which has already been described. Receive a command (game round control information). In addition, it receives pending display control commands (holding display control information) such as shift commands and pending commands, and opening/closing execution mode commands (opening/closing execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

As already described, the output side of the MPU 242 is connected to the holding lamp portion 47 provided on the variable display unit 36, the display lamp portion 63 and speaker portion 64 provided on the front door frame 14, and the display control device 212. ing. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 81 to the notification/production control device 82 are transmitted to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form.

The display control device 212 includes a display control board on which an MPU, which is an element in which a program ROM and a work RAM are combined and chipped, a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, and a video RAM are mounted. The MPU of the display control device 212 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 81 via the notification/production control device 82 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP (specifically to generate an internal command for the VDP). More specifically, the MPU executes a process of grasping the variation display pattern of each game round in the pattern display device 41 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 81 via the notification/production control device 82. At the same time, drawing processing for the VDP 255 is executed in accordance with the processing result. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 41 a of the pattern display device 41 .

The program ROM is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background images. The work RAM is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU. These work data and flags are stored in each area of the work RAM. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . Since the VDP is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP intervenes in reading and writing data by adjusting the timings of the MPU, video RAM, etc., and also reads the image data stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 41 .

The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41 . The character ROM 256 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41. By rewriting the content of the video RAM, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

<Explanation about the production of each game round>
Here, the outline of the game effect (interlocked effect) using the display screen 41a will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. FIG.

When the game cycle is started, high-speed fluctuation display is first started for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which pattern is variably displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 24(a), the variable display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high-speed variable display to the low-speed variable display so that the player can recognize the variable-displayed symbols. Then, as shown in FIG. 24(b), when the variable display of the upper symbol row Z1 is completed, the variable display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high speed variation display to the low speed variation display. Then, as shown in FIG. 24(c), the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends.

After all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changed, there is provided a stop display time during which the stop display is maintained and waited for a predetermined period. During the stop display time, a confirmation display is performed to clearly indicate to the player the game result of the current game round. When the combination of symbols (specific symbols or non-specific symbols) corresponding to the result of the big win is stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, when the fixed display time elapses, it is regarded as the occurrence of the result of the big win, and then opened and closed. Go to run mode. The stop display time is composed of a temporary stop time for temporary stop and a fixed display time for final stop. Of these, the use of the fixed display time to make the pending notice is as already explained.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the pending notice, (1) a window step-up notice effect as a first-class notice effect and (2) a character passage notice as a second-class notice effect are displayed on the display screen 41a. configured to do so. These notice effects do not suggest whether or not there will be a big hit or reach in the later game rounds like the pending notice, but they suggest whether or not there will be a jackpot or reach in the game round in which these notice effects are executed. It is supposed to

First, the window step-up notice effect as the first type notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 25(a). In the window step-up notice effect, as shown in FIG. 25(a1), a rectangular window image 301 is displayed as the effect image. The window image 301 is opaque or translucent, and predetermined characters, characters, etc. are displayed inside it.

In the window step-up notice effect, the content of the effect is configured to be stepped up (promoted). Specifically, step 1 includes a mode in which the window image 301 is displayed, and step 2 includes a mode in which a window image 302 larger than the window image 301 is displayed, as shown in FIG. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 25(a3), in step 3, a window image 303 larger than the window image 302 is displayed. That is, when the preview image of step 3 is displayed, the degree of expectation for the jackpot result is the highest.

The window image 302 in step S2 is displayed so as to cover the window image 301 from the front after the window image 301 in step 1 is displayed. Further, the window image 303 in step S3 is displayed so as to cover the window image 302 from the front after the window image 302 in step 2 is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 25, in order to make it easier to understand that the window images 301 to 303 are displayed in order, the upper window image covers a part of the lower window image. A mode in which the entire window image is covered may be adopted.

As shown in FIG. 25(c), the window step-up notice effect is performed using the period from the start of the variable display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 to the middle of the high-speed variable display. Here, the window images 301-303 are displayed in front of the pattern rows Z1-Z3, and the patterns of the pattern rows Z1-Z3 are hidden behind the window images 301-303 in the overlapping regions. However, at that time, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is variably displayed at high speed, and since it is difficult or impossible to recognize which symbol is variably displayed in the first place, practical inconvenience is unlikely to occur. Note that the display portion KP in the special display area OE does not overlap, or even if it does overlap, the amount is small so that the display portion KP does not become difficult or invisible due to the window images 301 to 303 .

Next, the character passing notice effect as the second type notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 25(b). In the character passing notice effect, a effect image 304 imitating a fish is displayed across the display screen 41a. Specifically, the effect image 304 appearing from the right end of the display screen 41a advances in the same direction (left direction) as the variable display direction of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and then exits the display screen 41a from the left end of the display screen 41a. appears to disappear. Although not shown in the drawings, as the character passing notice effect, a effect image 304 appears from the left end of the display screen 41a, and a mode is also prepared in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 move in the opposite direction (right direction) to the variable display direction. It is In the present embodiment, the appearance rate is lower when the effect image 304 advances to the right, and the expectation of a big win is higher.

As shown in FIG. 25(c), this character passing notice effect is performed using the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 so as not to overlap with the first type notice effect. The effect image 304 is displayed on the front side of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, but does not overlap the display portion KP, or if it does overlap, it is a small amount.

Whether or not to execute the window step-up notice effect and the character passage notice effect is determined by the notification/effect control device 82 and the display control device 212, which are sub-side control devices, unlike the suspension notice effect. Specifically, although the jackpot information and the like included in the variation command from the main control device 81 are referred to in order to correlate with the expected degree of the jackpot result, the notification execution lottery performed independently by the notification/production control device 82 etc. In consideration of the result of , overlap with other effects, etc., the notification/effect control device 82 or the display control device 212 is configured to make the final decision. In this way, in executing a plurality of types of advance notice effects, by allocating the decision-making power to each control device, it is possible to avoid concentration of the control load due to the diversification of the advance notice effects.

<About processing related to various effects>
As already described, in the present embodiment, the outline of the variable display mode of the symbols on the display screen 41a is specified by the notification/effect control device 82 with reference to the command from the main control device 81, and based on the specified result. The display control device 212 is configured to grasp the details of the variable display mode. Specifically, in the MPU 242 of the notification/production control device 82, a variable display control process is executed as part of a regular process started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). An outline of the mode and the like are specified. Here, the variable display control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Variation display control processing>
In the variable display control process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not a fixed display flag is stored in various flag storage areas (not shown) provided in the RAM 244 . The fixed display flag is set when the symbols of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 and the display portion KP of the special display area OE are displayed as fixed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1401, it is determined in step S1402 whether or not the game is in progress, that is, whether or not the symbol display device 41 is performing fluctuation display to determination display of symbols for one game round. do. If it is determined that the game is not in progress, the process advances to step S1403 to determine whether or not the command for variation transmitted from the main controller 81 has been received.

If a negative determination is made in step S1403, this variable display control process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1403, this variable display control process is terminated after the process for starting variation is executed in step S1404. Here, the details of the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Processing for start of fluctuation>
The variation start process is a process for starting an effect for a game turn based on receipt of a variation command transmitted from the main controller 81 . In the fluctuation start processing, settings such as ready-to-win display are performed as effects for the game cycle.

In the variation start process, first, in step S1501, the command for variation received this time is read, and information on the presence or absence of a big hit, information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and information on the variation display time are specified from the command. As already explained, when the command for variation is transmitted from the main controller 81, the type command is also transmitted. In step S1501, the type command received together with the variation command received this time is read, and from the command, game result information such as information on the result of the first type jackpot, information on the result of the second type jackpot, or information on the result of losing is obtained. Identify. Then, in step S1501, from the specified information, information on whether or not the jackpot is won, information on the type of jackpot if the jackpot is won, information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence if the jackpot is not won, information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and variable display time Information is grasped, and the grasped information is stored in the register of the MPU 242 .

In subsequent step S1502, based on the information grasped in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game round to be started this time is a game result corresponding to the big win result. In the case of a jackpot result, that is, in the case of a first-type jackpot result or a second-type jackpot result, in the following step S1503, the stop result (symbol combination) for the jackpot is determined (stop result determination processing is performed). .

In the stop result determination process, in the case of the first type jackpot result, the stop result in which the combination of the same specific symbols (main symbols with odd numbers) is established on one activated line L1 to L5 is determined. Determined as a result of the stoppage of times. In addition, in the case of the result of the second type jackpot, the stop result in which the combination of the same non-specific symbols (main symbols with even numbers) is established on one activated line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop of the game round. Decide as a result.

The type of the main symbol to be stop-displayed and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by a lottery or the like when a big win results. The final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 243 stores the effective lines L1 to L5 and address information. It is stored as address information in the line address storage area. Also, at this time, a process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed. It should be noted that the address information of the stop result determined by various stop result determination processes is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 244 also in the following description.

After execution of step S1503, an effect setting process for big hit is executed in step S1504.

In the effect setting process for the big win, the variable display mode of the symbol for the big win is determined (the variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) is performed). As already explained, when a jackpot result is obtained, the result is notified through the ready-to-win display. In the variable display mode determination processing for reach display, the variable display pattern table for reach display stored in the various table areas of the ROM 243 is acquired, and the game is performed in the variable display time and type command of the command for change received this time. A production pattern of normal ready-to-win display or super ready-to-win display corresponding to the result is determined. In addition, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 244 is executed. Also in the variable display mode determination processing described below, the corresponding variable display pattern table is acquired from the variable display pattern table storage area of the ROM 243 to determine the effect pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result. Then, the address information of the effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 244. - 特許庁Further, in this step, a process of determining whether or not to execute the first and second notice effects is also performed.

If it is determined in step S1502 that the result is not a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether reach will occur in the current game round. When reach occurs, the process advances to step S1506 to execute stop result determination processing for reach. Since this processing corresponds to the loss reach, the stop result (symbol combination) is determined so as not to result in a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result. That is, the stop result in which a combination of outlier reach symbols is established on one of the effective lines L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. In this case, the types of combination of winning reach symbols and effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In addition, in this determination, the same pattern combination is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the same pattern of the medium pattern row Z2 as the pattern forming the reach line is placed on the reach line. The stop result on the effective line is determined so as to make the final stop at a forward or backward stop position. After that, a process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed.

After execution of step S1506, an effect setting process for occurrence of reach is executed in step S1507. Since this process is the same as the process in step S1504, the description thereof is omitted.

If it is determined in step S1505 that reach has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S1508. In step S1508, stop result determination processing for normal deviation (complete deviation) is executed. In this process, the stop symbols are determined so as not to form a symbol combination corresponding to the result of the big win. In the following step S1509, the effect setting process for complete failure is executed.

After executing any one of steps S1504, S1507, and S1509, the process proceeds to step S1510. In step S1510, a process of outputting to the display control device 212 commands including information on the stop result and effect pattern determined in steps S1503, S1504, and S1506 to S1509 as a stop result command and a pattern command, respectively, is executed. Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the MPU of the display control device 212 performs display control of the pattern display device 41 to execute the effect in the current game round. As a result, on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41, the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the variable display area ME and the display part KP in the special display area OE is started.

After executing the process of step S1510, in the following step S1511, after executing the process of starting the effect for the game cycle, the process for starting the variation is finished. Specifically, based on the performance patterns determined in steps S1504, S1507 and S1509, drive control of the speaker unit 64 and the lamp unit 63 is started to start the performance for the game round.

Returning to the description of the variable display control process (FIG. 26), when the affirmative determination is made in step S1402, that is, when it is determined that the game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1405. In step S1405, it is determined whether or not the first stop display command from main controller 81 has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S1405, the variable display control process is terminated after executing the process for mid-variation in step S1406. The variation mid-process is a process of executing various effects and changing the determined effect in the game cycle started by the process for starting the variation. Further, in the mid-variation process, as described above, a command is transmitted to the display control device 212 to temporarily stop the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at the end of the variable display time. Note that the temporary stop processing may be performed by the display control device 212 independently.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1405, the process advances to step S1407 to execute stop start processing for starting confirmation display. Here, the stop/start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Stop start processing>
In the stop start process, first, in step S1601, the length of the first fixed display time is grasped based on the first stop display command from the main controller 81. FIG. In the following step S1602, it is determined whether or not the grasped first fixed display time is 1.5 sec, that is, the special time for holding notice. If the first fixed display time is the special time, the process advances to step S1603 to execute setting processing for a pending advance notice effect. When this setting process is executed, it is set so that the advance notice display effect (see FIG. 18) in which a bubble image appears is executed on the display screen 41a.

After step S1603 is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S1602, a confirmation display start process is executed in step S1604, and then this stop start process is terminated. In step S1604, a process of outputting to the display control device 212 a first fixed display command including information about the length of the first fixed display time is executed. The MPU of the display control device 212 controls the pattern display device 41 based on the received first fixed display command so as to start the fixed display of the patterns of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 and the display part KP in the special display area OE. do. Further, when the process of setting the pending advance notice effect in step S1603 is being executed, information indicating that the pending advance notice should be executed is included in the first fixed display command. In this case, the MPU of the display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 so as to execute the pending notice during the first fixed display time.

In executing the pending notice, the bubble image is not displayed immediately after the transition to the confirmed display state, but after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) has passed since the transition to the confirmed display state. controlled to be Since the bubble image is displayed on the front side of the symbol, the configuration described above makes it possible to suitably secure the time for the player to grasp the confirmed displayed symbol.

Also, the bubble image is configured so that the process from the appearance of the first bubble image to the erasing of the last bubble image is completed in a time shorter than the remaining time (for example, 1.0 sec) of the first fixed display time. As a result, it is suppressed that the suspension notice is performed over the second fixed display time and the next game round. As a result, the appearance of the production may deteriorate, such as being unable to display the pending notice to the end, or overlapping with the production (for example, the first type of notice production) that will be performed in the next game round. Suppressed. In addition, before the start of the next game round (before the start of the variable display), it is possible to secure a period during which the image for effect other than the pattern is not displayed, and the boundary between the current game round and the next game round can be secured. It becomes easy for the player to understand.

Returning to the description of the variable display control process (FIG. 26), after the stop start process in step S1407 is executed, in step S1408, the fixed display flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244, and then the main variable display is performed. End the control process.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, that is, if the fixed display flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244, the process proceeds to step S1409 to receive the second stop display command from the main controller 81. determine whether or not If the second stop display command has been received, then in step S1410 processing for ending fixed display is executed. In the fixed display end processing, the length of the second fixed display time (0.5 sec) is grasped based on the second stop display command, and the display control device 212 sends the second fixed display command including information about the length. Perform processing to output to. As a result, the MPU of the display control device 212 terminates the finalized display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the finalized display of the special display area OE on the display portion KP after 0.5 seconds based on the received second finalized display command. , controls the symbol display device 41 .

<About the game flow>
Next, the flow of the game when the suspension notice is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. FIG. In this embodiment, the flow of the game differs depending on the common pending number CRN when the confirmation display is started. In the following, the case where the common number of reservations CRN is equal to or less than the set number of times AN of advance notice of reservations and the case where the common number of reservations CRN is greater than the number of times AN set for advance notice will be described separately. It should be noted that, in the following description, it is assumed that all of the hold information other than the hold information corresponding to the big hit or reach occurrence corresponds to the complete loss result (the loss result of reach non-occurrence).

<Regarding the case where the common hold number CRN is equal to or less than the set number of times AN of the hold notice>
With reference to the timing chart of FIG. 29, the case where the common number of reservations CRN is equal to or less than the set number of times AN of advance notice of reservations will be described. Here, the case where the number of common reservations CRN and the number of set times AN are the same will be described as an example.

At the timing t1, when the stop display timing in the variable display of the main display unit 43 is reached without specifying in advance that the pending information corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot or reach, the main controller 81 displays the first fixed display time. is set to the normal time (0.2 sec) (see FIG. 29(c)). As a result, the total fixed display time (timings t1 to t2) of the normal time as the first fixed display time and the second fixed display time is 0.7 sec. In this case, the suspension notice effect is not executed during the fixed display time.

After that, at timing t3, when a game ball wins into the upper operation port 33a or the lower operation port 33b in the middle of the variable display started from timing t2 (see FIG. 29(a)), a new hold for the winning Information is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 (see FIG. 8) (see FIG. 29(b)). Then, main control unit 81 executes the suspension notice confirmation process (step S305 in FIG. 11) for the suspension information. Here, it is assumed that the hold information corresponds to occurrence of reach, and that is specified in the confirmation process. In addition, in the following description, in order to distinguish the hold|hold information with which reach generation|occurrence|production was previously specified from other hold|maintenance information, suppose that it is called special hold|maintenance information. At timing t4 when the variable display started from timing t2 ends, that is, at timing t4, which is the start timing of fixed display, the main controller 81 executes a determination process as to whether or not the special hold information has been preliminarily specified.

Whereas the set number of pending notices AN is 2, in this case, the common pending number CRN is 2 when the confirmation display is started (when the first stop display time is set) ( See FIG. 29(b)). That is, under the premise that the suspension notice should be executed over two game rounds, the game round (game round in progress) for which the fixed display time is set is the specific game corresponding to the previously specified hold information It is the game round two times before when viewed from the round. In such a case, the first fixed display time is set so that the game round in progress is subject to execution of the pending notice. That is, the execution number counter DC is set to 2 (see FIG. 29(e)), and the waiting number counter WC is set to 0 (not shown). As a result, the first fixed display time is set to the special time (1.5 sec) (see FIG. 29(c)). At this time, a special setting flag is stored in the RAM 204 (see FIG. 29(d)).

At timing t<b>4 , when the main control device 81 sets the first fixed display time, the command for the first stop display is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82 . As a result, the main display section 43 and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are confirmed and displayed in a mode corresponding to the loss, while switching of the display color is completed on the display section KP. At timing t5 when a predetermined period (0.5 sec) has elapsed from the start of the confirmation display, an advance notice display effect (a display in which a bubble image appears) as a pending advance notice effect is displayed on the display screen 41a. This advance notice display effect is displayed within the remaining time (1.0 sec) of the first fixed display time (see FIG. 29(f)).

When the first fixed display time elapses at timing t6, the second fixed display time is set to 0.5 sec by the main controller 81 (see FIG. 29(c)), and the second stop display command to that effect is issued. It is transmitted to the production control device 82 . As a result, the confirmation display executed on the main display unit 43 continues for 0.5 seconds. Note that the total fixed display time when the first fixed display time is set to the special time is 2.0 sec, which is the sum of the special time and the second fixed display time.

Then, when the second fixed display time elapses at timing t7, the fixed display of the main display section 43 is terminated by the main control device 81, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and The confirmation display on the display section KP is terminated. Incidentally, the counting (duration measurement) of 0.5 sec, which is the second fixed display time, is performed separately by the main control device 81 and the notification/effect control device 82 or the display control device 212, which is a control device on the sub side. . That is, the sub-side control device independently measures the elapsed time after receiving the second stop display command (step S1107 in FIG. 21), and when 0.5 sec elapses, the display screen 41a The confirmation display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the display section KP is terminated.

If it is desired to precisely synchronize the end timing of each final display on the main display section 43, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen 41a, and the display section KP, when 0.5 sec has elapsed from the start of the final display time, Alternatively, the main controller 81 may output a command to terminate the confirmation display. In this case, according to the reception of the command, it is possible to terminate the confirmation display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the display section KP.

On the other hand, the counting (period measurement) of 1.5 sec, which is the first fixed display time, does not necessarily have to be performed independently by the sub-side control device. good. In the display screen 41a, the display mode of the display screen 41a is maintained as it is even after the first fixed display time elapses. This is because the progress of 1.5 sec can be grasped by receiving the command. In this case, the first stop display command may include information indicating whether or not to execute the suspension notice instead of the information regarding the length of the first fixed display time.

Returning to the description of FIG. 29, at the timing t7 when the second confirmation display ends, following the completion of the confirmation display, the variable display of the next game round is started (see FIG. 29(c)). Then, when the variable display ends at timing t9, the first fixed display time for the next game round is set. The game round in this case is the game round just before the specific game round. Therefore, at timing t9, the first fixed display time is set to a special period (1.5 sec) so that the game round is subject to execution of the suspension notice (see FIG. 29(c)). Specifically, based on the fact that the value of the execution number counter DC is 1, the first fixed display time is set to the special time (see FIG. 29(e)). Then, at timing t10, the advance notice display effect is displayed on the display screen 41a (see FIG. 29(f)), as in the case of the previous game round.

Here, in this case, apart from the special hold information generated at the timing t3, at the timing t8 during the variable display of the immediately preceding game round, the winning of the game ball to the upper operation opening 33a or the lower operation opening 33b occurs. is doing. Then, as a result of execution of confirmation processing for reservation advance notice on the reservation information corresponding to the winning, it is specified that the reservation information corresponds to the occurrence of a big win or reach.

In this way, even if new special hold information is specified after the execution setting of the hold notice is made, in the present embodiment, various settings (execution counter DC, etc.) that have already been made are not affected. (See FIG. 29(e)). This is because when the special setting flag is stored in the RAM 204, the judgment processing (step S1203 in FIG. 22) for the result of the confirming processing for the reservation notice is restricted. As a result of this, duplication of settings is avoided, and as a result, it is suppressed that the number of executions of suspension notices changes during the execution of suspension notices, and player confusion is preferably suppressed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the determination process is provided separately from the confirmation process for the reservation notice, and the restriction target is limited to the determination process, and the confirmation process for the reservation notice is not restricted. ing. As a result, it is possible to continue the confirmation process itself for the pending notice while avoiding duplicate settings. As a result, other effects using the special hold information (for example, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the hold display area NE is changed from the normal mode to a special mode different from the normal mode) are also restricted. can be suppressed, and a configuration suitable for diversification and compositing of effects can be obtained.

When the second fixed display time elapses at timing t11, each fixed display on the main display section 43 or the like ends, and the variable display of the next game round (specific game round) is started. In the specific game round, after a predetermined ready-to-win effect is executed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41, the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped (temporarily stopped) in a combination that does not result in a big win.

Then, at the timing t12 when the fixed display starts, the first fixed display time is set to the normal time (0.2 sec) based on the fact that the value of the execution count counter DC is 0 (Fig. 29 (c )reference). Therefore, in the confirmation display in the specific game round, the first confirmation display time is not set to the suspension notice time. As a result, even though the variable display of the specific game round has ended, the inconvenience that the pending notice is continued to be executed and the player is confused is suppressed. Further, at timing t12, based on the fact that the value of the execution count counter DC is 0, the special setting flag stored in the RAM 204 is erased (see FIG. 29(d)), and the above determination processing is restricted. is released.

<Regarding the case where the number of common reservations CRN is greater than the number of set times AN>
Next, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 30, the case where the common number of reservations CRN is greater than the set number of times AN of advance notice of reservations will be described. In the following description, the description of the same parts as in FIG. 29 will be omitted or simplified.

In the middle of the variable display started at timing t21, winning to the upper working opening 33a or the lower working opening 33b occurs at timings t22 and t23, respectively, and the hold information stored at the time of winning at timing t23 is stored. Assuming that it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, the special hold information is specified by the confirmation process for the hold notice in the main control unit 81 at the timing when the winning occurs. Since the common pending number CRN at timing t21 is 2 (the updated pending number), the variable display time of the variable display started at this timing is set to 8 seconds. Then, when the variable display time has elapsed at timing t24, the main controller 81 executes a determination process as to whether or not the special hold information has been preliminarily specified.

Whereas the set number of times AN of pending notice is 2, in this case, the common pending number CRN when the confirmation display is started is 4 (see FIG. 30(b)). That is, under the premise that the suspension notice should be executed over two game rounds, the game round (game round in progress) for which the fixed display time is set is the specific game corresponding to the previously specified hold information It is the game round four times before when viewed from the round. In such a case, the first fixed display time is set such that the game round in progress is not subject to the suspension notice. That is, 2 is set in the waiting number counter WC (see FIG. 30(e)), and the process of setting the first fixed display time as the special time is awaited. At timing t24, the common pending number CRN is 4, which is equal to or greater than the time saving set number K (K=3), so the first fixed display time is set to the time saving time (0 sec). Also, at timing t24, the special setting flag is stored in the RAM 204, and the execution count counter DC is set to 2 (see FIGS. 30(d) and (f)).

When the first fixed display time is 0 sec, the second fixed display is performed immediately. Since the second fixed display time is 0.5 sec, the total fixed display time is 0.5 sec (see FIG. 30(c)). When the second fixed display time is set in this manner, the main display section 43 and the pattern display device 41 are controlled so that the fixed display is performed during the set second fixed display time.

In addition, each specific time length of the special time (1.5 sec), normal time (0.2 sec) and working time (0 sec) related to the first fixed display time, and the second fixed display time (0.5 sec) are examples and are not limited to these. That is, the length of each time is arbitrary as long as the special time is longer than the normal time and the short working time is shorter than the normal time. In this case, it is preferable that the first fixed display time, or the total fixed display time that is the sum of the first fixed display time and the second fixed display time, be shorter than the variable display time. If these times are longer than the variable display time, the player during the game is likely to have the impression of being elongated. In this case, the first fixed display time or the total time may be set to be shorter than the variable display time of the game cycle corresponding to the non-reachable out of normal result. In such a configuration, the special time and the normal time should be shorter than the variable display time (8 sec) during non-working hours, and the short working time should be shorter than the variable display time (4 sec) during short working hours.

Returning to the description of FIG. 30, when the second fixed display time elapses at timing t25, each fixed display on the main display section 43 or the like ends, and the variable display of the next game round starts. Since the common pending number CRN at timing t25 is 3 (see FIG. 30(b)), the variable display time in the game round is set to 4 sec, and the variable display time is shortened. At timing t26 after the variable display time has passed, the first fixed display time for the fixed display in the game round is set. The game round in this case is the game round three times before the specific game round, and the common reservation number CRN at this time is 3, which is the same as the time reduction setting number K. Therefore, the time is shortened after being excluded from the subject of the pending notice, and the first fixed display time is set to 0 sec. As a result, the total fixed display time becomes 0.5 sec, which is the second fixed display time (see FIG. 30(c)).

At timing t27 after the second fixed display time has elapsed, the fixed display on the main display section 43 or the like is terminated, and the variable display of the next game cycle is started. Then, when the variable display time elapses at timing t28, the first fixed display time for the fixed display in that game round is set. Since the game round in this case is the game round two games before the specific game round, the main control device 81 controls the game round to be subject to execution of the suspension notice. Specifically, the first fixed display time is set to the special time (1.5 sec) based on the fact that the value becomes 0 as a result of the update of the waiting number counter WC at the previous timing t26 (FIG. 30). See (c), (e)). After that, as in the case of FIG. 29, the special time is also set for the first fixed display time of the immediately preceding game round, and the suspension notice is executed in each fixed display of the two previous game rounds and the immediately preceding game round. .

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The configuration is such that the first fixed display time of the fixed display is set based on the result specified by the confirming process for the pending advance notice. In this case, it is possible to vary the time length of the confirmation display according to the content of the pending information that is not yet subject to the validity determination. As a result, it is possible to correlate the result of the determination of whether or not the hold information that is the object of the confirmation process (destination identification) for the hold advance notice, and the fixed display time of the game round. Moreover, in the present embodiment, when the destination is specified during the game round, the fixed display time of the game round is set based on the result of the prior specification, so that the content of the hold information can be quickly changed to the game round. can be reflected. For example, in a configuration in which the result is reflected in the next and subsequent game rounds in the event that the game round is previously specified during the progress of the game round, the specific game round that is the target of the previous specification is executed next to the game round in progress. If it is a game round where the first fixed display time is changed, it becomes difficult to secure an opportunity to change the first fixed display time. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, since the first fixed display time can be changed including the game round in progress, it is possible to stably secure the change opportunity.

By the way, in executing the pending notice, instead of securing the opportunity by extending the fixed display time, it is also possible to shift the execution timing of the pending notice at the start of the fluctuation in the next game round or during the fluctuation display. be done. However, at the start of the fluctuation or during the fluctuation display, it is assumed that other effects such as the first type of advance notice effect and the second type of notice effect are being performed. For this reason, there is a possibility that the effects displayed may be duplicated, and there may arise problems such as a decrease in the distinguishability of each effect and the need to adjust the priority such as which one is to be displayed on the front side. Not only that, as in the relationship between the first kind of notice effect and the pending notice in the present embodiment, one corresponds to the result of the success/failure determination of the game round, and the other corresponds to the result of the success/failure determination of the subsequent game round. In the case where the meanings of each effect are different, such as the corresponding case, if they are displayed together, the player is likely to be confused, and the effect of the effect may be greatly reduced. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the confirmation display time is lengthened to secure an opportunity to execute the pending notice, so overlap with other effect displays is suppressed, and the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be preferably suppressed. become.

Furthermore, the following effect can be expected in a configuration that secures an opportunity to execute the pending notice by lengthening the fixed display time. In general, recent pachinko machines perform variable display of patterns and symbols based on a predetermined variable display time, and once the variable display starts, the period cannot be changed. For this reason, for example, when there is a request to extend the game time of a game round in the middle of a game round in order to allow for the sudden addition of a game effect, if an attempt is made to respond by changing the variable display, We have no choice but to redesign pachinko machines. Even if such a change could be realized, during the variable display, other game effects are normally performed in accordance with the variable display time separately from the patterns and the variable display of the patterns. In some cases, the game production is performed in a complex manner. For this reason, in preparation for the case where the variable display time is changed during the variable display, we will adjust the length of the variable display time and the production time, replace the production, and make various production adjustments based on the consistency between each production. There arises a need for a configuration that can be executed in the middle of the variable display, which is inconvenient in that it causes a significant increase in the burden of performance design. In this respect, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change the game time for one game while keeping the variable display time as the predetermined period. Moreover, since the original purpose of the final display is to show the result of the winning/failure determination, there are many cases where the game presentation is not performed during the execution period, or even if it is performed, it is simple. For this reason, even if the fixed display time is changed, the adjustment burden in terms of presentation can be lightened, and the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

The configuration is such that the first fixed display time is set corresponding to the start timing of the fixed display. In this case, it is possible to reflect the result of the destination identification that occurs before the start timing of the fixed display in the length of the stop display period. As a result, it is possible to cope with the destination specification and the winning of the operation openings 33a and 33b that occur at the end of the variable display, and it is possible to have an optimum configuration when the game time related to one game round is changed in the middle. .

During the confirmation display, the display screen 41a of the pattern display device 41 is configured to display an advance notice display effect (an advance notice display effect to make a bubble image appear). While the fixed display time of the game round in progress can be changed according to the result of specifying the destination, according to this configuration, the addition or reduction of the notice display effect according to the result of specifying the destination is performed in the final display. becomes possible. That is, it is possible to utilize the fixed display time as a period for adjusting the effect, and compared to the case where addition or reduction is performed in the variable display in which the effect display is likely to appear frequently on the display screen 41a. Production adjustment can be facilitated.

The configuration is such that the advance notice display effect performed during the finalized display is finished by the end of the finalized display. For example, if the advance notice display effect is continued even after the end of the confirmation display (after the end of the game round), there is a concern that the player will have difficulty in recognizing the boundary with the subsequent game round. In addition, overlapping with another effect display to be executed in the next game cycle may reduce the distinguishability between the effects and hinder the player's understanding of the effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress those inconveniences and improve playability.

The total time (2.0 sec) obtained by adding the length of the special time of the first fixed display time (1.5 sec) to the special time and the second fixed display time (0.5 sec) is the variable display time immediately before that (8 .0 sec). If the fixed display time is lengthened unnecessarily, the impression that the waiting time from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display is likely to be long, and there is a risk of causing a feeling of dullness. Even if the display time is set to the special time on the longer side, the total time is configured to be shorter than the variable display time. As a result, it is possible to proceed with the game at a good tempo even when the confirmation display time is long, and it is possible to ensure ease of play.

It is configured such that it is determined whether or not the result of the previous identification is a predetermined result, and the first fixed display time is set based on the result. For example, every time the first determination is made, it is reflected in the setting of the first fixed display time as it is, and when the first determination is made multiple times in one game round There is a risk that the display time setting will be forced to be redone, resulting in an increase in the processing load. In this regard, in the present configuration, the processing for specifying the destination and the processing for determining the result thereof are performed separately, and the first fixed display time is set based on the result of the latter. Therefore, by executing the determination process in accordance with the setting timing of the first fixed display time, it is possible to collectively set the first fixed display time, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

The configuration is such that execution of determination processing for determining the result of the destination identification is restricted when it is already determined that the result of the destination identification is the predetermined result. In a configuration in which suspension notices are given over a plurality of game rounds, a game round in progress may be subject to execution of suspension notices started from previous game rounds. In such a case, if the first fixed display time is set based on the result of the destination specified during the game round, there is a risk that the setting will be changed or duplicated. In this regard, in the present configuration, since the execution of the determination processing for determining the result of the destination identification is restricted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of setting changes and duplication.

When the hold information corresponding to the occurrence of a big win or ready-to-win is specified in advance, the game round for which the first fixed display time is to be set is the number of the game round retroactively from the specific game round to which the hold information corresponds. Based on this, the configuration is such that the first fixed display time is set.

Due to the fact that a plurality of pieces of pending information can be stored, pending information corresponding to the occurrence of a big win or reach may be specified in advance under circumstances where the number of stored pending information is large. In such a case, the specific game round is executed with a large delay from the previous specific timing. In such a case, if the first specific result is immediately reflected in the first fixed display time of the game round, the number of other game rounds intervening until the specific game round increases, resulting in the first fixed display time. It becomes difficult for the player to grasp which game round the pending notice performed at the display time is the suggestive effect for, and there is a risk of causing the player's confusion. In addition, in the configuration where the pending notice is repeated several times until just before the specific game round, the number of times the pending notice is executed increases depending on the number of storage of the pending information, and it is assumed that the player may misunderstand the production intention. be. In this respect, according to the present embodiment, in addition to being able to adjust the number of intervening game times between the execution of the suspension notice and the execution of the specific game time, it depends on the number of storage of suspension information. The occurrence of inconvenience such as an increase in the number of repetitions of the hold notice is also suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suitably exhibit the function as a suggestive effect that suggests the content of the specific game round, and to improve the interest.

Common hold number CRN when hold information corresponding to first specific is stored in case of grasping what number of game round retroactively from specific game round is the game round for which the first fixed display time is to be set. It was configured to be grasped based on For example, if the previously specified hold information and subsequent hold information are stored (see FIG. 23(b)), the subsequent hold information is included in the calculation target, and the number of game rounds is properly counted. It may not be possible to comprehend. According to this configuration, such an inconvenience can be suitably suppressed, and it is possible to properly grasp the number of times the game has been played.

Set the number of times of waiting for the process of setting the first fixed display time to special time (waiting number counter WC), and when the number of waiting times is set, set the first fixed display time to normal time univocally. It was configured. According to the above configuration, once the number of times of waiting is set, the first fixed display time can be set by managing the number of times of waiting. Therefore, each time the first fixed display time is set, the common reservation number CRN and the number of reservation notices are compared, and based on the result, it is determined which first fixed display time should be set. Processing becomes unnecessary, and the processing load can be reduced.

When the destination is identified, the actual number of executions (the number of executions DN) is set based on the grasped common number of reservations CRN and the set number of reservations AN. Although the common reservation number CRN varies from time to time, in this configuration, the number of executions is set based on the magnitude relationship between the common reservation number CRN and the set number of times AN. For this reason, the first fixed display time can be set as the special time within the range of the common number of reservations CRN each time, and it is possible to appropriately perform the reservation notice.

The configuration is such that the first fixed display time is set based on the number of stored hold information. This makes it possible to correlate the number of storages of pending information with the length of fixed display time. As a result, when the number of pending information stored is large, the start timing of the next game cycle can be advanced by shortening the confirmation display time, and efficient game progress can be promoted. Moreover, in the present embodiment, when the pending information is stored, the fixed display time of the game round in progress can be set based on the number of stored pending information. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect a change in the number of pieces of pending information stored in the fixed display time. As a result, when shortening the fixed display time, it is possible to improve the responsiveness as compared with the structure in which the time is adjusted after waiting for the next game cycle. In particular, it is possible to shorten the fixed display time prior to the shortening of the variable display time, thereby promoting more efficient progress of the game.

<Modification 1 of the first embodiment>
In this modified example, the stopped display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during execution of the pending notice is different from that in the first embodiment. The suspension notice according to this modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG.

The suspension notice is performed using the stop result (combination of stop symbols) in the game round before the game round (specific game round) of the suspension information subject to the suspension notice is started. Specifically, without forming a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result on the activated line as a result of stopping the game round before the game round related to the hold information subject to the hold notice, and By stop-displaying the same symbols in all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, it is possible to indicate the content of the hold information that is the object of the hold notice.

For example, if the hold information that is the target of the hold notice is one of the definite variable jackpot results, as shown in FIG. In a game cycle, the same specific pattern is stopped and displayed in all the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 without stopping the combination of the specific patterns on the effective line, and the game cycle is ended. In the following description, this stop mode is also referred to as a suspension notice stop mode.

This pending notice is executed over a plurality of game rounds in the game rounds before the specific game round. That is, in the game round following the game round shown in FIG. 31(a), the game round is ended in the stop mode of the suspension notice by the specific symbols, as shown in FIG. 31(b). Then, as shown in FIG. 31(c), in the specific game round that is subject to the pending notice, the combination of the specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line to end the game round, and the probability variable jackpot result is generated. clarified.

Although the explanation by the figure is omitted, if the hold information that is the target of the hold notice is a normal jackpot result, in the game round before the specific game round that is the target of the hold notice, by a non-specific pattern The relevant game round is ended in the stop mode of the suspension notice. After that, in the specific game cycle, the combination of the non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the activated line, and the game cycle is ended, and the occurrence of the normal jackpot result is clearly indicated. By doing so, the player can grasp which jackpot result will be in the specific game round from the content of the pending notice (stop result).

This reservation notice is executed with a predetermined probability for the reservation information that results in one of the jackpot results, and is also executed with a predetermined probability for the reservation information that results in a normal failure. In this case, since the hold information that is the target of the hold notice is a normal deviation result, when it comes to the specific game turn that is the target of the hold notice, the combination of the specific pattern (non-specific pattern) is stopped on the effective line The game round is ended without stopping and displaying the same specific pattern (non-specific pattern) in all the pattern rows Z1 to Z3.

Further, in this modified example, a re-variation effect is set for this suspension notice. In the re-variation effect, first, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are temporarily stopped in a stop mode different from the suspension notice stop mode. For example, as shown in FIG. 32(a), the same symbol (3 symbols) exists in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, but does not exist in the middle symbol row Z2. is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(b), each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is variably displayed again, and thereafter, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stop-displayed in the suspension notice stop mode. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 32(c), the stop display mode of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is set such that the same specific symbol (7 symbols) exists in all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. be done. It should be noted that the re-fluctuation effect in the pending notice can also be displayed in different directions for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 242 of the notification/production control device 82 in this modified example will be described.

<Variation display control processing>
FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the variable display control process executed by the MPU 242 of the notification/effect control device 82 in this modified example. Note that this process is performed in place of the variable display control process of FIG. 26 according to the first embodiment. This differs from the variable display control process in FIG. 26 in that the process for during stop display in S2009 is added.

In the variable display control process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not a fixed display flag is stored in various flag storage areas (not shown) provided in the RAM 244 . If a negative determination is made in step S2001, it is determined in step S2002 whether or not the game is in progress. If it is determined that the game is not in progress, the process advances to step S2003 to determine whether or not a variation command from the main controller 81 has been received.

If a negative determination is made in step S2003, this variable display control process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, this variable display control process is terminated after the process for starting variation is executed in step S2004.

Further, when the determination is affirmative in step S2002, that is, when it is determined that the game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, it is determined whether or not the first stop display command from main controller 81 has been received.

Here, in this modified example, the configuration of the first stop display command from the main controller 81 is different from that in the first embodiment. The configuration of the first stop table command of this modified example will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

In the first stop display command of this modified example, the type of information included in the command differs depending on the length of the first fixed display time. Specifically, when the special time (1.5 sec) is set as the first fixed display time in the stop start time processing (FIG. 22) by the main controller 81, at least the relevant time is set for the first stop display command. Information on the length of the first fixed display time (information indicating that it is 1.5 seconds) is included.

On the other hand, when the normal time (0.2 sec) or the reduced working time (0 sec) is set as the first fixed display time, the first stop display command contains information about the length of the first fixed display time In addition, at least information on whether or not to execute the notice of suspension and information on the start timing of the notice of suspension are included.

The information on whether or not to execute the advance notice of suspension is information indicating whether or not the advance notice of suspension should be executed. indicates that it should be executed in one of the subsequent game rounds. That is, even if it is decided to execute the holding notice in the main controller 81, the grasped common holding number CRN is larger than the number of executions of the holding notice, and the process of setting the first fixed display time to the special period is waited. In this case, the first fixed display time is set to the normal time or the reduced working time, and information indicating that the suspension notice should be executed is included in the first stop display command and output.

On the other hand, the information about the start timing of the suspension notice is information indicating after how many game rounds the suspension notice should be started, in other words, information indicating the number of waiting times. This information is set in the first stop display command together with information indicating that the suspension notice should be executed.

Returning to the description of the variable display control process (FIG. 33), if a negative determination is made in step S2005, the variable display control process is terminated after the mid-variation process is executed in step S2006. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2005, the process advances to step S2007 to execute stop start processing for starting fixed display. Here, the stop start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Stop start processing>
In the stop start process, first, in step S2101, based on the first stop display command from the main controller 81, the length of the first fixed display time is grasped. In the subsequent step S2102, it is determined whether or not the grasped first fixed display time is 1.5 seconds, that is, the special time for holding notice. If the first fixed display time is the special time, it is determined in step S2103 whether or not the RAM 244 stores a pending notice flag. The suspension notice flag indicates that information indicating that the suspension notice should be executed has been received from the main controller 81 .

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, that is, if information indicating that the first fixed display time is a special period for holding notice is received in a situation where information indicating that the holding notice should be executed has not been received. means that an instruction to execute the suspension notice is received from the main controller 81 for the first time at the start timing of the stop display. In this case, at step S2104, a re-variation process is executed to re-variate the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Here, the re-variation processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the re-varying process, first, in step S2201, based on the hold command from the main controller 81 (step S306 in FIG. 11), the result of specifying the destination for the hold information is grasped. Specifically, the pending command received from the main control device 81 is referred to, and whether the pending command corresponds to the big win, or to the reach occurrence, or to the big win. In that case, it is necessary to grasp whether it corresponds to the probability variable jackpot or the normal jackpot.

In the subsequent step S2202, as a result of the grasping process in the above step S2201, it is determined whether or not there is a pending command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, in step S2203, stop result determination processing of the notice symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is executed. In such a process, as the foretelling design corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result, the specific design (the main design to which an odd number is attached) is grasped as the foretelling design. After that, the manner of arranging the comprehended advance notice symbols on the display screen 41a, that is, the stop result of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is determined based on the suspension notice stop result table.

Here, the stop result table for holding notice will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 37(a) exemplifies a stop result table on the middle line L2 when the number attached to the advance notice corresponding symbol is "7". In this table, the secondary symbols arranged between the main symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are indicated for convenience by using intermediate numbers between the numbers attached to the left and right main symbols. FIG. 37(b) shows a simplified stop result of the address information D(1) as a specific example of the stop result on the display screen 41a.

In the stop result table for reservation notice, a plurality of stop results are set for stopping the same main symbol in all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 according to the combination of symbols to be stopped on the activated lines L1 to L5. Information is stored as address information. In this case, the same main symbols do not stop together on any of the valid lines L1 to L5, and the same main symbols are used in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 on any of the valid lines L1 to L5. It is set so that a reach line is not formed by For example, when the address information D(1) is selected and the advance notice symbol (7) is to be stopped at the upper stage of the middle line L2 and the middle and lower stages of the right line L3, "7 , sub-symbols between "6" and "7", and sub-symbols between "6" and "7" are set to be stopped in this order.

As for the types of suspension notice stop results, all the types (3×3×3=27) in which the same main symbols are stopped in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the same main symbols are aligned on the activated lines L1 to L5. The symbol combination (5) corresponding to the result of the jackpot that stops at the end of the line and the symbol combination (5 lines x 2 types) that are out of reach are excluded. Specifically, 27-5-10 = 12 It is kind.

Returning to the description of the re-variation process (FIG. 36), if a negative determination is made in step S2202, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not there is a pending command corresponding to a normal jackpot. When an affirmative determination is made in step SS2204, in step S2205, the stopping result determination processing of the notice symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot result is executed. In this processing, after ascertaining non-specific symbols (main symbols with an even number) as symbols for notice corresponding to the result of the normal jackpot, each symbol row is displayed based on the stop result table for the above-mentioned pending notice. Determine the stop result of Z1-Z3.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2204, the process advances to step S2206 to execute stopping result determination processing of the notice symbol corresponding to the out-reach reach result. In this process, first, based on the received out-reach corresponding hold command, when executing the reach display in the game round (specific game round) of the hold information that triggered the hold command, a reach line is formed. Identify the pattern. If the pattern forming the reach line is a specific pattern, the notice pattern corresponding to the loss reach is determined as the specific pattern, and if the pattern forming the reach line is a non-specified pattern, the notice pattern corresponding to the loss reach is determined. The design is determined as a non-specific design. After that, the stop result of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is determined based on the stop result table for advance notice of suspension.

After execution of steps S2203, S2205, and S2206, in step S2207, address information of the stop result determined by each process is stored in a stop result address storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 244. FIG. After that, in steps S2208 and S2209, the re-change flag and the notice executing flag are set in the RAM 244, and this re-change process is terminated. The re-change flag is a flag indicating that the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 should be changed again during the first fixed display, and the notice execution flag is a flag indicating that the pending notice is being executed.

Returning to the description of the stop start process (FIG. 35), after executing the re-variation process in step S2104, the suspension notice flag is stored in the RAM 244 in step S2105. As already explained, this hold notice flag indicates that the information indicating that the hold notice should be executed has been received from the main controller 81 . If the first fixed display time is a special time, there is a possibility that the first stop display command does not include information to the effect that the pending notice should be executed. It is possible to grasp that the suspension notice should be executed based on the fact that it is time.

In the subsequent step S2106, setting processing of the pending advance notice setting effect is executed. When this setting process is executed, it is set so that the advance notice display effect (see FIG. 18) in which a bubble image appears is executed on the display screen 41a.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2102, that is, if the first fixed display time grasped based on the first stop display command is the normal time (0.2 sec) or the reduced working time (0 sec), step At S2107, it is determined whether or not the first stop display command from the main controller 81 includes information (see FIG. 34) to the effect that the hold notice should be executed. If the information is included, the pending notice flag is stored in the RAM 244 in step S2108.

After steps S2106 and S2108 are executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S2107, a fixed display start process is executed in step S2109, and then this stop start process is terminated. In step S2109, a process of outputting to the display control device 212 a first fixed display command including information about the length of the first fixed display time is executed. The MPU of the display control device 212 controls the pattern display device 41 based on the received first fixed display command so as to start the fixed display of the patterns of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 and the display part KP in the special display area OE. do. Incidentally, when the re-variation process of step S2104 has been executed, the re-variation is executed after the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are confirmed and displayed in step S2109.

Further, when the process of setting the pending advance notice effect in step S2106 is being executed, the information indicating that the pending advance notice should be executed is included in the first fixed display command. In this case, the MPU of the display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 so as to execute the pending notice during the first fixed display time.

Returning to the description of the variable display control process (FIG. 33), after the stop start process in step S2007 is executed, in the subsequent step S2008, the fixed display flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244, and then the main variable End the display control process.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2001 is affirmative, that is, if the fixed display flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244, the process proceeds to step S2009, and the display mode of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 during the first fixed display. Executes stop display processing for controlling . Here, the stop display processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38 .

<Processing during stop display>
In the stop display processing, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the RAM 244 stores a re-variation flag. If the determination in step S2301 is affirmative, it is determined in step S2302 whether or not it is time to start changing again. The start timing of this re-fluctuation is predetermined, and is set to start re-fluctuation after a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 sec) has elapsed from the start of the first fixed display.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2302, a process of outputting a re-variation command for starting re-variation to the display control device 212 is executed in step S2303. The display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 so as to start the re-variation of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the basis of receiving the re-variation command.

Here, the re-variation execution period is predetermined, and is set to 0.8 sec in this modification, for example. Therefore, including the temporary stop period before the start of the first confirmed display, the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are temporarily displayed on the display screen 41a, and the state is maintained for 0.2 sec+α (α is the first confirmed display). After that, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 start to change again, and after 0.8 seconds, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed again. . At that time, in the re-stop display, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are controlled to be stopped and displayed at the same time.

After step S2303 is executed, the re-change flag stored in the RAM 244 is erased in step S2304, and then the stop display processing is terminated. If negative determinations are made in steps S2301 and S2302, the process for during stop display ends.

Returning to the description of the variable display control process (FIG. 33), after executing the stop display process in step S2009, it is checked in step S2010 whether or not the second stop display command has been received from the main controller 81. determine whether If the second stop display command has been received, then in step S2011 processing for ending fixed display is executed. In the fixed display termination process, the length of the second fixed display time (0.5 sec) is grasped based on the second stop display command, and the second fixed display command including information about the length is sent to the display control device 212. Perform output processing. As a result, the MPU of the display control device 212 terminates the finalized display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the finalized display of the special display area OE on the display portion KP after 0.5 seconds based on the received second finalized display command. , controls the symbol display device 41 .

<Stop result determination processing for complete failure>
Next, stop result determination processing for complete failure will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed at the start of fluctuation, specifically in step S1508 of the process for starting fluctuation (FIG. 27).

In the stop result determination process for complete failure, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not a pending notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244 . This pending notice flag is stored in steps S2105 and S2108 of the stop start process (FIG. 35). In other words, in the present modification, an instruction to execute the pending notice from the main control device 81 is uniformly received at the start of the confirmation display.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, it is determined in step S2402 whether or not the notice execution flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244. FIG. This advance notice execution flag indicates that the pending notice is being executed as already described.

If a negative determination is made in step S2402, it is determined in step S2403 whether or not it is time to start a suspension notice, more specifically, whether or not it is time to start a game round for starting execution of a suspension notice. This determination process is performed based on the information (see FIG. 34) regarding the start timing of the suspension notice included in the first stop display command from the main controller 81 . If it is the start timing of the game round to start execution of the pending notice, the notice execution flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244 in the subsequent step S2404.

After execution of step S2404 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S2402, in step S2405, the stop result determination processing of the notice symbol is executed. The stop result determination process is the same as steps S2201 to S2206 in the re-variation process (FIG. 36). That is, based on the hold command from the main control device 81, whether or not the hold information that is the target of the previous specification corresponds to the jackpot result or the loss reach result, if it corresponds to the jackpot result It is determined whether or not the game corresponds to the probability variable jackpot, and based on the result of the determination, the design for notice is grasped. Then, the stop result of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is determined so that the display mode of the comprehended advance notice symbol on the display screen 41a becomes the suspension notice stop mode.

On the other hand, if negative determinations are made in steps S2401 and S2403, stop result determination processing in step S2406 is executed. The stop result determination process of this step is for setting the stop mode of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 so as not to be the suspension notice stop mode and to indicate the result of being out. Specifically, in order not to form a symbol combination corresponding to a jackpot result or a losing reach result on any of the effective lines, and to prevent the same symbols from being stopped and displayed in all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, The stop result of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is determined.

After execution of steps S2405 and S2406, in step S2407, the address information of the stop result determined by each of these processes is stored in the stop result address storage area provided in the RAM 244, and then the stop result for this complete failure is stored. End decision processing.

<About the game flow>
Next, the flow of the game when the suspension notice is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. FIG. In this modification, as in the case of the first embodiment, the flow of the game differs depending on the common pending number CRN when the confirmation display is started. In the following, the case where the common number of reservations CRN is equal to or less than the set number of times AN of advance notice of reservations and the case where the common number of reservations CRN is greater than the number of times set AN are explained separately. In the following description, it is assumed that the hold information other than the special hold information corresponds to the normal deviation result (reach non-occurrence deviation result).

<Regarding the case where the common hold number CRN is equal to or less than the set number of times AN of the hold notice>
With reference to the timing chart of FIG. 40, the case where the common number of reservations CRN is less than or equal to the set number of times AN of advance notice of reservations will be described. Here, the case where the number of common reservations CRN and the number of set times AN are the same will be described as an example. 29 and 30 according to the first embodiment will be omitted or simplified in the following description.

When the variable display is started on the main display section 43 at timing t31, the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the display section KP on the display screen 41a is also started. Then, at the timing t32, which is just before the end of the variable display, the winning to the upper working port 33a or the lower working port 33b occurs, and if the pending information corresponds to the occurrence of reach, at the timing when the winning occurs , the special hold information is identified in advance by the hold notice confirmation processing in the main controller 81 . At timing t33 immediately after that, the variable display time elapses, and when it comes to the start timing of the fixed display, the main controller 81 executes a determination process as to whether or not the special hold information has been preliminarily specified.

Whereas the set number of times AN of pending notice is 2, in this case, the common pending number CRN at the start of the confirmation display is 2 (see FIG. 40(b)). In this case, main controller 81 sets the first fixed display time to the special period (1.5 sec) in order to immediately execute the suspension notice. Then, the first stop display command to that effect is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82, and the pattern on the main display section 43 is stopped and displayed.

Upon receipt of the first stop display command, the notification/effect control device 82 recognizes that a suspension notice should be executed, and sets a suspension notice flag in the RAM 244 (see FIG. 40(d)). At this time, in a state in which no instruction has been received in advance from the main control device 81, since it is grasped that the suspension notice should be executed for the first time by the first stop display command, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changed again. It is determined that the suspension notice should be executed immediately, and the re-variation flag and the notice execution flag are set in the RAM 244 (see FIGS. 40(e) and (f)). At that time, the suspension notice stop mode is set as the stop display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the re-variation.

Thus, in this modification, under the configuration in which the main control device 81 determines whether or not to execute the reservation notice, the notification/effect control device 82 determines whether or not to execute the re-variation of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. is determined by This eliminates the need for the main controller 81 to make a decision based on the presence or absence of re-fluctuation, and it becomes possible to simplify the control program on the main controller 81 side and reduce the processing load. Note that the display control device 212 may determine whether or not to change again.

Further, at timing t33, a first fixed display command is transmitted from the notification/effect control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the display section KP are stopped and displayed. The stop display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at this time is a mode that does not take into account the execution of the pending notice, that is, the stop mode that is completely off as usual set at the start of the fluctuation at timing t31 (see FIG. 40 (g2). ).

At timing t34 after a predetermined time (0.2 sec) has elapsed from timing t33, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 start to change again (see FIG. 40(g3)). In addition, the re-change flag stored in the RAM 244 is erased with the start of re-change (see FIG. 40(e)). At this time, the main display section 43 and the display section KP of the display screen 41a are maintained in a stopped state. Then, at timing t35 when the execution period (0.8 sec) has elapsed from the start of the re-fluctuation, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed again in the suspension notice stop mode (see FIG. 40 (g4)). The stop display mode at this time is the one set when the confirmation display is opened at timing t33.

At the timing t36 after the re-fluctuation is finished, the advance notice display effect of making the bubble image appear is executed in the remaining time (0.5 sec) of the first fixed display time (see FIG. 40(g5)). After the end of the pending notice, when the first fixed display time elapses at timing t37, the second fixed display time is set to 0.5 sec by the main controller 81 (see FIG. 40(c)), and the second fixed display time to that effect is displayed. A stop display command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82 . As a result, the confirmation display executed on the main display unit 43 continues for 0.5 seconds. Then, when the second confirmation display time elapses at timing t38, each confirmation display on the main display section 43 or the like ends.

Further, at timing t38, the variable display of the next round of the game is started along with the end of the confirmation display (see FIG. 40(c)). At this time, the notification/effect control device 82 executes the stop result determination process for complete failure (FIG. 39). The stop display mode of Z1 to Z3 is set to be the stop mode for advance notice of suspension (see steps S2401, S2402, and S2405 in FIG. 39).

Then, at timing t39 when the variable display ends, the first fixed display time of the game round is set. Since the game round in this case is the game round immediately preceding the specific game round, at timing t39, the first fixed display time is a special time (1.5 sec) so that the game round is subject to execution of the pending notice. (see FIG. 40(c)).

Further, at timing t39, the main display section 43 is confirmed and displayed by the main control device 81, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the display section KP are confirmed and displayed by the notification/effect control device 82 or the display control device 212. The stop display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at this time is the suspension notice stop mode set at the start of the fluctuation of the previous game round at timing t38 (see FIG. 40(g7)). In other words, the re-variation effects of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are not performed in the confirmation display of the previous game round.

After that, as in the case of FIG. 29 in the first embodiment, after the suspension notice to make the bubble image appear is executed (see FIG. 40 (g8)), the specific game round that is the target of the suspension notice is executed (see FIG. 40(c)).

<Regarding the case where the number of common reservations CRN is greater than the number of set times AN>
Next, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 41, the case where the common number of reservations CRN is greater than the set number of times AN of advance notice of reservations will be described. In the following description, the description of the same parts as in FIG. 40 will be omitted or simplified.

At timing t42, which is just before the end of the variable display started at timing t41, the winning to the upper working opening 33a or the lower working opening 33b occurs, and if the pending information corresponds to the occurrence of ready-to-win, the winning has occurred. At the timing of occurrence, the special hold information is specified by the check processing for the hold notice in the main controller 81 . Then, when the variable display time has elapsed at timing t43, the main controller 81 executes a determination process as to whether or not the special hold information has been preliminarily specified.

Further, at timing t43, the main controller 81 sets the first fixed display time. In this case, the common pending number CRN when the confirmation display is started is 3 (see FIG. 41(b)), and the game round (game round in progress) for which the confirmation display time is to be set is It is the game round three times before the specific game round corresponding to the reserved information previously specified. Therefore, the first fixed display time is set to the time saving time (0 sec) so that the game round in progress is not subject to the suspension notice.

Furthermore, at timing t43, based on the determination process and the setting result of the first fixed display time, the information that the first fixed display time is to be used as a time saving time, the information that the reservation notice should be executed, and the next game round A first stop display command is output from the main controller 81 including information to the effect that the holding notice should be started from . As a result, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the display section KP are confirmed and displayed by the notification/effect control device 82 or the display control device 212, and the notification/effect control device 82 sets a pending notice flag in the RAM 244 (Fig. 41 (d )reference). The stop display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at this time is the stop mode set at the start of the variation at the timing t41, specifically, the stop mode of complete disengagement, which is different from the suspension notice stop mode.

When the second fixed display time (0.5 sec) elapses at timing t44, each fixed display on the main display section 43 or the like is ended, and the variable display of the next game round is started. At this time, in the notification/production control device 82, based on the fact that the suspension notice flag is stored in the RAM 244 and that this game round is designated as the game round in which the suspension notice should be started, the symbol row Z1 is displayed. The stop display mode of ∼Z3 is set to the suspension notice stop mode. Further, in the notification/production control device 82, a notice execution flag is set in the RAM 244 (see FIG. 41(e)).

Then, when the variable display time elapses at timing t45, the main controller 81 sets the first fixed display time. Since the game round in this case is the game round two games before the specific game round, the first fixed display time is set to the special time (1.5 sec) for holding notice (FIG. 41(c) )reference). Then, the main controller 81 outputs a first stop display command including information indicating that the first fixed display time is set to the special time. As a result, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the display portion KP are displayed by the notification/effect control device 82 or the display control device 212. FIG. The stop display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at this time is the suspension notice stop mode set at the start of fluctuation at timing t44 (see FIG. 41(f1)). In other words, when the notification/production control device 82 or the display control device 212 grasps that the suspension notice should be executed at the start of the variable display, the suspension notice is given without re-fluctuation of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. executed.

Thereafter, as in the case of FIG. 40, after the first fixed display time of the previous game round is set to the special time (1.5 sec), the suspension notice is executed using the first fixed display time. (Refer to FIGS. 41(c), (f4), and (f5)), after that, the specific game round which is the target of the suspension notice is executed (see FIG. 41(c)).

According to this modified example described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

A suspension notice is made using the stop result (combination of stop symbols) of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Since the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stop-displayed with the stop result corresponding to the result of the winning/failing determination, it is assumed that the player is watching with great interest. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, the player can easily notice the suspension notice, and it is possible to preferably increase the expectation for the subsequent game round. Moreover, the stop result of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 can be changed based on the result of specifying the destination performed in the middle of the game round, and the result of specifying the destination can be quickly reflected. Therefore, even when the game round to be specified ahead is the game round following the game round in progress, the pending notice by the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 can be executed, and the effect is executed. Opportunities can be expanded.

In addition, according to this modified example, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are temporarily stopped and displayed according to the setting result (step S1508 in FIG. 27) at the start of fluctuation, and then the stop result is changed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or distrustful even though the stop result is suddenly changed based on the result of specifying the destination during the game. For example, when the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are being displayed with low speed fluctuation (see FIG. 25(c)) or when at least one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has been stopped and displayed, the player can identify the symbols on the display screen 41a. situation. In such a situation, if the symbol change processing is performed immediately when the destination is specified, the symbols during low-speed fluctuation display and the symbols that have been stopped and displayed need to be replaced, causing the player to feel uncomfortable and distrustful. It could be. In this regard, in this modified example, after waiting for the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 to be stop-displayed according to the setting result at the time of start of variation, the stop result is changed with re-variation. In this case, the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 before changing the stop result is prevented from becoming unnatural, and the stop result can be changed in a natural flow.

However, at the start of the game cycle, the unscheduled re-variation is added in the middle by following the variation display, so the final stop display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is postponed, and securing time for that is a problem. . In this regard, in this modified example, the first fixed display time is lengthened when the pending notice is given, and this period is used to perform the change again. As a result, it is possible to secure an appropriate time for the re-variation, and the inconveniences such as the end of the game round in the middle of the re-variation and the display period of the stop result after the change not being secured can be suitably suppressed. be. Moreover, the setting timing of the first fixed display time is set separately from the setting timing of the variable display time, and the first fixed display time is set in accordance with the start timing of the fixed display. As a result, it is possible to flexibly change the fixed display time with respect to the specified destination after the start of the variable display, and it is possible to have an optimum configuration for performing re-variation additionally midway.

Further, the following effect can be expected by adopting a configuration in which the stopped symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changed again and then the stop result is changed. For example, if the stop result is changed instantaneously, there is a possibility that the player will not notice the change, in addition to causing a sense of discomfort and distrust as described above. In this respect, according to the present configuration, the interposition of the re-variation display makes it easier to notice the change in the stop result, and the significance of the pending advance notice due to the change in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 can be favorably ensured. Furthermore, it is possible to add the fun of guessing which stop result will be changed, which improves the amusement.

After a predetermined time (0.2 sec) has elapsed from the start of the fixed display, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are again displayed in a variable manner. According to this configuration, it is possible to facilitate confirmation of the stop result before the re-variation display. In addition, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display has been performed again, and it is possible to facilitate the player's understanding of the effect. In addition, by providing a temporal reserve before the re-varying display, it is possible to arouse expectations for the re-varying display and improve interest.

In the above modified example, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in the stop mode of the suspension notice, and the notice display effect in which the bubble image appears is performed. good.

<Modification 2 of the first embodiment>
In this modification, the mode of execution of the pending notice is different from that in the first embodiment. It differs from the first embodiment. The suspension notice according to this modification will be described below with reference to FIG. 42 .

In the pending notice according to this modification, as shown in FIG. The variable display time of the variable display on the display section 43, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the display section KP is set to a special holding notice time (1.0 sec) shorter than usual. As for the fixed display time of the fixed display, as in the case of the first embodiment, by setting the first fixed display time to the special time (1.5 sec) for the pending advance notice, It is assumed to be long 2.0 sec. Then, as shown in FIG. 42(c), the stop display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 when the suspension notice is performed is the suspension notice stop mode as in the case of the first modification. During the display, an advance notice display effect for making a bubble image appear on the display screen 41a is displayed.

According to the above configuration, when the pending notice is executed, the fixed display time is lengthened while the variable display time is shortened. can be increased. As a result, it is possible to increase the presence of the confirmed display and increase the attention to the pending notice (results of stop display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the notice display effect by the bubble image) performed using the fixed display time. become.

Further, in the above configuration, the fixed display time is made longer than the variable display time when executing the suspension notice. As shown in FIG. 42(a), the fixed display time is usually set to be extremely short compared to the variable display time. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a great sense of discomfort. This makes it easier for the player to notice the pending notice, and it is possible to suitably increase the expectation for the subsequent game round.

In addition, in a configuration in which the variable display time is shorter than the fixed display time, the number and types of effect displays that can be executed during the variable display time are greatly restricted compared to normal times. As a result, the performance display performed during the variable display is limited, and the pending notice performed during the fixed display can be enhanced accordingly.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, the game time (total time that is the sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time) for one game cycle when the suspension notice is executed is configured to be shorter than when the suspension notice is not executed. ing. When the suspension notice is executed, it is assumed that the player's interest is likely to be directed to the specific game round that is the target of the suspension notice. The period can be shortened. As a result, it is possible for the player to play the specific game round as soon as possible, and the configuration can be made to meet the needs of the player.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in this modified example will be described.

Although this modification is configured to set both the variable display time and the fixed display time based on the result of the previous specification, at least two timings are provided as the timings at which each of these times can be set. ing. Specifically, there is a change start time for setting the variable display time and a fixed display start time for setting the fixed display time. In view of this point, in this modification, the determination process of whether or not the special hold information is specified by the confirmation process for the hold notice (step S305 in FIG. 11) is performed not only when the confirmation display is disclosed, but also when the fluctuation starts. is also configured to run. Then, if it is determined in any of the determination processing that special hold information has been specified, settings for each hold notice related to variable display and fixed display (number of executions of special time and standby until special time setting of the number of times) are collectively performed. Specific control processing for realizing the above configuration will be described in detail below.

<Processing at start of stop>
FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing a stop-start process executed by the MPU 202 of the main controller 81. FIG. This process is executed in place of the stop start time process of FIG.

In the stop start time processing of this modified example, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the stop side special setting flag F2 is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 . The stop-side special setting flag F2 is set when the first fixed display time is set to the special time (1.5 sec) for holding notice.

If a negative determination is made in step S2501, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not the variable side special setting flag F3 is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. FIG. The fluctuation side special setting flag F3 is set when the fluctuation display time should be set to a special time (1.0 sec).

If a negative determination is made in step S2502, it is determined in step S2503 whether or not the stop side special setting flag F1 is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. FIG. The stop-side special setting flag F1 is set when the first fixed display time should be set to a special time.

If a negative determination is made in step S2503, in step S2504, whether or not the subsequent hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 232 corresponds to the occurrence of a big hit or reach, that is, confirmation processing for hold notice determines whether or not special hold information has been specified. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2504, the process advances to step S2505 to execute processing for grasping the execution count DN1 of the setting of the stop-side special period. The execution count DN1 indicates the number of times the first fixed display time is set to the special time. Here, the processing for grasping the number of executions DN1 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44(a).

<Acquisition processing of execution count DN1 for stop-side special period setting>
In the process of grasping the number of executions DN1, first, in step S2601, the common reservation number CRN stored in the reservation number storage area FE is read to grasp the common reservation number CRN. In the subsequent step S2602, the common reservation number CRN is compared with the set number of times AN (2 times) preset as the number of executions of the reservation notice, and it is determined whether or not the common reservation number CRN is equal to or greater than the set number of times AN. judge. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2602, in step S2603, the set number of times AN is set as it is as the execution number of times DN1. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2602, the common pending number CRN is set as the execution number DN1 in step S2604. After execution of steps S2603 and S2604, this processing for grasping the number of times of execution DN1 ends.

Returning to the explanation of the stop start time processing (FIG. 43), after executing step S2505, the processing of steps S2506 to S2508 is executed. These processes are the same as steps S1205 to S1209 of the stop start time process in FIG. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2508, that is, if the holding notice lottery is won, the stop-side and change-side holding notice setting processing is executed in step S2509. This processing is for setting each pending notice for variable display and for fixed display. Here, the setting process for holding notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44(b).

<Setting processing for holding notice on the stop side and fluctuation side>
In the stop-side and change-side pending notice setting processing, first, in step S2701, the number of executions DN1 grasped in the processing for grasping the number of executions DN1 (FIG. 44(a)) is provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. Execution count counter DC1 is set in the execution count counter area. The number-of-executions counter DC1 is a counter for counting the number of times that the first fixed display time is set to the special time.

In the subsequent step S2702, the waiting number counter WC1 is set in the waiting number counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. FIG. In this step, a subtracted value obtained by subtracting the execution number DN1 from the common reservation number CRN is set as the value of the waiting number counter WC1. The waiting number counter WC1 is a counter for counting the number of times the game waits for the process of setting the first fixed display time to the special time.

After executing step S2702, setting processing for variable display is performed in steps S2703 to S2707. In the setting process, first, in step S2703, it is determined whether or not the subtraction value obtained by subtracting 1 from the common reservation number CRN is equal to or greater than the set number of times AN (2 times). If the determination in step S2703 is affirmative, in step S2704 the set number of times AN is set as the execution number of times DN2. The execution count DN2 indicates the number of times the variable display time is set to the special time. on the other hand. If a negative determination is made in step S2703, a subtraction value obtained by subtracting 1 from the common reservation number CRN is set as the number of executions DN2 in step S2705.

After steps S2704 and S2705 are executed, in step S2706, the number of execution times DN2 set in steps S2704 and S2705 is set in the area for execution number counter provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 as the number of execution counter DC2. The execution number counter DC2 is a counter for counting the number of execution times when the variable display time is set to the special time.

In the subsequent step S2707, the subtracted value obtained by subtracting the number of executions DN2 from the common number of reservations CRN-1 is set as a waiting number counter WC2 in the waiting number counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. End the setting process. The waiting number counter WC2 is a counter for counting the number of times the game waits for the process of setting the variable display time to the special time.

Here, the subtraction value obtained by subtracting 1 from the common pending number CRN in steps S2703 to S2707 is used as the reference value when setting the number of executions and the number of standbys because the processing of steps S2504 and S2505 in FIG. This is because, as shown in (a), it is assumed that new pending information corresponding to the occurrence of a big hit or reach is stored during the variable display.

That is, when new hold information corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot or reach is stored at timing t51, the first fixed display time can be set as a special time at the start timing of the fixed display 321 immediately after that. Although it starts at the timing t52, the variable display time can be set to the special time from the timing t53 when the next variable display 322 starts. In this case, since the number of common reservations CRN at timing t53 is one less than that at timing t52, the subtracted value obtained by subtracting one from the common reservations CRN is used as the reference value.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 45(b), when the common reservation number CRN at timing t52 is 1 and the specific game round corresponding to the reservation information previously specified at timing t51 is executed from timing t53 , 1 is set as the number of executions DN1 for the first fixed display time, and 0 is set as the number of executions DN2 for the variable display time.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 45(c), the common reservation number CRN at timing t52 is 4, and timing t54 after the specific game round corresponding to the reservation information previously specified at timing t51 passes through the waiting period. , the wait count WC1 for the first fixed display time is set to 3, and the wait count WC2 for the variable display time is set to 2. In this case, the number of executions DN1 and DN2 is set to 2, respectively, because both the common reservation number CRN and the common reservation number CRN-1 at timing t52 are greater than the set number AN(2). .

Returning to the description of the stop start time processing (FIG. 43), after step S2509 is executed, the stop side special setting flag F1 is set in the various flag determination areas of the RAM 204 in step S2510. In subsequent step S2511, it is determined whether or not the value of the waiting number counter WC1 is zero. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2511, a stop side special setting flag F2 is set in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 in step S2512.

In subsequent step S2513, the first fixed display time is set to 1.5 sec as a special time, and then in step S2514, the execution count counter DC1 is decremented by 1 and updated. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2511, the wait number counter WC1 is decremented by 1 in step S2515 and updated, and then steps S2516 to S2518 are executed. The processes of steps S2516 to S2518 are the same as steps S1216 to S1218 of the stop start time process in FIG. After steps S2514, S2517, and S2518 are executed, in step S2519, the finalized display (first finalized display) of the pattern is started in the operation opening display section of the main display section 43, and the main stop start time processing ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in steps S2502 and S2503, the process advances to step S2511 to determine whether or not the value of the waiting number counter WC1 is 0, and depending on the determination result, processing after step S2512 or step S2515. Execute the following processes.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, the process advances to step S2520 to determine whether or not the value of the execution number counter DC1 is zero. If the determination in step S2520 is negative, the process advances to step S2513 to set the first fixed display time to 1.5 sec. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2520, the stop side special setting flag F1 and the stop side special setting flag F2 stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 are erased in step S2521. Then, the process after step S2516 is performed.

<Processing for setting variable display time>
Next, setting processing of the variable display time will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in place of the variable display time setting process in FIG.

The variable display time setting process according to this modification is performed in step S2807 instead of the process in step S907 of FIG. This process is the same as the variable display time setting process in FIG. 17 except that the variable display time setting process ends. The processing for setting the variable display time for complete failure in step S2807 will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Processing for setting variable display time for complete failure>
In the process of setting the variable display time for complete failure according to the present modification, first, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the variable side special setting flag F4 is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 . The fluctuation side special setting flag F4 is set when the fluctuation display time is set to the special time (1.0 sec) for holding notice.

If a negative determination is made in step S2901, it is determined in step S2902 whether or not stop side special setting flag F1 (see step S2510 in FIG. 43) is stored in various flag storage area 235 of RAM 204. FIG. If a negative determination is made in step S2902, it is determined in step S2903 whether or not the variable side special setting flag F3 is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. FIG. The variable side special setting flag F3 is set when the variable display time should be set to the special time.

If a negative determination is made in step S2903, in step S2904, whether or not the subsequent hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 232 corresponds to the occurrence of a big hit or reach, that is, confirmation processing for hold notice determines whether or not special hold information has been specified. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2904, the process advances to step S2905 to execute processing for grasping the execution count DN2 of setting the variable side special period. Here, the processing for grasping the number of executions DN2 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48(a).

<Acquisition processing of execution count DN2 for setting variable side special period>
In the processing for grasping the number of executions DN2, first, in step S3001, the common reservation number CRN stored in the reservation number storage area FE is read to grasp the common reservation number CRN. The common pending number CRN in this case is shown in FIG. Since it is performed before the variable display time setting process is executed, it becomes the post-update common pending number CRN.

In the following step S3002, the common reservation number CRN is compared with the set number of times AN (2 times) preset as the number of executions of the reservation notice, and it is determined whether or not the common reservation number CRN is equal to or greater than the set number of times AN. judge. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, in step S3003, the set number of times AN is set as it is as the execution number of times DN2. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3002, the common pending number CRN is set as the execution number DN1 in step S3004. After execution of steps S3003 and S3004, this processing for grasping the number of times of execution DN2 ends.

Returning to the description of the variable display time setting process for complete failure (FIG. 47), after executing step S2905, the processes of steps S2906 to S2908 are executed. These processes are the same as steps S1205 to S1209 of the stop start time process in FIG. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2908, that is, if the holding notice lottery is won, the change-side and stop-side holding notice setting processing is executed in step S2909. This processing is for setting each pending notice for variable display and for fixed display. Here, the setting process for holding notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48(b).

<Setting processing for holding notice on the fluctuation side and stop side>
In the change-side and stop-side pending notice setting processing, first, in step S3101, the number of executions DN2 grasped in the processing for grasping the number of executions DN2 (FIG. 48A) is provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. Execution count counter DC2 is set in the execution count counter area. In the following step S3102, the waiting number counter WC2 is set in the waiting number counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. FIG. In this step, a subtracted value obtained by subtracting the number of executions DN2 from the common pending number CRN is set as the value of the waiting number counter WC2.

After execution of step S3102, setting processing for the first confirmed display is performed in steps S3103 to S3107. In the setting process, first, in step S3103, it is determined whether or not the common reservation number CRN is equal to or greater than the set number of times AN (twice). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3103, the set number AN is set as the execution number DN1 (the number of times the first fixed display time is set to the special time) in step S3104. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3103, the common pending number CRN is set as the execution number DN1 in step S3105.

After steps S3104 and S3105 are executed, in step S3106, the execution number DN1 set in steps S3104 and S3105 is set in the execution number counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 as the execution number counter DC1. In the subsequent step S3107, the subtracted value obtained by subtracting the number of executions DN1 from the common number of reservations CRN is set as a waiting number counter WC2 in the waiting number counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, and the main holding notice setting process is performed. exit.

Here, in steps S3103 to S3107 shown in FIG. 48B, unlike steps S2703 to S2707 in FIG. The same value is used in the processing of steps S2904 and S2905 in FIG. 47, as shown in FIG. This is because it is assumed that the

That is, when new hold information corresponding to the occurrence of a big hit or reach is stored at timing t61, the variable display time can be set to the special time at timing t62, which is the start timing of the variable display 323 immediately after that. , the first fixed display time can be set to the special time from timing t63, which is the start timing of the fixed display 324 immediately after the variable display 323. FIG. Since the variable display 323 and the fixed display 324 belong to the same game round, there is no difference in the common pending numbers CRN at the timings t62 and t63, so the same reference value is used.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 49(b), the common reservation number CRN at timing t62 is 1, and the specific game round corresponding to the holding information previously specified at timing t61 has passed through one game round. When it is executed from the later timing t64, both the number of times of execution DN2 for the variable display time and the number of times of execution DN1 for the first fixed display time are set to once.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 49(c), the common reservation number CRN at timing t62 is 3, and timing t65 after the specific game round corresponding to the reservation information previously identified at timing t61 passes through the waiting period. 1, both the number of times of waiting WC2 for the variable display time and the number of times of waiting WC1 for the first fixed display time are set to once. In this case, the numbers of executions DN1 and DN2 are set to 2, respectively, because the number of common reservations CRN at timing t62 is greater than the set number of times AN(2).

Returning to the description of the setting process of the fluctuation display time for complete failure (FIG. 47), after step S2909 is executed, the fluctuation side special setting flag F3 is set in the various flag determination areas of the RAM 204 in step S2910. In subsequent step S2911, it is determined whether or not the value of the waiting number counter WC2 is zero. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2911, a variable side special setting flag F4 is set in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 in step S2912.

In subsequent step S2913, the variable display time is set to 1.0 sec as a special period, and then in step S2914, the execution count counter DC2 is decremented by 1 and updated. After that, the variable display time setting process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2911, after the waiting number counter WC2 is updated by decrementing it by 1 in step S2915, the normal game stored in the display time table storage area 223 proceeds to step S2916. The change display time corresponding to the current value of the change type counter CS is acquired by referring to the state-corresponding reach non-occurrence change display time table. In the subsequent step S2917, the variable display time acquired in step S2916 is set in the variable display time counter area, and then the variable display time setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2902, that is, if the stop side special setting flag F1 is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204, then the variable display time setting process is executed. In addition, it means that the decision to execute the suspension notice has already been made in the stop start time processing (FIG. 43), and various settings for that purpose have also been executed. In this case, the process advances to step S2911 to determine whether or not the value of the waiting number counter WC2 is 0, and depending on the determination result, the process from step S2912 or the process from step S2915 is executed.

Thus, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2902, by skipping the processing of steps S2904 to S2910, it is possible to determine to execute the pending notice by the stop start time processing prior to the variable display time setting processing. If so, the execution of the hold destination identification result determination process in step S2904 is restricted. Thus, even if new hold information corresponding to the occurrence of a big win or ready-to-win is generated after the decision to execute the hold notice is made by the stop start time processing, the influence of the new hold information is suppressed.

This is the same in the stop start time processing shown in FIG. If so, the processing of steps S2504 to S2510 is skipped. For this reason, when it is determined to execute the hold notice by the setting process of the change display time for complete failure (FIG. 47) prior to the stop start time process, the hold destination identification result determination process in step S2504 is performed. execution is restricted.

As described above, in the present modification, the preceding processing (execution of pending notice) is performed between the stop start time processing shown in FIG. It is configured to give priority to the decision to the effect that it will be held and various setting processing for holding notice based on it). Therefore, even when there are two determination timings, that is, when the fixed display is opened and when the variable display is started, it is possible to suitably suppress inconveniences such as competition in determination results, duplication of settings, and midway changes. becomes possible.

Returning to the description of the variable display time setting process for complete failure (FIG. 47), if the affirmative determination is made in step S2903, steps S2904 to S2910 are skipped in the same manner as the affirmative determination in step S2902. Proceed to S2911.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2901, the process advances to step S2918 to determine whether or not the value of the execution number counter DC2 is zero. If a negative determination is made in step S2918, the process advances to step S2913 to set the variable display time to 1.0 sec. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2918, the variable side special setting flag F3 and the variable side special setting flag F4 stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 are erased in step S2919. After that, the process after step S2916 is executed, and the variable display time setting process ends.

According to this modified example described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

In addition to the fixed display time, the variable display time is also set based on the result of the previous identification. In this case, it is possible to change the game time for one game round (the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the next variable display) by utilizing both the fixed display and the variable display. For example, in a configuration in which the game time for one game cycle is changed only by the confirmation display, if the confirmation display time is lengthened unnecessarily, the player is likely to have the impression of being elongated, so the time difference in the game time is limited. easy. In this regard, in the present modification, since the game time for one game cycle is changed by cooperation between the variable display and the fixed display, the time difference between when the special hold information is previously specified and when it is not is increased. can be done. As a result, dynamic changes can be realized, making it easier to give a special impression.

At each of the start timing of the fixed display and the start timing of the variable display, it is determined whether or not the pending information of the occurrence of the big win or reach is specified in advance, and the variable display time and the first fixed display time are determined based on each determination result. It is configured to be set. As a result, it is possible to suitably perform the special setting for the pending notice regarding the variable display time and the fixed display time.

For example, in a configuration in which the determination process is performed only at the start timing of the confirmation display, as shown in FIG. As shown in b), the destination identification result of the special hold information is determined for the first time at the timing t73 when the confirmation display 332 is started. As a result, the variable display time of the variable display 331 becomes the normal time, and from the subsequent fixed display 332, it is set to the special time for holding notice.

On the other hand, in this modified example, the determination process is performed even at the start timing of the variable display, so that the destination identification result of the special hold information can be determined at the timing t72 when the variable display 331 is started. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50(c), the variable display time of the variable display 331 can be set to the special time for the pending notice, and the pending notice can be started earlier than in the case of FIG. 50(b). becomes possible.

Further, in the configuration in which the determination process is performed only at the start timing of the variable display, as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 51(b), at timing t83, which is the start timing of the variable display 334, the destination identification result of the special hold information is determined for the first time. As a result, the fixed display time of the fixed display 333 becomes the normal time, and the variable display 334 thereafter is set to the special time for holding notice.

On the other hand, in this modified example, since the determination process is performed even at the start timing of the confirmation display, the destination identification result of the special hold information can be determined at the timing t82 when the confirmation display 333 is started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51(c), the fixed display time of the fixed display 333 can be set to a special time for holding notice, and the holding notice can be started earlier than in the case of FIG. 51(b). becomes possible.

That is, according to this modification, even if the special hold information is pre-specified during the fixed display or the special hold information is pre-specified during the variable display, the special setting for the hold notice is performed. It can be started early, and it is possible to expand production opportunities.

On the other hand, in a configuration in which determination processing is performed at two timings, if prior identification is performed after one determination is performed and before the other determination is performed, the determination results conflict and the period setting overlaps. or changes may occur along the way. In this regard, in this modification, priority is given to the determination result of the side that has determined first that the special hold information has been previously specified among the determination processes. As a result, it is possible to standardize the determination results, and it is possible to suitably suppress duplication of period setting and midway change.

In the above modified example, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in the stop mode of the suspension notice, and the notice display effect of making the bubble image appear is performed. good too.

<Modification 3 of the first embodiment>
In this modified example, the information form of the variation command transmitted from the main controller 81 is devised. It differs from the embodiment. A variation command according to this modified example will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a schematic diagram for explaining the information format of the variation command. In this modified example, the first fixed display time is set at the start of the variable display, and the settable first fixed display time is the normal time (0.2 sec) or the special time (1.5 sec). It is assumed that there are two types.

As already explained, the variable command is a command corresponding to the pattern displayed on the main display section 43 and the variable display of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41. is transmitted from the main control device 81 to the notification/production control device 82 when is started (see the fluctuation start processing and the like in FIG. 15). This variation command is configured as a predetermined number of bytes of information. For example, as shown in FIG. and a second information area 342 of 2 bytes.

The first information area 341 contains information regarding the presence or absence of a big win. For example, as data values that can be set in the first information area 341, a plurality of types of 1-byte data such as "C0H", "C1H", . . . beginning with "C" in hexadecimal notation are prepared. These data values (command data) are stored in the command information storage area 224 of the ROM 203 . In this modification, when the data value of the first information area 341 is "C0H", it indicates a big hit result, and when it is "C1H", it indicates a losing result. Therefore, the notification/production control device 82 can grasp the result of the lottery for the game round corresponding to the received variation command by referring to the data value of the first information area 341 of the variation command. .

In addition, each data value of the first information area 341 is set so that the value (arrangement pattern of 0 and 1) does not match other commands such as the payout command, and is a unique value used only for the variation command. ing. That is, the data value of the first information area 341 also functions as information indicating that it is a variation command. Therefore, the notification/effect control device 82 can recognize that the received command is a variation command by referring to the data value of the first information area 341 of the variation command.

The second information area 342 contains information about the variable display time of the pattern on the main display section 43 . For example, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the information about the variable display time is composed of 7-bit data consisting of a bit string from the second bit LB2 to the most significant bit LB8. Since the value of the most significant bit LB8 is fixed to 0, the 7-bit data value can take a maximum of 63 different values. These data values are also stored in the command information storage area 224 of the ROM 203 .

Here, the information about the variable display time is configured not by the second information area 342 alone but by combining it with the first information area 341 . For example, even if the 7-bit data value in the second information area 342 is the same "0000001" (binary notation), if the data value in the first information area 341 is "C0H", the variable display time is It indicates that it is 20 sec (variation display time when the jackpot result is stopped and displayed after the reach effect), and if the data value of the first information area 341 is "C01H", the fluctuation display time is 8 sec (reach does not occur It indicates that it is a variable display time when stopping display of the completely out of line result). In other words, the second information area 342 shares a data value depending on whether the data value of the first information area 341 is "C0H" or "C01H". With such a configuration, the number of types of data values used in the second information area 342 is reduced, and the usage of the ROM 203 is saved. The notification/effect control device 82 grasps the variable display time based on each data value of the first information area 341 and the second information area 342 of the command for variation, and based on the grasped result, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed. Settings such as variation modes and display effects are performed.

Incidentally, the value of the most significant bit HB8 in the data value of the first information area 341 is set to 1, and the value of the most significant bit LB8 in the data value of the second information area 342 is set to 0. With such a configuration, when the notification/production control device 82 receives a command, whether the received data corresponds to the first information area 341 (upper byte or preceding command) or the second It is possible to identify whether it corresponds to the information area 342 (lower byte or subsequent command). Such identification does not necessarily have to be a configuration using the most significant bit, as long as it uses a predetermined specific bit.

In this modification, the least significant bit LB1 of the second information area 342 is assigned to information regarding the first fixed display time. For example, when the value of the least significant bit LB1 is 0, it indicates that the first fixed display time is normal time (0.2 sec), and when the value of the least significant bit LB1 is 1, it indicates the first fixed display time. is a special time (1.5 sec).

In this way, by including information indicating the length of the first fixed display time in the variation command, the first stop display command can be omitted. As a result, the number of commands can be reduced, and the usage of the ROM 203 can be saved. In addition, since the command for variation is also used as a notification command for the first fixed display time, the number of times commands are exchanged between the main control device 81 and the notification/effect control device 82 can be reduced. Both loads at 81 and 82 can be reduced.

Further, in this modified example, the second information area 342 includes information about the first fixed display time. In a configuration in which information about the first fixed display time is included in the first information area 341, if the data value of the first information area 341 coincides with another command depending on the data value of the first fixed display time, for example , malfunction may occur, for example, an abnormality notification may be made even though no abnormality has actually occurred. Therefore, it becomes necessary to adjust the data value setting between all the commands so that the command type is not erroneously determined regardless of the data value of the first fixed display time, which increases the burden on the design of the game machine. may lead to In order to avoid this, it is conceivable to convert the information indicating the command type to 7 bits for all commands, but in this case, the remaining 1 bit in the command other than the variation command may become a surplus bit. In this regard, according to the present modification, the second information area 342 is configured to include information about the first fixed display time. Therefore, the generation of surplus bits is suppressed and harmonization with other commands is facilitated. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Furthermore, in this modified example, since the least significant bit LB1 is assigned to the information regarding the first fixed display time, the information regarding the first fixed display time can be included while the information regarding the variable display time remains in a lump. As a result, when the notification/effect control device 82 receives the variable command, it is possible to easily extract the information regarding the variable display time and the information regarding the first fixed display time.

For example, information on the first fixed display time may be included in a form in which information on the variable display time is divided, such as by assigning information on the first fixed display time to bit LB4 of the second information area 342 . In this case, when the output command from the main controller 81 is read for fraudulent purposes, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the content of the information, thereby contributing to the suppression of fraudulent behavior.

Note that the data value of the variation command in the above configuration is merely an example, and for example, the data value of the first information area 341 may be "80H". Also, the number of bytes and bits of the variation command can be changed arbitrarily. For example, the variation command may have a data configuration of 1 byte or a data configuration of 3 bytes or more. Also, the number of bits of the second information area 342 is not limited to 8 bits (1 byte), and may be, for example, 7 bits or less or 9 bits or more. Furthermore, the number of bits assigned to the information about the first fixed display time in the second information area 342 is not limited to 1 bit, and may be 2 bits or more according to the number of types of the first fixed display time. In this case, a predetermined bit area including the least significant bit LB1 can be allocated to the information regarding the first fixed display time.

<Second Embodiment>
The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the fixed display time of the pattern that is variably displayed on the accessory display section 44 is set as the special time. In the present embodiment, in order to distinguish between the pattern displayed on the main display section 43 and the pattern displayed on the accessory display section 44, the former is called a special pattern or a special pattern, and the latter is called a normal pattern. Or it is called Fuzu. Further, the special symbol game round performed on the main display unit 43 is called a special symbol game round, and the normal symbol game round performed on the accessory display unit 44 is called a normal symbol game round.

In this embodiment, a plurality of opening patterns are set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 34 . When a winning result is obtained in the winning lottery of the general pattern, one of the plurality of opening patterns is selected based on the opening type counter C5, and switching control of the electric accessory 34 is performed so that it is opened and closed in the selected opening pattern. is done.

Here, the release type counter C5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for lottery. It should be noted that the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The release type counter C5 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The counter C5 is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 of the RAM 204 . In the lottery counter buffer 231, the information corresponding to the open type counter C5 is stored in the electric work holding area 350 when a winning to the through gate 35 occurs. Note that the electric accessory release counter C4 is also stored in the electric role holding area 350 together.

The electrician reservation area 350 includes an electrician reservation area Rc and a second execution area AE2 for normal maps. The reservation area Rc includes a first area Rc1, a second area Rc2, a third area Rc3, and a fourth area Rc4. Each numerical information of the electric accessory release counter C4 and the release type counter C5 is stored in one of the areas as pending information.

In this case, in the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4, when winning to the through gate 35 occurs multiple times in a row, the first area Rc1→second area Rc2→third area Rc3→fourth area Each numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of Rc4. By providing four areas in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the through gate 35 can be reserved and stored.

The second execution area AE2 for the normal figure is an area for moving each value stored in the first area Rc1 of the reservation area Rc when starting the variable display of the character object display unit 44. At the start of the normal game round, open determination and the like are performed based on various numerical information stored in the second execution area AE2.

The value of the random number that becomes the support state winning in the general-purpose lottery is stored in the success/failure table storage area 221 as the success/failure information group storage means in the ROM 203 as the success/failure table for the general-purpose pattern. In the normal drawing lottery, the probability of being in the support state (probability of winning the support state) is the same regardless of the high or low support mode. is doing. For example, as shown in FIG. 54(a), if the electric accessory open counter C4 has a value of 0 to 99 in the general-purpose right/wrong table, the electric accessory 34 is shifted to the support state that controls the open state. , and C4 are set to 100 to 199, the electric accessory 34 is not controlled to be in the open state and is not shifted to the support state.

Here, as a mode of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 34 in the support state, the frequency of winning the electric accessory 34 from the start to the end of the support state is relatively high or low. A high winning support state and a low winning support state are set. Furthermore, two types of high prize support states, a first high prize support state and a second high prize support state, are set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(b), in the first high winning support state, the electric accessory 34 is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the support state. The first opening is performed until 3 seconds have passed, and the second opening is performed until 2 seconds have passed. On the other hand, in the second high winning support state, the electric accessory 34 is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the support state. The first opening is performed until 2 seconds have passed, and the second opening is performed until 1 second has passed. In both the first high prize support state and the second high prize support state, if the number of prizes entered into the lower working opening 33b from the start of the support state reaches 10, the support state is changed at that point. finish. Also, in each support state, the opening period until the start of the first opening, the closing period (waiting period) between the first opening and the second opening, and the ending period after the second opening are all It is set to 0.2 sec.

In the low prize winning support state, the electric accessory 34 is opened and closed once from the start to the end of the support state, and the opening is performed until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of prizes to the lower operation opening 33b is 3. This is continued until

In the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting handle 54 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 53 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area every 0.6 seconds. . On the other hand, in the low winning support state, the opening time of the electric accessory 34 once is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low prize winning support state, the opening time of the electric accessory 34 is shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, in the support state related to the low winning support state, substantially no winning of game balls occurs.

In the high prize support state and the low prize support state, the number of openings and closings of the electric accessory 34, the opening limit time for one opening, and the prize limit number to the lower operation opening 33b are lower in the high prize support state. The value is not limited to the value described above and can be any value as long as the frequency of winning to the lower operation opening 33b from the start to the end of the support state is higher than in the state. Specifically, in the high prize support state, the number of times of opening and closing is larger than in the low prize support state. Just do it.

However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high prize support state and the low prize support state, in the support state related to the low prize support state, substantially no prizes are awarded to the lower working port 33b. should be For example, in the high winning support state, the product of the firing period of the game ball and the maximum number of openings is set shorter than the opening limit time for one opening, while in the low winning support state, one opening is: The product of the game ball launch period and the open limit number may be set longer than the open limit time. In addition, even if the game ball firing interval and the opening time of the electric accessory 34 once are not the above, in the low prize winning support state, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which winning to the lower operation opening 33b does not substantially occur.

The release type counter C5 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The open type counter C5 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric work holding area 350 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. - 特許庁The distribution destination of the game result for the release type counter C5 is stored in the distribution table storage area 222 in the ROM 203 as a distribution table. Here, as the distribution table for normal maps, the distribution table for normal maps in low frequency support mode in FIG. 54(c) and the distribution table for normal maps in high frequency support in FIG. 54(d) and are set.

As shown in FIG. 54(c), in the general pattern distribution table in the low-frequency support mode, open result A and open result B are set as distribution destinations for general pattern winning. The release result A is a distribution result of a low winning support state, and the release result B is a distribution result of a first high winning support state. In the normal map distribution table in the low frequency support mode, the release type counter C5 = 0 to 89 corresponds to the release result A, and C5 = 90 to 99 corresponds to the release result B, while Fig. 54 As shown in (d), in the general pattern distribution table in the high-frequency support mode, open result C and open result D are set as distribution destinations for general pattern winning. The unlocking result C is a distribution result of the second high winning support state, and the opening result D is a distribution result of the first high winning support state. In the normal map distribution table in the high frequency support mode, the release type counter C5=0 to 94 corresponds to the release result C, and C5=95 to 99 corresponds to the release result D.

By the way, in the low-frequency support mode, in order to reduce the frequency that the result of the general pattern success or failure lottery becomes the winning result (open result), the game time related to one game round is lengthened by increasing the fluctuation display time of the general pattern. However, it may be devised to reduce the number of executions of the general figure success or failure lottery per unit time. Although the normal game times and the special game times are performed in parallel, in addition to being asynchronous, the variable display times of the normal game times and the special game times are independent of each other. is set. For this reason, even if the special game round ends, the situation that the normal game round is still continuing may occur.

Under this premise, for example, when the player wants to finish the game by finishing the special game round, when the continuation state of the normal game round occurs, the result of the success or failure lottery on the normal game side Inconvenience may occur, such as the player being worried about the situation and being unable to finish the game, or finishing the game while leaving an opportunity to shift to the support state. In particular, as in the present embodiment, when the opening pattern of the electric accessory 34 includes the first high prize winning support state in which the game ball can be expected to enter the lower operating port 33b, the game is finished. It is easy to cause problems such as it becoming difficult to do so, and the feeling of loss when it is missed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above problem is solved by utilizing the fixed display of the normal game round. The configuration of this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 55 to 67. FIG.

(a) of FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time and fixed display time of the general pattern game round when the support mode is a low frequency support mode, (b) is a general pattern game when it is a high frequency support mode FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time and a fixed display time;

As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the length of the fixed display time of the normal figure game round is different, Fixed display time in low frequency support mode is longer than that in high frequency support mode.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the fixed display time in the high-frequency support mode is that if the result of the lottery is a winning result and the result of the winning lottery is a winning result, When the release type of the accessory 34 is the release result C (second high prize support state), the result of the lottery is the winning result, and the release type of the electric accessory 34 is the release result D (first high prize support state). ), it is uniformly 0.5 sec.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55(a), when the confirmation display time in the low-frequency support mode is that the result of the lottery is a lost result, the result of the lottery is a winning result and the electric accessory 34 If the release type of is release result A (low winning support state), all are 16.0 sec. In addition, when the result of the winning lottery is the winning result and the release type of the electric accessory 34 is the release result B (first high prize support state), the settable fixed display time is 4.0 sec, 10.0 sec. and 16.0 sec, and one selected from them is set.

Fluctuation display time of the general figure game times in low frequency support mode and high frequency support mode is common 4.0 sec regardless of the result of the general figure success or failure lottery and the release type of the electric accessory 34. Therefore, the total playing time for one game, which is the sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time, is longer in the low-frequency support mode than in the high-frequency support mode.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to use the variable time as a common time, and if the game time for one game round in the low frequency support mode is longer than that in the high frequency support mode, depending on the mode difference The length may be varied, or the length may be varied according to the result of the normal drawing lottery or the release type of the electric accessary 34 . This is the same for the confirmed display time, and if the confirmed display time in the low frequency support mode is longer than that in the high frequency support mode, the confirmed display time will depend on the difference in the normal drawing winning results. may be of different lengths. Moreover, the various specific time lengths described above are examples, and are not limited to the respective numerical values described above.

Here, in the present embodiment, the display screen 41 a of the symbol display device 41 is configured to notify the result of the general pattern success or failure lottery and the release type of the electric accessory 34 . FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram showing the state of the display screen 41a in the regular game cycle.

As shown in FIG. 56(a), in the display screen 41a, a normal map display area PE is set above the variable display area ME. A plurality (two pieces) of display portions PP1 and PP2 are provided in the normal pattern display area PE, and variable display is possible by switching the display colors of the display portions PP1 and PP2. The general pattern display area PE is smaller than the variable display area in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and the display portions PP1 and PP2 in the general pattern display area PE are smaller than the respective patterns (main and sub-patterns).

The normal figure display area PE corresponds to the character object display portion 44, and when the character object display portion 44 performs the variable display, the normal figure display area PE also performs the variable display. Specifically, the variable display of the display portions PP1 and PP2 is performed so that the variable display start timing and the variable display time of the pattern on the character object display portion 44 are matched with each other. Furthermore, regarding the stop display of the display parts PP1 and PP2 (the state in which the display color is not switched and the display color is fixed), the stop display of the pattern on the character object display part 44, the stop display start timing, and the stop display This is done in a timely fashion.

For example, as shown in FIG. 56(b1), the display colors of the two display units PP1 and PP2 are displayed in the same or substantially the same first display color (for example, white). Then, as shown in FIG. 56(b2), the display color of one of the display units PP2 is switched to a second display color (for example, blue) that is different from the previous color (in the figure, the color of the display unit is changed). are shown with different hatches). After that, as shown in FIG. 56(b3), the color of the display section PP2 on the side switched to the second display color is switched to the original first display color, and the color of the other display section PP1 is changed to the first display color. The display color is switched to the second display color, and as shown in FIG. 56(b4), the colors of the respective display portions are switched again.

The variable display of the normal figure game is basically repeated switching of the display colors of these two display units (Fig. 56 (b2) → Fig. 56 (b3) → Fig. 56 (b4) → Fig. 56 (b2) repetition). The switching of the display color is set to make one cycle in about 0.5 sec, making it difficult for the player to distinguish the display before and after the switching.

When the fluctuation display time of the normal game round passes, notification of the open result that shifts to the support state as the game result of the normal game round or the disconnection result is performed. In the case of the open result, the display portions PP1 and PP2 are displayed in the same color, and the variable display ends. At this time, if the release type of the electric accessory 34 is the low winning support state, as shown in FIG. , when the release type of the electric accessory 34 is the first high winning support state, as shown in FIG. The display color becomes red (for example, red) and the variable display ends. Further, when the release type of the electric accessory 34 is the second high winning support state, both the display parts PP1 and PP2 become the fourth display color (for example, yellow) different from the first to third display colors. The variable display ends. On the other hand, in the case of an outlier result, as shown in FIG. 56(b1), both of the two display portions become the first display color, and the variable display ends.

In addition, the display mode of the display part in the normal figure display area PE is not limited to the one described above, and the number of display parts may be one, or numbers and symbols may be used. In other words, any configuration is possible as long as it is possible to identify the type of opening of the electric accessory 34 in addition to identifying the result of opening and the result of disengagement.

With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, by making the confirmation display time of the general figure game round in the low frequency support mode longer than before, the general figure game round is unfinished at the end of the special figure game round Even if it is, it is possible to increase the probability that the normal symbol is in the stop display state. When the normal pattern is in the stop display state, the result of the normal pattern winning lottery and the release type of the electric accessory 34 can be immediately grasped by visually recognizing the normal pattern display area PE of the display screen 41a, and the probability is increased. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of waiting for the result of the normal figure itself, and it becomes easy to quickly notify the result of the figure success or failure lottery and the release type of the electric accessory 34.

In addition, while ensuring the game time of the normal game cycle suitable for the low-frequency support mode, the variable display time can be shortened by the lengthened fixed display time. By shortening the variable display time, it is possible to shorten the waiting time until the stop display even in a state where the normal game round is variably displayed at the end of the special game round.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the game time (the total time of the variable display time and the fixed display time) for one game when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode is longer than that when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. getting longer. As a result, even if the fluctuation display time is shortened in the case of the low frequency support mode, the number of times of execution of the general pattern success or failure lottery per unit time can be kept low, and the function of the low frequency support mode is secured. becomes possible.

In this way, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to notify the result of the general figure success or failure lottery quickly while suppressing that the function of the low-frequency support mode is impaired. As a result, after the end of the special game round, the player can finish the game quickly, and the ease of playing is improved.

As shown in FIG. 55, the confirmation display time in the high-frequency support mode is short, but it is difficult to assume that the player will end the game during the high-frequency support mode. It is considered that there is no hindrance in practical use, or even if it occurs, it is minor. Rather, the short fixed display time contributes to the shortening of the game time per game, which is preferable in securing the function of the high-frequency support mode.

By the way, the fixed display time of the special figure game times in the low frequency support mode is, for example, 0.7 sec, which is shorter than the fixed display time of the normal game times in the low frequency support mode. As a result, the induction of a sense of sluggishness in the special game cycle is suppressed, and the smooth progress of the game is promoted. In addition, as long as it is within a range shorter than the fixed display time of the regular game times, the fixed display time may be diversified as in the first embodiment.

By the way, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration in which the fixed display time is lengthened, the opening control of the electric accessory 34 is performed after the player grasps the result of the normal figure win/loss lottery and the type of opening of the electric accessory 34. The grace period until As a result, when it is grasped that the electric accessory 34 will be controlled to be opened while there is no intention to end the game, there is a concern that a so-called stop shot will be induced in which a game ball is shot at the timing of opening the electric accessory 34. be.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55(a), in the low frequency support mode, the result of the general figure success or failure lottery is the open result, and when the open type of the electric accessory 34 is the first high winning support state, the general figure It is configured to diversify the fixed display time in game rounds. This makes it difficult for the player to predict the release timing of the electric accessory 34, and makes it possible to suppress the stop shot.

As the specific fixed display time, as already explained, there are three types of 4.0 sec, 10.0 sec and 16.0 sec. Of these, the shortest 4.0 sec is set to be longer than at least the required period (for example, 1.0 sec) from when the game ball is shot until it reaches the electric accessory 34 (lower actuation opening 33b). ing. By doing so, even if the release of the electric accessory 34 in the first winning support state is notified under the state of waiting for the result of the normal game round on the premise of the end of the game, the game can be played immediately. If the ball is hit, it will be released in time for the first release, and the player can receive a proper profit.

The selection of the fixed display time is performed using the distribution table for the normal pattern fixed display time stored in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 203 . Here, with reference to FIG. 57, the distribution table for the normal pattern fixed display time will be described.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the distribution table for the normal pattern fixed display time, the distribution destination of the fixed display time is defined corresponding to the value of the open type counter C5. As destinations of the fixed display time, fixed display time A (4.0 sec), fixed display time B (10.0 sec), and fixed display time C (16.0 sec) are set. In the distribution table for normal figure fixed display time, open type counter C5 = 90 to 93 corresponds to fixed display time A, C5 = 94 to 96 corresponds to fixed display time B, C5 = 97 to 99 is fixed It corresponds to display time C. As the random number for allocating the fixed display time, the open type counter C5 for allocating the open type of the electric accessary 34 is also used. may be provided.

Next, each control process executed by MPU 202 of main controller 81 in the present embodiment will be described.

<Electronic support processing>
FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support in this embodiment. This process is performed in step S405 of the normal process in FIG. 12 according to the first embodiment.

In the electric role support process, the normal game round control process is first executed in step S3401, the normal game state transition process is executed in the subsequent step S3402, and the support process ends. That is, the electrical support process basically has the same processing configuration as the game round control process (FIG. 13) and the game state transition process (FIG. 16) on the special figure side. That is, the normal pattern game round control processing in step S3401 corresponds to the special pattern side game round control processing in FIG. 13, and the normal pattern game state transition processing in step S3402 corresponds to the special symbol side game state transition processing in FIG. is doing. Hereinafter, the processing of the game round control processing (step S3401) and the game state transition processing (step S3402) on the normal side will be described in detail.

<Normal map game turn control processing>
First, the normal game round control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In normal figure game round control processing, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not in the support state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support state flag is stored in the support state flag storage area in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 . The support state flag is stored when shifting to a support state for opening and closing control of the electric accessory 34 in the normal game state transition processing described later, and when the support state is ended in the normal game state transition processing erased to

If it is in the support state, without executing any of the processing after step S3502, that is, the processing for starting the normal game turn in steps S3503 to S3505 and the processing for progressing in the normal game turn in steps S3506 to S3510 , terminates the normal game round control process. That is, when it is in the support state, regardless of whether or not winning to the through gate 35 has occurred, the normal game cycle is not started.

If not in the support state, in step S3502, it is determined whether or not the character object display unit 44 is in variable display. In addition, this determination is performed by determining whether or not the flag is stored in the general pattern fluctuation displaying flag storage area in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 . The normal figure variable display flag is stored when the variable display of the character product display unit 44 is started, and is erased when the variable display ends.

When the display unit 44 for the role item is not in the variable display, the process proceeds to the process for starting the normal figure game cycle in steps S3503 to S3505. In the general pattern game turn start processing, first, in step S3503, it is determined whether or not the general pattern reservation storage number FN is 0. When the number FN of the normal figure pending storage is 0, the process for electric support is terminated as it is.

If the number FN of the normal map reservation storage is not 0, in step S3504 the normal map data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the electric service reservation area Rc for variable display. In the general pattern data setting process, the general pattern reservation storage number FN is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first area of the electric service reservation area Rc is moved to the second execution area AE2. Then, a process of shifting the data stored in each storage area of the electrician's holding area Rc is executed. That is, this is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4 to the lower area side. , third area Rc3→second area Rc2, fourth area Rc4→third area Rc3, and so on. Then, a normal map shift command, which is information for making the notification/production control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data of the reservation area on the normal map side has been shifted is set. In this case, the general pattern shift command is read from the command information storage area 224 of the ROM 203, and the general pattern shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the notification/production control device 82.

After performing normal figure data setting processing in step S3504, after performing normal figure fluctuation start processing in step S3505, this normal figure game round control processing is ended. Here, normal figure fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 60 .

In normal figure fluctuation start processing, first, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a high frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204 . As described above, the high-frequency support flag is stored in the special figure side game state transition processing, and then erased when the transition condition is satisfied (when the special figure game round continues 100 times).

If the mode is not the high-frequency support mode, the success/failure determination (support lottery) is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the low-frequency support mode in step S3602. The pass/fail judgment is performed by referring to the pass/fail table for the frequency support mode. In addition, as already explained, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the support mode is high or low, it is configured to use a common right/wrong table for the general map. It is the same as the success/failure table referred to by (see FIG. 54(a)). Therefore, the process of determining whether the support mode is high or low in step S3601 may be omitted.

After the execution of step S3602 or step S3603, in step S3604 ~ step S3614, along with executing the processing for setting the game result of the normal game round this time, the display unit for the role in the normal game round this time A process for setting a stop result when ending the variable display executed in 44 is executed. When setting the stop result, among the various stop result tables (stop result information group) stored in the stop result table storage area as the stop result information group storage means in the ROM 203, the stop result table for the normal chart is selected. Referenced.

Specifically, first, in step S3604, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S3602 or step S3603 is support state winning. In the case of winning the support state, in steps S3605 to S3613, the processing for setting the game result and the processing for setting the stop result in the case of the support state winning are executed.

In step S3605, it is determined whether or not the RAM 204 stores a high frequency support mode flag. If a negative determination is made in step S3605, distribution determination is performed with reference to the normal figure classification table (FIG. 54(c)) for the low frequency support mode in step S3606. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the release type counter C5 stored in the second execution area AE2 is included in the numerical range of the unlocking result A or the numerical range of the unlocking result B.

In the following step S3607, it is determined whether or not the game result sorted in step S3606 is the result of the low winning support state (open result A). If the result is the low winning support state, in step S3608, as a result of stopping the character object display unit 44 in the normal game round, it is displayed that the low winning support state will occur. A stop result setting process for the low winning support state is executed for setting that the variable display is ended in the state. In addition, in step S3608, various flags stored in the RAM 204 information (low winning support flag) for specifying in the MPU 202 that the winning result of the normal game round this time is the open result of the low winning support state Store in area 235 .

On the other hand, if the game result distributed in step S3607 is not the result of the low winning support state, that is, if the game result distributed is the open result B and the first high winning support state, in step S3609, the first A stop result setting process for the first high winning support is executed for setting to end the variable display in a state that the high winning supporting state will occur. In addition, in step S3609, information (first high winning support flag) for specifying in the MPU 202 that the winning/failure determination result of the normal game round this time is the open result of the first high winning supporting state is stored in the RAM 204. is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of .

For these, when affirmative determination is made in step S3605, in step S3610, distribution determination is performed with reference to the general map classification table for high frequency support mode (FIG. 54(d)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the unlock type counter C5 stored in the second execution area AE2 is included in the numerical range of the unlock result C or the numerical range of the unlock result D.

At subsequent step S3611, it is determined whether or not the game result sorted at step S3610 is the result of the second high winning support state (release result C). If the result is the second high winning support state, in step S3612, the second high winning support state will occur as a result of the stoppage of the accessory display unit 44 in the normal game round. A stop result setting process for the second high winning support state is executed for setting the end of the variable display in a state where the state is displayed. In addition, in step S3612, the RAM 204 stores information (second high winning support flag) for specifying in the MPU 202 that the winning/failure determination result of the normal game round of this time is the open result of the second high winning supporting state. is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of .

On the other hand, if the game result distributed in step S3607 is not the result of the second high winning support state, that is, if the game result distributed is the open result D and the first high winning support state, in step S3613, A stop result setting process for the first high winning support is executed for setting to end the variable display in a state in which the occurrence of the first high winning support state is displayed. In addition, in step S3613, the RAM 204 stores information (first high winning support flag) for specifying in the MPU 202 that the winning/failure determination result of the normal game round this time is the open result that becomes the first high winning supporting state. is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of .

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S3604, in step S3614, as a result of stopping the character object display unit 44 in this normal game round, the first high winning support state, the second high winning support state and the low A stop result setting process for losing is executed for setting that the variable display is ended in a state in which none of the winning support states occurs.

After executing any of the processing of steps S3608, S3609, S3612, and S3613, in step S3615, the general pattern fluctuation display for setting the fluctuation display time of the current general pattern game round in the display unit 44 for the role product Execute time setting processing. In this embodiment, as already described, the normal pattern fluctuation display time is uniformly 4.0 sec, so in step S3615, the normal pattern fluctuation display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 is set to 800 (equivalent to 4.0 sec). The value of the normal figure fluctuation display time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is started.

For each of the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, a variable display time table in which a plurality of types of variable display times are set is stored in the display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203, and each variable display time table is stored. It may be configured such that the fluctuation display time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter for the normal figure is selected from. In this case, a portion of the variable display time that can be selected during the high-frequency support mode may be set to be longer than a portion of the variable display time that can be selected during the low-frequency support mode. Even if the time is selected, the high-frequency support mode may be set to be shorter than the low-frequency support mode. In addition, not only the value of the fluctuation type counter for normal diagrams, but also the variable display time may be set to differ according to the number of normal diagram pending storage numbers FN. The variable display time may be set to be short, or vice versa.

After executing the normal pattern fluctuation display time setting process in step S3615, normal pattern fixed display time setting process for setting the fixed display time is executed in step S3616. Here, the processing for setting the normal pattern fixed display time will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 61 .

<Setting processing of normal map confirmation display time>
In the setting process of normal figure fixed display time, first, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a high frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204 . When negative determination is made in step S3701, in step S3702, it is determined whether or not the win/loss determination result of the normal game cycle is the opening result (opening result B) that becomes the first high winning support state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RAM 204 stores the first high winning support flag.

If the affirmative determination is made in step S3702, in step S3703, allocation determination is performed with reference to the allocation table for the normal figure fixed display time (FIG. 57). Specifically, the value of the open type counter C5 stored in the second execution area AE2 is the fixed display time A (4.0 sec), the fixed display time B (10.0 sec), the fixed display time C (16.0 sec). 0 sec). In the following step S3704, in order to set the result of the allocation in step S3703 as the confirmation display time in the normal game round this time, the value corresponding to the allocation result is displayed in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. It is set in the time counter area, and the processing for setting the normal figure fixed display time ends. The value of normal figure fixed display time information set in step S3704 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is started.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3702, it means that the win/loss determination result of the normal game round this time is an open result (open result A) or an off result that becomes a low winning support state. In this case, proceed to step S3705, set 8000 (equivalent to 16.0 sec) in the normal pattern fluctuation display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, and end the setting process of the normal pattern fixed display time do.

If a negative determination is made in step S3701, that is, if the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S3706, and 250 (0. 5 sec) is set, and the process of setting the normal figure fixed display time is completed.

Returning to the description of the normal pattern fluctuation start processing (FIG. 60), after the execution of step S3616, in step S3617, the normal pattern fluctuation command and normal pattern type command are set. The normal pattern fluctuation command includes information on the normal pattern fluctuation display time. In addition, the information of the game result is included in the normal figure classification command. In addition, the information of the normal pattern fixed display time is included in the normal pattern fluctuation command.

Normal figure variation command and normal figure type command set in step S3617 are transmitted to the notification/production control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. In the notification / production control device 82, based on the received general pattern variation command and general pattern type command, the content of the production in the general pattern game round is determined, Various so that the content of the decided production is executed Control your equipment. The content of this effect includes the variable display mode and fixed display mode of the display parts PP1 and PP2 (see FIG. 56) in the pattern display device 41, and the determined variable display mode of the display parts PP1 and PP2. is output from the notification/effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 based on the display content command received from the notification/production control device 82 so that variable display and fixed display corresponding to each normal game cycle are performed.

After that, in step S3618, the variable display of the pattern is started on the character product display unit 44, and the normal figure variation start processing is ended.

Returning to the description of the general-purpose game round control process (FIG. 59), when the character product display unit 44 is in the process of changing display, the general-purpose game round progress processing of steps S3506 to S3510 is executed. In the general pattern game round progress processing, first in step S3506, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display time of the general pattern game round of this time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information for normal drawing stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204 has become zero.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S3509. In the variable display process, the character object display unit 44 is controlled for display (light emission control of each display segment) so that each display segment in the character object display unit 44 is turned on and off in a predetermined order. , terminates the normal game round control process.

When the fluctuation display time has passed, the fluctuation end process is executed in step S3510, and then the normal figure game round control process is ended. In the variation ending process of step S3510, the information stored in the RAM 204 in any of the processes of steps S3608, S3609, S3612, S3613 and S3614 is specified, and the pattern corresponding to the information is displayed on the character product display unit 44. The character item display section 44 is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed.

<General game state transition processing>
Next, normal figure game state transition processing of step S3402 in processing for electric support support will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 62 to 64. FIG.

First, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the device is in the support state. If it is not in the support state, the process proceeds to step S3802, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the fluctuation display of the pattern of the normal game round has ended. If it is not the timing at which the variable display ends, the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

When it is the timing when the fluctuation display for the general pattern ends, it is determined in step S3803 whether or not the game result of the general pattern game cycle of this time corresponds to the transition to the support state. Specifically, it is determined whether any one of the first high winning support flag, the second high winning support flag, and the low winning support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 . If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If any of the above flags is stored, support state start processing is executed in step S3804. In the start process, the standby time for the normal figure opening is set. The waiting time for the normal figure opening is set to 0.2 sec in any of the first high prize support state, the second high prize support state and the low prize support state (see FIG. 54(b)).

In subsequent step S3805, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. If a negative determination is made in step S3805, it means that the current support state is the first high winning support state or the low winning support state, so the process proceeds to step S3806, and the support state of the electric accessory 34 is the first high winning support state. Determines whether or not it is in a support state. If the determination in step S3806 is affirmative, 2 is set in the second round counter area RC2 in step S3807. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34 is released. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3806, 1 is set in the second round counter area RC2 in step S3808.

If the determination in step S3805 is affirmative, it means that the current support state is the first high prize support state or the second high prize support state. set.

After performing the process of step S3807, S3808 or S3809, a normal figure opening command is set in step S3810. This set normal figure opening command is transmitted to the notification/production control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. A notification/performance control device 82 determines the contents of the opening performance corresponding to the support state based on the received general pattern opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed.

In the following step S3811, after executing the external signal setting process, the normal figure game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the accessory release signal provided on the external output terminal board 99 is set to the release signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the role release signal is connected to the management control device on the gaming hall side, the role release signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 is sent to the management control device. It is possible to grasp that a support state has occurred.

In the external signal setting process, it is determined whether or not the RAM 204 stores the first high winning support flag or the second high winning support flag. The signal output state of the output terminal for the high winning support state signal provided on the board 99 is defined as the high winning support state signal output state. Thereby, when the output terminal for the high winning support state signal is connected to the management control device on the gaming hall side, the high winning support state signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine is generated in the management control device. 10, it can be grasped that the high winning support state has occurred.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3801 that the device is in the support state, the process advances to step S3812. In step S3812, it is determined whether or not the standby time for opening has elapsed. When the waiting time for the opening has passed, the accessory opening/closing process is executed in step S3813. Here, the accessory opening/closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Accessory opening/closing process>
In the accessory opening/closing process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34 is being opened in the previous step S3901. Specifically, such a determination is made based on the drive state of the electric accessory drive unit 34b. When the electric accessory 34 is not being opened, it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is 0 at step S3902, and at step S3903 various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 are provided. It is determined whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 is 0.

When the value of the second round counter area RC2 is 0 or when the value of the second timer area T2 is not 0, the opening/closing process of the main character product is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not 0 and the value of the second timer area T2 is 0, the process proceeds to step S3904, and the electric accessory drive unit 34b is activated to open the electric accessory 34. It is set to a driving state (accessory release processing). In the following step S3905, setting processing for each round is executed. Setting processing for each round will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. If the high-frequency support mode is not set, it is determined in step S4102 whether the support state is the first high winning support state. If the determination in step S4102 is affirmative, the process advances to step S4103 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is 2, that is, whether or not it is the first opening.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4103, "1500" is set in the second timer area T2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S4104, and 3.0 sec is set as the first opening upper limit period. . In the subsequent step S4105, 10 is set in the second prize winning counter area PC2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, and the setting process for each round ends. The second winning counter area PC2 is for counting the number of winnings to the lower operation opening 33b. The upper limit of the number of winning prizes to the lower operation opening 33b is set to ten. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4103, it means that it is the second release. In this case, in step S4106, "1000" is set in the second timer area T2, and 2.0 sec is set as the upper limit of the open period. After that, the setting process for each round ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4102, it means that the support state is the low winning support state. In this case, "100" (equivalent to 0.2 sec) is set in the second timer area T2 in step S4107, and 3 is set in the second winning counter area PC2 in step S4108, and this setting process ends. .

If the determination in step S4101 is affirmative, that is, if the support mode is the high frequency support mode, it is determined in step S4109 whether or not the support state is the first high winning support state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4109, the process proceeds to step S4103 and subsequent steps. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4109, it means that the support state is the second high winning support state. In this case, the process advances to step S4110 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is 2, that is, whether or not it is the first opening.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4110, "1500" is set in the second timer area T2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S4111, and 2.0 sec is set as the first open upper limit period. . In the subsequent step S4112, 10 is set in the second prize winning counter area PC2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, and the setting process for each round ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4110, "500" is set in the second timer area T2 and 1.0 sec is set as the upper limit of the open period in step S4113. After that, the setting process for each round ends.

Returning to the description of the accessory opening/closing process (FIG. 64), after executing the setting process for each round in step S3905, the normal figure open command is set in step S3906, and the present accessory opening/closing process ends. This set general pattern open command is transmitted to the notification/production control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. A notification/performance control device 82 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the support state based on the received general pattern open command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed.

Also, if the electric accessory 34 is open in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3907 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 is zero. When the value of the second timer area T2 is not 0, it is determined in step S3908 whether or not the game ball has won the lower operation opening 33b. If a negative determination is made in step S3908, the opening/closing processing of the main role product is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3908, after the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is decremented by 1 in step S3909, it is determined whether or not the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is 0 in step S3910. judge. If a negative determination is made in step S3910, the opening/closing processing of the main role product is terminated as it is.

If the value of the second timer area T2 is 0 at step S3907, or if the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is 0 at step S3910, it means that the condition for closing the accessory has been met. In such a case, in step S3911, the electric accessory drive unit 34b is brought into a non-driving state to close the electric accessory 34 (accessory closing process).

In subsequent step S3912, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and in step S3913, it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is 0. If a negative determination is made in step S3913, it means that the first opening process of the electric accessory 34 has ended. Therefore, in step S3914, the second timer "100" (equivalent to 0.2 sec) is set in area T2.

In the following step S3915, set the normal figure closing command and end the opening and closing process of this role product. This set normal figure closing command is transmitted to the notification/production control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. A notification/performance control device 82 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the support state based on the received general pattern closing command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3913, that is, if the value of the second round counter area RC2 is 0, support state end processing is executed in step S3916. In the processing concerned, the waiting time for the normal figure ending is set. The standby time for the normal ending is set to 0.2 sec in any of the first high winning support state, the second high winning support state and the low winning support state (see FIG. 54(b)). After that, in step S3917, after setting the normal figure ending command, the opening and closing processing of this role product is terminated. This set normal figure ending command is transmitted to the notification/production control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process.

Returning to the description of the general/universal figure game state transition process (FIG. 62), after executing the opening/closing process of the accessory in step S3813, the process proceeds to step S3814. In step S3814, it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is zero. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3814, the process advances to step S3815 to determine whether or not the standby time for ending has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3815, end processing of the support state is executed in step S3816. In the support state end processing, various flags for the support state such as the first high prize support flag, the second high prize support flag, and the low prize support flag are erased. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S3812, S3814 or S3815, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

Next, a description will be given of processing related to various effects on the general/universal figure side executed by the MPU 242 of the notification/effect control device 82 in the present embodiment. As processing related to various effects on the side of the general pattern, normal pattern fluctuation display control processing related to production control of the general pattern game round is set. This process is activated at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 msec).

<Normal map fluctuation display control processing>
FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the normal pattern fluctuation display control process executed by the MPU 242 of the notification/production control device 82. As shown in FIG.

In the normal pattern fluctuation display control process, first, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern game is in progress, that is, whether or not the fluctuation display of the normal pattern for one game is being executed on the pattern display device 41. do. If a negative determination is made in step S4201, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the command for normal figure fluctuation transmitted from the main controller 81 has been received. When the negative determination is made in step S4202, the normal figure fluctuation display control processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S4203, that is, when the normal pattern variation command is received, in step S4203, normal pattern variation start processing for starting the production for the normal pattern game round is performed. Run. Here, the processing for normal pattern fluctuation start will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 66 .

<Normal map fluctuation start process>
In the normal pattern fluctuation start process, first, in step S4301, the command for normal pattern fluctuation received this time is read, and the information of the fluctuation display time is specified from the command. In addition, as already explained, the main control unit 81 also transmits the general pattern type command when transmitting the general pattern variation command. Therefore, in step S4301, the general pattern type command received together with the general pattern variation command received this time is read, and information on the game result is specified from the command. In step S4301, information as to whether or not the opening result has been obtained, information regarding the opening type if the opening result has been obtained, information regarding the variable display time, and information regarding the fixed display time are grasped.

Next, in step S4302, based on the information grasped in step S4301, the process of setting the stop result in the normal game round to be started this time is executed. That is, when the information specified in step S4301 is the opening result, the display parts PP1 and PP2 (see FIG. 56) are displayed in a display color corresponding to the opening type at the end of the variable display in the normal game round of this time. If the stop result is set to stop display, and if the information specified in step S4301 is a result of deviation, the display units PP1 and PP2 are displayed at the end of the variable display in this normal game round. Set the stop result to display stop in display color.

In the following step S4303, a setting process for special display effect is executed for executing the special display effect when the electric accessary 34 is controlled to open and close in the first high winning support state. Here, the special display effect will be described with reference to FIG. (a) of FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram showing the special display effect, and (b) is a timing chart showing the relationship between the execution start timing of the special display effect and the fixed display time.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), in this embodiment, a special display effect is performed on the display screen 41a of the pattern display device 41. FIG. This special display effect is for notifying the player that the electric accessory 34 is controlled to be opened and closed in the first high winning support state, that is, that the game ball is likely to win the lower operation opening 33b. It is. As a special display effect, for example, a character display 401 such as "Aim for an electric chew!" , etc., can be considered.

Note that "electric chew" is an abbreviation for electric tulip, in other words, it is a common name for the electric accessory 34 and the lower operation opening 33b. The reason why the display 401 is displayed at the center of the lower part of the display screen 41a is that the display 401 is displayed on the display screen 41a in correspondence with the fact that the electric accessary 34 and the lower operation opening 33b are positioned below the center of the display screen 41a. It is displayed in the region near the electric accessory 34 and the lower operation port 33b.

The above special display effect is a special effect for the low-frequency support mode, and is performed only when the electric accessory 34 is controlled to open and close in the first high winning support state under the condition that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. will be In the low-frequency support mode, the frequency with which the electric accessory 34 is switched to the open state is low, so it is assumed that the player's interest in the electric accessory 34 is waning. Therefore, if the electric accessory 34 is only opened, the player may not notice it, and the support state may end without experiencing the fun of aiming at winning the electric accessory 34 (lower actuation opening 33b). By performing the effect display as described above, it is possible to prompt the player's attention, and it is possible to suitably provide the above-mentioned amusement. In addition, even a player who is about to end the game can recognize the release of the electric role object 34 by visually recognizing the effect display, and the display unit 44 for the role object, the display units PP1 and PP2, and the electric role object can be opened. The burden of continuing to stare at 34 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67(b), the special display effect is configured to be executed before the electric accessory 34 is released in order to notify the player in advance that the electric accessory 34 will be released. . The execution period of the special display effect before opening the electric accessary 34 is randomized, and can be changed within a range of 2.0 sec to 5.0 sec, for example. That is, three types of special display effect execution periods of 2.0 sec, 4.0 sec and 5.0 sec are prepared, and one of them is randomly selected each time the special display effect is executed. 2.0 sec, which is the shortest time, is the required period (for example, 1.0 sec) from at least launching the game ball to reaching the electric accessory 34 (lower operation opening 33b), as in the case of the fixed display time. It is set to be longer than

By adopting the above configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the so-called final blow while announcing the occurrence of the first high winning support state in advance. That is, if the execution period of the special display effect is fixed to a predetermined period, it becomes possible to predict the start timing of the electric accessory 34 from the start timing of the special display effect, and the significance of randomizing the fixed display time. can be lost. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the execution period of the special display effect is diversified, so that the start timing of the electric accessory 34 can be made difficult or unpredictable.

The display mode of the special display effect in each execution period is common, and is visually difficult or unidentifiable. As a result, it becomes difficult to predict the execution period from the content of the special display effect, and it is possible to strengthen the suppression of stop shots. In this case, it is not always necessary to standardize the display mode of the special display effect. For example, as in the case where a part of the special display effect of 2.0 sec and a part of the special display effect of 4.0 sec are common, the display modes are overlapped between the special display effects. may be configured. The point is that the execution period cannot be uniquely identified from the content (appearance) of the special display effect.

The selection of the execution period of the special display effect is executed by the notification/effect control device 82 and is executed regardless of the selection result of the fixed display time in the main control device 81 . Therefore, even if the shortest fixed display time A (4.0 sec) is selected as the fixed display time in the main control device 81, the longest 5.0 sec is selected in the notification/effect control device 82. can be. As described above, in the present embodiment, a case may arise in which the special display effect cannot be executed only during the confirmed display.

Therefore, the notification/effect control device 82 determines the type and duration of the fixed display time selected by the main control device 81, and adjusts the start timing of the special display effect based on the result. That is, as shown in FIG. 67(b), when the fixed display time selected by the main control device 81 is shorter than the execution period of the special display effect selected by itself, the fixed display is started. to start the special display effect. Conversely, as shown in FIG. 67(c), if the fixed display time selected by the main controller 81 is longer than the execution period of the special display effect selected by the user, the special display is performed during the fixed display. start the performance. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately secure the time for the special display effect even when the fixed display time varies irregularly.

Returning to the description of normal figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 66), in the setting processing for the special display effect of step S4303, the selection process of the execution period of the special display effect, the fixed display time selected by the main control device 81 determination processing of whether the fixed display time is longer than the execution period of the special display effect, and setting processing of the start timing of the special display effect based on the result of the determination process. Of these, the processing for grasping the type and time length of the fixed display time is performed based on the information on the fixed display time included in the command for normal figure fluctuation from the main control device 81 . After setting the start timing of the special display effect, a command for starting the special display effect is output to the display control device 212 based on the arrival of the start timing. The display control device 212 controls the pattern display device 41 so that the special display effect is started on the display screen 41a based on the command. Note that the display control device 212 may perform various processes in step S4303.

In the subsequent step S4304, to start the production for the normal game round, after executing the process of outputting a command to the display control device 212, the process for starting the normal pattern fluctuation is terminated. Based on the received command, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control on the pattern display device 41 in order to execute the effect in the current regular game cycle. It should be noted that, as described above, as the general-purpose game round, the display colors of the display portions PP1 and PP2 in the general-purpose display area PE are simply switched. Based on this, the display control of the pattern display device 41 is performed so as to periodically switch the display color of the display unit.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the fixed display time of the regular game cycle is made longer than that when it is the high-frequency support mode. As a result, it is possible to quickly notify the result of the general-purpose lottery while suppressing the function of the low-frequency support mode from being impaired. As a result, the player can quickly finish the game after finishing the special game round.

When the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the fixed display time of the normal game cycle is made longer than the fixed display time of the special game cycle. The following effect is expected by setting it as the structure which concerns. In the present embodiment, the display units PP1 and PP2 corresponding to the normal game times are smaller than the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 corresponding to the special game times, and the accessory display unit 44 Since they are provided at positions away from the center of the front surface of the board 24, they are inconspicuous. In addition, the winning result of the normal figure winning/losing lottery tends to have a lower degree of advantage for the player than the winning result of the special winning lottery. For this reason, the player's interest tends to turn to the special game round during the game, and the player is considered to visually recognize the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the effect display related to the special game round in most of the game. Under such circumstances, it is possible that the outcome of the general-purpose lottery will suddenly become worrisome, and the line of sight will be moved to the display parts PP1, PP2, and the like.

In such a case, the fixed display time of the regular game round is longer, so that the probability that the display parts PP1, PP2, etc. are in a stop display state when the player moves his/her line of sight increases. When the display parts PP1, PP2, etc. are in a stop display state, the result of the general-purpose lottery and the release type of the electric accessory 34 can be immediately grasped, and the probability is increased, so that the result of the general-purpose lottery. The opportunity to quickly grasp the As a result, the frequency with which the line of sight can be quickly returned to the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is increased, and overlooking of the result of stopping the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the effect display is suppressed.

In this case, it is conceivable to lengthen the fixed display time of the special game rounds in accordance with the regular game rounds. However, if the confirmation display time is lengthened while the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are attracting a lot of attention, the player is likely to be given the impression of being slow, which may hinder the player's desire to play the game. In this regard, in the present embodiment, since the confirmation display time of the special figure game round is shortened, it is possible to suitably suppress this. That is, according to the present embodiment, the fixed display time of the general game round is relatively long, and the fixed display time of the special game round is relatively short, so that the result of the general game winning lottery etc. It is possible to suppress the stagnation of the progress of the game while making it easy to grasp quickly.

<Modification of Second Embodiment>
This modification differs from the above-described second embodiment in that it is determined whether or not the player is pausing the game, and based on the result, the fixed display time of the regular game round is set. The configuration of this modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 68 to 72. FIG.

By lengthening the confirmation display time of the normal game round, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the result of the normal game win-or-loss lottery and the release type of the electric accessory 34, as described in the second embodiment. As is, for example, if the reservation information of the normal game round is stored at the end of the special game round, even if the result of the normal game round in progress is known quickly, We will have to wait until we know the results. As a countermeasure, it is possible to shorten the game time related to one game round and advance the start timing of the next normal game round, but in this case, the execution frequency of the normal figure success or failure lottery per unit time increases, A problem arises that the function of the low frequency support mode is impaired.

In view of this point, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 68, even if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, if the game is paused, the fixed display time of the normal figure game round is shortened It is configured. The reason why the execution frequency of the normal figure win-or-loss lottery per unit time increases is that the game time of the normal figure game round is shortened, and at the same time the stored reservation information continues to be digested in a short period of time, and the game ball is released through the gate. 35, new pending information is supplemented one after another. In this regard, in the present modification, while the fixed display time is lengthened when the game is in progress, as in the second embodiment, it is shortened when the game is paused. As a result, it is possible to shorten the game time of the normal game round while suppressing the function of the low frequency support mode from being impaired, and when the reservation information of the normal game round is stored at the end of the special game round As a result, the waiting time can be shortened.

Note that the specific time length when the fixed display time is shortened may be 0.5 sec, which is the same as the time length when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. It may be different. In short, when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, it is sufficient that the fixed display time during game pause is shorter than the fixed display time during play, and the specific length of time is arbitrary.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in this modified example will be described.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing normal processing in this modified example. This process is performed in place of the normal process of FIG. 12 according to the first embodiment, and differs from the normal process of FIG. ing. Note that the processing of steps S4502 to S4510 is the same as the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the normal processing of FIG. 12, so description thereof will be omitted.

In the normal process, first, at step S4501, a game pause determination process is executed to determine whether or not the player has paused the game. Here, the game pause determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game pause determination process, first, at step S4601, it is determined whether or not the game pause flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 . The game pause flag is set when it is determined that the player has paused the game. If a negative determination is made in step S4601, it is determined in step S4602 whether or not a rest timer flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. FIG. The pause timer flag is set when judging whether or not the firing stop state has continued for a predetermined period of time when judging whether or not the game is paused. is shown.

If a negative determination is made in step S4602, it is determined in step S4603 whether or not the shooting of game balls has been stopped. Specifically, referring to the state of the player's shooting operation at the shooting handle 54 or the shooting situation of the game ball from the game ball shooting mechanism 53, it is determined whether the shooting operation is being performed or whether the game ball has been shot. determine whether or not there is If the affirmative determination is made in step S4603, in step S4604, it is determined whether or not the variable display is being performed in the special figure game round. When the negative determination is made in step S4604, it is determined whether or not the common pending number CRN of special figures is 0 in step S4605.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4605, in step S4606 a pause timer flag is set in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 in order to measure the firing stop period. "5000" (equivalent to 10.0 sec) is set in the provided third timer area T3. The count value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, at a cycle of 2 msec.

On the other hand, when the negative determination is made in steps S4603 and S4605, or when the affirmative determination is made in step S4604, this game pause determination processing is terminated as it is. After executing step S4607, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer area T3 is 0 in step S4608. When negative determination is made in step S4608, this game pause determination processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4602, that is, if the pause timer flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204, it is determined in step S4609 whether or not the game ball has been shot. That is, in step S4609, it is determined whether or not the shooting operation of the game ball is restarted after it is determined in step S4603 that the shooting of the game ball has been stopped. Note that this process is performed in the same manner as in step S4603.

If the determination in step S4609 is affirmative, in step S4610, the pause timer flag stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 is erased, and then this game pause determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4609, the flow advances to step S4608 to determine whether or not the value of the third timer area T3 is 0.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4608, that is, if the firing stop state continues for 10.0 seconds, it is determined that the game is paused. In this case, at step S4611, a game pause flag is set in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. FIG. Also, in step S4611, the pause timer flag stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 is erased. After execution of step S4611, this game pause determination process is terminated.

Thus, in this modification, it is determined that the game is paused when the firing stop state continues for 10.0 seconds. Since the shooting of the game ball is indispensable for the progress of the game, this configuration makes it easy to properly determine the game pause. At that time, it is configured to determine the game pause in consideration of the fluctuation situation of the special figure game times and the storage status of the special figure reservation information. As a result, it becomes easier to more appropriately determine whether the game is to be paused.

That is, if the reach effect etc. is performed in the special figure game round, the player may be staring at it and release the hand from the firing handle 54, and if there is special figure reservation information, in the future In addition to meaning that the game continues, there is also the possibility that depending on the number of holdings, it is just refraining from firing operations. In this modification, if the special figure game round is displayed in a variable display or if the special figure reservation information is stored, it is considered that the game is in progress even if the shooting of the game ball is stopped. It is possible to improve the accuracy of judgment and suppress erroneous judgment as compared with the case where only whether or not the game ball is being shot is used as the judgment material.

If the determination in step S4601 is affirmative, that is, if the game pause flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204, it is determined in step S4613 whether or not the game ball has been shot. That is, in step S4613, it is determined whether or not the shooting operation of the game ball has been resumed after determining that the game is paused in step S4608. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4613, the game pause flag stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 is erased, and the game pause determination state is canceled.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4613, in step S4615, whether the general pattern game round has ended (the confirmation display of the general pattern game round has ended) and the number of reservations FN of the general pattern is 0 judge. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4615, the process proceeds to step S4614, the game pause flag stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 is erased, and the game pause determination state is canceled. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4615, this game pause determination process is terminated as it is, and the determination state indicating that the game is paused is continued.

<Setting processing of normal map confirmation display time>
FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing the process of setting the normal pattern confirmation display time in this modification. This processing is performed in place of the processing for setting the normal pattern fixed display time in FIG. 61 according to the second embodiment, and is executed at the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern game cycle. The setting process of the normal pattern decision display time in this modification differs from the normal pattern decision display time setting process in the second embodiment in that the process of step S4702 is added.

In the setting process of normal figure fixed display time, first, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined in step S4702 whether or not a game pause flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. If the affirmative determination is made in step S4702, the process proceeds to step S4703, and 250 (equivalent to 0.5 sec) is set in the general pattern fluctuation display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, and the normal pattern fixed display time end the setting process. As a result, the fixed display time is set to 0.5 sec when it is determined that the game is paused.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4702, proceed to step S4704, and determine whether or not the success/failure determination result of the normal game round is the first high winning support state open result (open result B) do. If the determination in step S4704 is affirmative, the processes of steps S4705 and S4706 are executed, and if the determination in step S4704 is negative, the process of step S4707 is executed. The processing of steps S4705-S4707 is the same as the processing of steps S3703-S3705 in FIG. After execution of steps S4706 and S4707, the setting process of the normal figure fixed display time ends. Also, if the determination in step S4701 is negative, that is, if the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S4703 to set the fixed display time to 0.5 sec, and then the normal figure fixed display time end the setting process.

<About the game flow>
Next, the flow of the game when the support mode is the low frequency support mode (mainly the transition state of the fixed display time of the normal game round) will be described with reference to FIG. 72 . Here, it is assumed that the results of the winning lottery of the normal game times are all out of the results.

At timing t91, when the game pause flag is turned off, i.e., when the variable display of the regular game round A is started in a state in which it is determined that the game is in progress, the fixed display of the game round A is started. is set to 16.0 sec. After the start of the confirmation display, at timing t92, when it is determined that the game pause flag is ON, that is, the game is in the game pause state, at timing t93, which is the time when the game round B, which is the next normal game round, starts to fluctuate. , the fixed display time of the game round B is set to 0.5 sec. That is, the confirmation display time is shortened, and the start timing (timing t95) of the game round C, which is the next normal game round, is advanced. As a result, in the state where the game is paused, it is possible to know the result of the general pattern success or failure lottery (loss result) in the game round C earlier than when the game is in progress.

When the player restarts the game by shooting the game ball at the timing t94 during the variable display of the game round B, the game pause flag is turned off, and the determination state indicating that the game is paused is released. Along with this, the fixed display time of game round C is set to 16.0 sec at the time when the fluctuation of game round C is started (timing t95). That is, the fixed display time returns to the time on the longer side, and is changed to the fixed display time suitable for the low-frequency support mode. As a result, it is possible to suppress the act of intentionally trying to shorten the game time of the normal game round while there is no intention to end the game.

According to this modified example described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

It is determined whether or not the player is pausing the game, and when it is determined that the game is pausing, the determination display time of the normal pattern game cycle is shortened. Thus, even when the reservation information of the normal pattern is stored at the end of the special pattern game, the result of the normal pattern success or failure lottery and the release type of the electric accessary 34 can be quickly notified to the player.

In addition, the following effects can be expected from the configuration described above. For example, if the normal pattern game cycle continues for a long time after the game is over, when the next player tries to play the pachinko machine 10, the normal pattern hold information generated by the previous player remains. Or, it can happen that a normal game round is being held. In this case, it becomes difficult for the next player to determine whether the previous player, who has been playing until then, has finished playing the game or is still playing, resulting in confusion as to whether the game should be started. obtain. In this regard, according to the present modification, after the player who has been playing until then ends the game and leaves, the remaining pending information is quickly digested. For this reason, when the next player tries to start the game, it is suppressed that the reservation information remains or the normal game round is performed. This makes it easier for the next player to start the game, improving the playability.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, when a predetermined abnormality occurs, the length of the fixed display time is changed. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing error handling processing in this embodiment. This process is started by the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 msec).

In step S4801, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is open. In addition, the inner frame 13 is provided with a front door open switch for detecting that the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13 . The front door opening switch is connected to the main controller 81, and the main controller 81 can determine that the front door frame 14 is opened by determining the detection signal from the front door opening switch. (For example, if the detection signal is a HI signal, it is determined that the front door frame 14 is open, and if the detection signal is a LOW signal, it is determined that it is closed). If it is determined that the front door frame 14 is open, the door open notification process is executed in step S4802. In the notification processing, processing for displaying on the display screen 41a that the front door frame 14 has been opened and for emitting a warning sound from the speaker section 64 is performed. In addition, in this embodiment, the game is not stopped even if the front door frame 14 is opened, and the game can be continued.

After the processing of step S4802 is performed, it is determined in step S4803 whether or not the current processing timing is the timing during execution of the game round and before the final display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4803, a value obtained by adding 1 to the current common pending number CRN is set in an error counter EK provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S4804. The error counter EK is a counter for the MPU 202 to ascertain the number of pending information held and stored when a predetermined error occurs in playing a game. For example, if the current common reservation number CRN is "3", "4" is input to the error counter EK, and if the common reservation number CRN is "8", "9" is input to the error counter EK.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S4803 is negative, in step S4805, a process of setting the current common pending number CRN to the error counter EK is executed. For example, if the common reservation number CRN is "3", "3" is input to the error counter EK. ”.

If it is determined in step S4801 that the front door frame 14 is not opened, the process proceeds to step S4806. In step S4806, it is determined whether or not the lower tray 72 is full. In addition, at a downstream position of the passage for discharging game balls to the lower tray 72, a lower tray full switch for detecting that the game balls discharged to the lower tray 72 are full (filled) is provided. . The lower tray full switch is connected to a main controller 81, and the main controller 81 determines whether or not the lower tray 72 is full by determining a detection signal from the lower tray full switch. (For example, if the detection signal is a HI signal, it is determined that the lower tray is full, and if the detection signal is a LOW signal, it is determined that the lower tray is not full). If it is determined that the lower tray is full, processing for notifying that the lower tray is full is executed in step S4807. In the notification processing, the display screen 41a indicates that the lower tray is full, and processing is performed to emit a warning sound from the speaker unit 64, so that game balls on the lower tray 72 are placed in a so-called dollar box. instruct to move. In addition, in the present embodiment, the game is not stopped even when the bottom tray is full, and the game can be continued.

After that, in steps S4803 to S4805, processing for setting a value in the error counter EK is performed.

If it is determined in step S4806 that the lower tray is not full, it is determined in step S4808 whether ball clogging has occurred. Ball clogging is a phenomenon in which game balls are clogged in passages or mechanisms through which game balls pass, such as the payout motor of the payout device 96, the payout passage, or the discharge passage from the game area PE. Whether or not the balls are clogged is determined, for example, when the payout motor malfunctions or when the number of payouts (the number of game balls paid out from the payout device 96) is different from the number of payout instructions (the number of prize balls, etc.). Various detection switches connected to the main controller 81 detect and determine. If ball clogging has occurred, a ball clogging notification process is executed in step S4809. In the notification processing, processing for displaying the clogged ball state on the display screen 41a and emitting a warning sound from the speaker unit 64 is performed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the game is not stopped even if a jam occurs, and the game can be continued.

After that, in steps S4803 to S4805, processing for setting a value in the error counter EK is performed.

After executing the process of step S4804 or step S4805, or if a negative determination is made in step S4808, other handling processes are performed in step S4810, and then the error handling process ends. In step S4810, for example, when an error (abnormality) requiring the game to be stopped occurs, a process for forcibly stopping the game is performed, or a notification process corresponding to the forced stop is performed. An error that should stop the game is, for example, a case where an abnormality such as magnetism, radio waves, or vibration is detected by an abnormality detection switch connected to the main control device 81 .

In the stop start time processing in this embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. judge. If the value of the error counter EK is 0, the process advances to step S1201 to set the first fixed display time according to the suspension notice.

If the error counter EK is not 0 but is 1 or more, a process of subtracting 1 from the error counter EK is executed in step S4902. In the following step S4903, the first fixed display time of the game round currently being executed is set to a time longer than the first fixed display time (0.2 sec or 1.5 sec) set in the processing after step S1201. A process for setting a certain 5 sec is performed. Then, in step S4904, the process for starting the first confirmation display is performed, and then the main stop start time process ends.

In the stop start processing on the notification/production control device 82 side, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. , determines whether or not the first fixed display time of the current game round is 1.5 sec. If it is 1.5 sec, a process for setting a pending notice effect is executed in step S5003. The processing in steps S5001 to S5003 is the same as the processing in steps S1601 to S1603 described above. If it is determined in step S5002 that the first fixed display time is not 1.5 sec, the process advances to step S5004 to determine whether or not the first fixed display time of the current game round is 5.0 sec. A case of 5.0 sec means a case where it is determined that the value of the error counter EK is not 0 in the stop start process of the main controller 81 side. In this case, in step S5005, setting processing of the delay effect is executed. In the delay effect setting processing, the display control device 101 and the like are controlled so as to perform a delay effect for notifying that the first fixed display time of the current game round is longer than usual.

For example, as shown in FIG. 76(a), it is assumed that the error counter EK is set while the number of game rounds is being displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 76(b), when the variable display of the current round of the game ends, as shown in FIG. 76(c), the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are simply stopped and the results are reported. In addition, a delayed telop UP of "slowly digesting" is displayed to indicate that the start of the next game cycle is delayed at a position (for example, above and below) that does not overlap the variable display area ME on the display screen 41a. .

After the processing in step S5003 or step S5005 is executed, or if it is determined in step S5004 that the time is not 5.0 sec (when it is 0.2 sec), processing for starting fixed display is executed in step S5006. The processing in step S5006 is the same as the processing in step S1604. After executing the process of step S5006, this stop start process is terminated.

A game flow when a value is set in the error counter EK will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

The variable display of game rounds started at timing t1 ends at timing t2, and a fixed display time of 0.7 sec (first fixed display time of 0.2 sec and second fixed display time of 0.5 sec) is set. In this case, at timing t3, the fixed display time elapses and the next game round is started. It is assumed that, for example, the front door frame 14 is opened and the error counter EK is set at timing t4, which is timing during the variable display of game rounds started at timing t3 (timing before fixed display). In this case, since the common pending number CRN is 1 (see FIG. 77(c)), 2 is set in the error counter EK. Then, at timing t5, when the variable display of the current game round ends and the fixed display time is set, the first fixed display time is set to 5.0 sec, and then the second fixed display time is set to 0. .5 sec. In this case, since the error counter EK is decremented by 1, it is updated from 2 set at the timing t4 to 1. Further, the front door frame 14 is closed at timing t6 during the fixed display time of the current game round.

When the next game cycle starts at timing t7, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by 1 and becomes 0. Then, when the variable display of the game cycle ends at timing t8, the first fixed display time is set to 5.0 sec. In this case, the error counter EK is set to 0 by subtracting 1 from it.

For example, when the pending information is acquired during the first fixed display time set at timing t8, a new game cycle is started at timing t9, which is the end timing of the current fixed display time. However, since the error counter EK is 0 in this game round, the normal 0.2 sec is set when the first fixed display time is set at timing t10.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Since it is configured to extend the length of the fixed display time based on the occurrence of a predetermined error, for example, the manager of the game hall or the like deals with the error, so that the result of the game round cannot be overlooked. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such an event as

The target of the predetermined error is an event that continues the progress of the game, for example, the opening of the front door frame 14, the occurrence of the lower tray full state, or the occurrence of a ball clogging. For example, in the event of an error that detects magnetism, radio waves, vibration, etc., the game is stopped. As a result, it is possible to make the progress of the game smoother than in a configuration in which the game is uniformly stopped based on the occurrence of an error.

The fixed display time is extended for unannounced pending information remaining when an error occurs. It is conceivable to extend the confirmation display time by a predetermined number of times based on the occurrence of an error. After that, when the game is played, the fixed display time is extended. can occur. Therefore, by adopting the configuration described above, it is possible to take measures in line with the actual situation when an error occurs.

In the above embodiment as well, since the setting of the confirmation display time is performed after the start of the game round and at the start of the confirmation display time, it is expected that the result notification of the game round being executed when an error occurs will also have the effect of suppressing overlookedness. be able to.

For example, as a configuration for reducing the progress speed of the game when an error occurs, a configuration for extending the variable display time is also conceivable. However, in this case, along with the extension of the variable display time, it is necessary to change the effect (variable display pattern of symbols) for the game cycle performed on the display screen 41a and the like. As a result, even though it is desirable to reduce the processing load of other processes as much as possible in order to perform error resolution processing, etc., in the event of an error, the processing load will instead increase. . In that respect, if the fixed display time is extended as described above, the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped, and only the stopped time is extended. It is possible to reduce the progress speed of the game without changing the effect (variation display pattern of symbols).

<Modification of Third Embodiment>
In this modified example, the timing of canceling the extension of the fixed display time based on the occurrence of an error is different. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing error handling processing in this modified example.

In this modification, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened in step S5101. Such processing is similar to that of step S4801 described above. If the front door frame 14 is open, in step S5102, the same door open notification processing as in step S4802 is executed. Then, in step S5103, a process of setting an error flag in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 is executed. The error flag is a flag for the MPU 202 to determine whether or not to extend the first fixed display time, is set when an error occurs, and is cleared when the error is cleared.

If a negative determination is made in step S5101, it is determined in step S5104 whether or not the lower tray is full in the same manner as in step S4806. If the lower tray is full, in step S5105, the lower tray full notification process is executed in the same manner as in step S4809. After that, an error flag is set in step S5103.

If a negative determination is made in step S5104, it is determined in step S5106 whether ball clogging has occurred in the same manner as in step S4808. If ball clogging has occurred, in step S5107, similarly to step S4809, a ball clogging notification process is executed. After that, an error flag is set in step S5103.

After executing the process of step S5103, or if a negative determination is made in step S5106, other handling processes are executed in step S5108, and then this error handling process ends. The processing of step S5108 is the same as the processing of step S4810.

In the stop start process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 79, it is determined in step S5201 whether or not the error flag is set. If the error flag is not set, the process advances to step S1201 to set the first fixed display time according to the suspension notice.

If the error flag is set, in step S5202, the first fixed display time of the game round currently being executed is set to the first fixed display time (0. 5 sec, which is longer than 2 sec or 1.5 sec), is set. Then, in step S5203, the processing for starting the first confirmation display is performed, and then the processing at the time of stopping is ended.

In this case, in the stop start process of the notification/effect control device 82 side, the process of setting the delay effect is performed on the condition that 5 sec is set as the first fixed display time. As a result, after the variable display in the game cycle ends, a delayed telop UP (FIG. 76(c)) is displayed as a delayed effect in the fixed display.

The error elimination process for erasing the error flag will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S5301, it is determined whether an error flag is set. If it is not set, the cancellation processing is terminated. If it is set, the process advances to step S5302. Steps S5302 to S5304 are processing for determining whether or not the error has been resolved. That is, in step S5302, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is open. Also, in step S5303, it is determined whether or not the bottom tray is full, and if the bottom tray is full, it is determined that the error has not been resolved, and this resolution processing ends. Then, in step S5304, it is determined whether or not clogging of balls has occurred.

If it is determined that the error has been resolved in each process of steps S5302 to S5304, the process advances to step S5305. In step S5305, it is determined by a touch sensor or the like installed on the firing handle 54 whether or not the firing handle 54 is being operated. If the operation is not performed, it is assumed that the player is not ready to start the game, and the canceling process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the firing handle 54 is being operated, then in step S5306 the error flag is erased, and then this resolution process is terminated.

As in this modification, if the fixed display time is not extended based on the occurrence of an error on the condition that the player is ready to start the game, even if the game is restarted after the error occurs, Regardless, it is possible to solve the inconvenience that the fixed display time is extended for a while.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the fixed display time is extended based on the player's operation. FIG. 81(a) is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment.

In this embodiment, an operation button 77 is provided on the front surface of the game machine as an operation unit operated by the player. When the operation button 77 is operated, an operation detection switch (not shown) incorporated in the operation button 77 detects the operation, and a detection signal is output to the main controller 81 . The main controller 81 determines whether or not the operation button 77 is operated based on the detection signal from the operation detection switch.

FIG. 81(b) is a flow chart showing operation corresponding processing for determining whether the operation button 77 has been operated. The operation response process is started by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 msec).

In step S5401, it is determined whether or not the operation button 77 has been operated. If no operation has been performed, the operation corresponding processing is terminated. If it has been operated, the process advances to step S5402 to determine whether an operation flag is set in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 or not. If the operation flag is not set, the operation flag is set in step S5403, and then the operation handling process is terminated. If the operation flag is set, the operation flag is cleared in step S5404, and then the operation handling process is terminated. That is, each time the operation button 77 is operated, the operation flag is switched between the set state and the unset state.

FIG. 82(a) is a flow chart showing processing at the start of stopping in the present embodiment.

In step S5501, it is determined whether or not the operation flag is set, and if not set, the process advances to step S1201. If it is set, the process proceeds to step S5502, and the current first fixed display time is longer than the shortest variable display time of one game round and within the longest variable display time. 0 sec is set. Then, in step S5503, the process for starting the first confirmation display is performed, and then the main stop start time process ends.

In the stop start processing in this embodiment, it is determined in step S5004 in FIG. 75 whether or not the first fixed display time is 30.0 sec. If the time is 30.0 sec, that is, if the variable display of the game cycle ends while the operation button 77 is being operated, a delay effect is set in step S5005. In the delay effect in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 82(b), the start of the next game cycle is delayed at a position (for example, up and down) that does not overlap the variable display area ME on the display screen 41a. A resting telop QP of "toilet resting" is displayed to indicate that.

By doing so, it is possible to change the speed of the progress of the game based on the decision of the player. In this case, it is possible to change the speed of the game progress without changing the performance pattern by changing the fixed display time instead of the variable display time. Therefore, convenience can be improved with a simple configuration.

Here, when a player wants to stop the progress of the game, conventionally, it is necessary to wait for the consumption of the stored pending information. There was an inconvenience that it would take a long time. In particular, in the pachinko machine 10, in the normal game state, the holding information for the first ball-entering section 33d and the holding information for the second ball-entering section 33e can be obtained up to the upper limit number (four pieces). , Hold information of one ball-entering section is easily acquired up to the upper limit, while holding information of the other ball-entering section is difficult to be acquired up to the upper limit (difficult to enter). There can be many scenes where it is done. Therefore, even if the player wants to stop the progress of the game, there are many situations in which it is not possible to stop the game immediately. In that respect, if it is possible to delay the progress of the game based on the operation of the player as in the above configuration, even if a large amount of pending information is stored, a fixed display time that is set longer can be used. It becomes possible to finish the use.

Also, for example, if the player first grasps that an effect with a high degree of expectation for a big hit will occur by a look-ahead notification (reservation notice) based on the stored reservation information, the player's As a feeling, it is thought that there is also a desire to prepare drinks and invite friends in order to fully enjoy the game round in which the performance with high expectations for the big win is performed. In that respect, according to the above configuration, in such a situation, if the digestion speed is slowed down, it is possible to fully enjoy the game round in which the expectation of the big win is likely to occur. It is possible to prepare for

While the digestion speed is slowed down, the configuration is such that the progress of the game is not stopped. As a result, for example, when the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, even if the player deliberately leaves the pending information that has not been digested and then performs an operation to slow down the digestion speed, the unfinished The pending information for digestion will be digested. Therefore, there is no inconvenience that the subsequent player cannot play the game due to the undigested hold information remaining forever after leaving the seat.

<Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
In this modification, based on the player's operation, the effect pattern of the big win game round is reproduced during the fixed display time. FIG. 83(a) is a flow chart showing the stop start process in this modified example.

In step S5601, it is determined whether or not the operation flag is set. If the operation flag is not set, the process advances to step S1201. If the operation flag is set, the process advances to step S5602 to determine whether or not the current game round is a game round that results in a big win. If it is a game cycle that does not result in a big hit, the process proceeds to step S5603, and the current first fixed display time is set to 0.2 sec, which is the same as the normal time. If the game round results in a big win, the process proceeds to step S5604 to specify the length of the variable display time of the current game round and set the specified variable display time as the current first fixed display time. conduct. For example, if the current game round is a game round in which the variable display time is set to 30 seconds, the first fixed display time is set to 30 seconds, and if the variable display time is set to 90 seconds, , the current first confirmation display time is set to 90 seconds. After executing the process of step S5603 or step S5604, the process of starting the first fixed display is executed in step S5605, and then the stop start time process is ended.

On the notification/effect control device 82 side, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 84, in the stop start process, the same processes as steps S5001 to S5003 are executed in steps S5701 to S5703. If a negative determination is made in step S5703, and it is determined that the current first fixed display time is not 1.5 sec, then in step S5704, the variable display time of the current game round is set as the current first fixed display time. Determine whether or not When the variable display time is set, in step S5705, a process of setting the effect pattern of the current game round as the effect pattern during the first fixed display time of this time is executed.

After the processing of step S5703 or step S5705 is executed, or after a negative determination is made in step S5704, processing for starting fixed display is executed in step S5706, and then the stop start processing ends.

By doing so, as shown in FIG. 83(b), the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 41a. Utilizing one fixed display time, the performance pattern from the start of variation to the stop of the current game round is reproduced. As a result, for example, even if you miss the premium pattern effect that occurs only in the game round where the result of the big win is announced, you will be given the opportunity to take a closer look at the effect, so you can fully enjoy the effect. It is possible to entertain.

In this case, since the game rounds in which the production patterns are reproduced are limited to the game rounds that result in a big win, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of reproducing the production of the game rounds despite the fact that the result is a failure. It's becoming

Further, by doing so, after the result of the big win is announced, the start of the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the big win is delayed more than usual. As a result, it is possible to secure a period of preparation for the opening/closing execution mode, such as preparing a dollar box for receiving game balls, after the result of the big win is reported, for example.

On the other hand, if the reproduction of the above effects occurs, for example, during a series of games, or for a player who has a limited playing time, the reproduction of the above effects may be annoying. Therefore, based on the player's operation, the reproduction of the effect is generated (the operation flag is set) or the reproduction of the effect is not performed (the operation flag is erased). It is possible to respond flexibly to various needs.

In the above modified example, the effect pattern of the game round resulting in the big win is reproduced during the first fixed display time, but the game time in which the effect pattern is reproduced is not limited to this. For example, an effect pattern of a game round in which a variable display time corresponding to occurrence of a predetermined reach is set may be reproduced during the first fixed display time.

Further, in the modified example, the effect pattern of the current game round is reproduced during the first fixed display time, but the reproduced game round is not limited to the current game round. For example, based on the fact that a game round with a predetermined result (jackpot result) is specified by the look-ahead notification (holding notice), during the first fixed display time of the game round before the game round with the predetermined result, A configuration may be adopted in which the effect pattern of the game round that results in the predetermined result is reproduced. For example, when a game round that results in a big hit is specified, it may be performed during the game round that will result in a big hit during the first fixed display time in the game round that is completed immediately before that game round. It is configured to reproduce the production pattern. As a result, the performance pattern that is performed in the game round that results in the big win is repeatedly performed, and as a result, it is possible to cause the same phenomenon as in the above modification.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the fact that the result will be a big win is reported earlier than usual. FIG. 85 is a front view of the game board 124 in this embodiment. It should be noted that components similar to those of the game board 24 in each of the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the positions and configurations of the operation openings that serve as triggers for judging whether or not to execute the opening/closing execution mode are different. Therefore, first, the game area PE on the game board 124 in the present embodiment will be described.

A variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PE. Due to the peripheral portion of the variable display unit 36 protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, a plurality of areas where game balls can flow down are divided.

Specifically, in the game area PE, an upper area PE1 that is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36, and a lower area that is continuous with the upper area PE1 and is higher than the variable display unit 36. A left area PE2 which is an area on the left, a right area PE3 which is an area continuous below the upper area PE1 and to the right of the variable display unit 36, and a left area PE2 and a right area PE3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower area PE4 which is an area below the variable display unit 36 continuously below it.

As the first shooting operation, the player rotates the shooting handle 54 with a rotation operation amount in a first range that is equal to or more than the predetermined rotation amount and is less than the reference rotation amount. A game ball begins to flow down on the left side of the central position. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of upper area PE1→left area PE2→lower area PE4. On the other hand, as a second shooting operation, the player rotates the shooting handle 54 with a rotation operation amount in the second range that is equal to or larger than the reference rotation amount. A game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of upper area PE1→right area PE3→lower area PE4. In other words, the player can adjust the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 54 so that the game ball flows down the left side area PE2 of the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3, and the game ball can flow down the right side area PE3. A game can be played so that the game ball flows down.

It should be noted that the reference rotation amount is the amount of rotation at which the ratio of the game ball flowing down the left area PE2 and the ratio of the game ball flowing down the right area PE3 are the same. With respect to the amount, the proportion of game balls flowing down the left region PE2 increases, and with the amount of rotation operation in the second range, the proportion of game balls flowing down the right region PE3 increases. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball may flow down the right region PE3 at a rotation operation amount close to the reference rotation amount in the rotation operation amount in the first range, and the rotation operation amount in the second range is close to the reference rotation amount. With the amount of rotation operation, there is a possibility that the game ball will flow down the left region PE2.

In the present embodiment, a first working port 133 corresponding to the first ball entering portion 33d is provided in the lower region PE4 as the working port. The first operating port 133 is a ball entry portion that is opened upward, and when a game ball flowing down the game area PE enters the first operating port 133, the hold information for the first ball entry portion 33d is displayed. It is acquired and a decision is made.

The first operating port 133 is not provided with a member for opening and closing. And, in the situation where the game ball is shot in the same mode, the winning probability to the first operation opening 133 is constant regardless of the game state. Also, the first actuation opening 133 is arranged directly below the stage formed in the variable display unit 36, and the game ball that has flowed onto the stage through the guide passage formed in the variable display unit 36 is located on the stage. A game ball ejected from the center to the outside of the variable display unit 36 easily enters the first operating port 133 .

Here, by providing the first operation port 133 in the lower region PE4 as described above, when the shooting handle 54 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left region PE2 and the right region PE3 Winning to the first operating port 133 is possible in any case where the shooting handle 54 is operated so that the game ball flows down. However, since the entrance of the guide passage to the stage is provided for the left side area PE2 and not provided for the right side area PE3, when the flow down the left side area PE2 flows down the right side area PE3, Winning to the first actuation opening 133 is more likely to occur than that. Also, the arrangement of the game parts and the nails 38 in the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3 is such that the winning to the first operation opening 133 is more likely to occur when flowing down the left side area PE2 than when flowing down the right side area PE3. is set to And, the game ball that has flown down the right side area PE3 hardly enters the first operation opening 133 .

Further, in the present embodiment, a second working port 134 corresponding to the second ball entry portion 33e is provided in the right region PE3 as the working port. That is, the second operation port 134 cannot win a prize when the shooting handle 54 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PE2, and the shooting handle 54 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side area PE3. Winning is possible when is operated.

The configuration of the second operating port 134 will be described with reference to FIG. 86(a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing the configuration of the second operation port 134. FIG. The second operating port 134 is provided with an electric accessory 134a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The electric accessory 134a corresponds to the electric accessory 34 in each of the above embodiments.

In other words, the electric accessory 134a is connected to the drive unit 134b mounted on the back side of the game board 124, and is driven by the drive unit 34b to open the closed state shown in FIG. 86(a) and the closed state shown in FIG. placed in one of the open states shown. When the electric accessory 134a is closed, the game ball cannot enter the second operation port 134, and when the electric accessory 134a is opened, the second operation port 134 can be won. Incidentally, in the open state, the electric accessary 134a protrudes toward the game area PE to guide the winning of the second operation opening 134. FIG.

The electric accessary 134a is switched between a state in which the game ball to the second operation port 134 is likely to win, and a state in which it is not impossible to win but is less likely to win than the state in which the winning is likely to occur. It may be configured to be Alternatively, the electric accessory 134a may move or rotate in the front-back direction to switch between a state in which winning is likely to occur and a state in which winning is less likely to occur. Alternatively, the electric accessory 134a may be defective, and switching between a state in which winning is likely to occur and a state in which winning is less likely to occur may be performed by displacement of the second operating port 134 itself.

In the present embodiment as well, a plurality of support modes in which the form of support by the electric accessory 134a is different is provided. A low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set to be high and low.

Here, since the second operating port 134 is provided in the right region PE3, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the shooting handle 54 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right region PE3. When the shooting handle 54 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PE2, the frequency of winning the first operation opening 133 or the second operation opening 134 increases, and the winning judgment is made. increase in frequency. In other words, in the high-frequency support mode, it is more advantageous for the player to flow down the right side area PE3 than to flow down the left side area PE2. On the other hand, in the low-frequency support mode, it is almost impossible to expect to win a prize in the second operation port 134, so the left side of the shooting handle 54 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side area PE3. Also when the shooting handle 54 is operated so that the game ball flows down the area PE2, the winning frequency to the first operation opening 133 or the second operation opening 134 is increased, and the frequency of winning/failure determination is improved. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, it is more advantageous for the player to make the left side area PE2 flow down than to make the right side area PE3 flow down.

The opening/closing execution mode in the present embodiment is executed by the variable winning device 132 provided in the lower area PE4. And, in the present embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the predetermined area in the variable winning device 132 during the opening and closing execution mode, the success or failure lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode is set to the high probability mode. When the success/failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode, the high probability mode continues until a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) of games are played.

The variable winning device 132 will be described with reference to FIG. 87(a) is a longitudinal sectional view of the variable winning device 132 as seen from the side, and FIG. 87(b) is a longitudinal sectional view of the variable winning device 132 as seen from the rear side.

As shown in FIG. 87(a), the variable winning device 132 is formed with a distribution entrance 371 that is open in the front-rear direction and is large enough for game balls to pass through. A distribution member 352 is provided for switching between a closed state in which passage is impossible and an open state in which game balls can pass. The distribution member 352 is opened by being driven through a link mechanism (not shown) by the driving section 353 for the distribution entrance. The sorting entrance 371 constitutes the entrance of the guide passage 354, and the game balls flowing in from the sorting entrance 371 flow down the guide passage 354 to the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 87(b), the guide passage 354 is bifurcated from its midway position, and constitutes one of an upstream region 355 forming the upstream side of the branching position and a downstream region of the branching position. V winning area (or useful area) 356, and discharge area (or unused area) 357 constituting the other on the downstream side of the branch position. In addition, at the branch position, a shutter 358 is provided as a distribution means for distributing game balls that have reached the branch position from the upstream region 355 to either the V winning region 356 or the discharge region 357 . When the shutter 358 is not driven by the shutter driving section 359, the game ball that has reached the branch position flows into the discharge area 357. When the shutter 358 is driven by the shutter driving section 359, The game ball that has reached the branch position flows into the V winning area 356 .

A detection sensor 372 for counting is provided so that the detection area exists at a position through which game balls that have flowed into the upstream area 355 always pass. When the game ball is detected by the detection sensor 372 for counting, the payout of the prize balls corresponding to the winning to the variable prize winning device 132 is executed. In addition, a detection sensor 373 for V winning is provided so that the detection area exists at a position through which the game ball that has flowed into the V winning area 356 always passes. Based on the detection of the game ball by the detection sensor 373 for V winning, the success/failure lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is set to a predetermined lottery mode. More specifically, when a game ball is detected by the detection sensor 373 for V winning during the opening/closing execution mode, the winning/failure lottery mode is set to a high probability mode with a winning probability higher than normal after the opening/closing execution mode.

Further, a detection sensor 374 for ejection is provided so that the detection area exists at a position through which the game ball that has flowed into the area 357 for ejection always passes. Based on the detection results from the detection sensor 374 for discharge and the detection sensor 373 for V winning, it is determined whether or not the game ball remains in the variable winning device 132 .

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the probability that the game ball that has won the variable winning device 132 is guided to the V winning area 356 differs depending on the type of the jackpot result (depending on the type of opening/closing execution mode). . However, the drive timing of the drive unit 359 for the shutter is constant regardless of the type of the jackpot result (regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode). The probability of being guided to the V winning area 356 varies depending on the opening/closing timing of the distribution member 352, so that the variable winning device 132 wins at the timing when the game ball is easily guided to the V winning area 356. A V high-expectation mode opening and closing execution mode in which the distribution member 352 is opened, and a V in which the distribution member 352 is opened so that the variable winning device 132 wins at the timing when the game ball is difficult to be guided to the V winning area 356. A low-expectation opening/closing execution mode is set.

As described above, in each opening/closing execution mode, the driving timing of the shutter driving unit 359 is uniform. 356 , and then switch to a discharge area 357 . In the opening/closing execution mode of the V high expectation mode, the variable winning device 132 can win at the timing when the shutter 358 guides to the V winning area 356. is set so that the first round game is started at . On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode of the V low expectation mode, the predetermined period has passed since the start of the opening/closing execution mode so that the variable winning device 132 cannot win at the timing when the shutter 358 guides to the V winning area 356. It is set so that the first round game is started later and after switching to the mode of guiding to the discharge area 357 .

FIG. 88 shows a distribution table in this embodiment. The distribution table is a table that is referred to when the result of the success/failure determination is a jackpot result, and is used to determine the type of jackpot result.

As shown in FIG. 88(a), allocation for the first ball-entering portion referred to when a big hit result is obtained in the success/failure determination for the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first actuation port 133. Table 88(b), for the second ball entry section to be referred to when a big hit result is obtained in the success/failure determination for the hold information acquired based on the ball entry into the second actuation opening 134. , and , both are set so as to produce either a normal jackpot result or an advantageous jackpot result. However, the ratio between the normal jackpot result and the advantageous jackpot result is set so as to be different, and the distribution table for the second ball-entering section provides more advantageous jackpot results than the distribution table for the first ball-entering section. It is set to be highly probable.

The normal jackpot result is the result that the opening/closing execution mode is implemented as the opening/closing execution mode of the V low expectation mode, and in this opening/closing execution mode, for example, 8 round games are implemented. After the opening/closing execution mode based on the normal jackpot result, the support mode is set to the low-frequency support mode.

The advantageous jackpot result is the result of the opening/closing execution mode being implemented as the opening/closing execution mode of the above-described V high expectation mode, and in this opening/closing execution mode, for example, eight round games are implemented. The support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode based also on the result of the advantageous jackpot. The high-frequency support mode continues for a predetermined number of times (50 times).

As described above, the winning/failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode by guiding the game ball to the V winning area 356 during the opening and closing execution mode, and the high probability mode is set over a predetermined number of times (50 times). to continue. Therefore, based on the advantageous jackpot result, it becomes possible to implement the opening and closing execution mode of 8 rounds, and it is possible to implement the high probability game state, which is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, over 50 times. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot result, although the opening/closing execution mode of 8 rounds can be executed, the game shifts to the normal game state which is the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. Therefore, when a jackpot result is obtained, the degree of advantage for the player greatly differs depending on whether the result is distributed to the advantageous jackpot result or the normal jackpot result.

In the distribution table for the first ball-entering section, the normal jackpot result is distributed with a probability of 50%, and the advantageous jackpot result is distributed with a probability of 50%. On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second ball-entering section, the normal jackpot results are distributed with a probability of about 17%, and the advantageous jackpot results are distributed with a probability of about 83%. Therefore, the distribution table for the second ball-entering section is set to be more advantageous to the player than the distribution table for the first ball-entering section.

As a game flow in the present embodiment, first, a game ball is shot so as to flow down the left side area PE2 in a normal game state, and a prize is generated in the first operation hole 133 . Reservation information for the first ball-entering section is acquired based on the winning to the first operation opening 133, and winning/failure determination is performed based on the reservation information. When a big hit result is obtained in the pertinence/non-applicability determination, the opening/closing execution mode by the variable prize winning device 132 is executed. If the jackpot result is a normal jackpot result, the game ball is not guided to the V winning area 356 during the opening/closing execution mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode returns to the normal game state. It returns to the game aiming at the operation opening 133.

When the jackpot result is an advantageous jackpot result, the game ball is guided to the V winning area 356 during the opening/closing execution mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode, the game state is set to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode. . In the high-probability game state, by playing a game in which the right side area PE3 is caused to flow down to generate a winning prize to the second operation opening 134, the game can be played without reducing the number of balls in possession too much. The high certainty game state ends when 50 game rounds are played. Therefore, in the high-probability game state, a big hit result occurs before the game rounds based on the winning to the second operation port 134 are executed 50 times, and the result of the advantageous big win again becomes 50 times of the game rounds. The high certainty game state is reset and the high certainty game state continues. On the other hand, when the jackpot result is not obtained even after 50 game rounds are performed, or when the jackpot result is obtained on the way but the normal jackpot result is obtained, the game state changes to the normal game state at that point. Transition.

Here, in the high probability game state as described above, when the game state shifts to the normal game state as a result of the normal jackpot, the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode, so the winning to the second operation port 134 is difficult to generate, and it becomes impossible for the player to receive the win/fail lottery (distribution lottery) on the side of the second ball-entering section, which is advantageous for the player. In particular, in the case where the hold information on the second ball entrance side is less than the upper limit and the result is a normal jackpot, the upper limit of the hold information that should be easily reached in the high-frequency support mode is stored. Compared to the case where the normal jackpot result is obtained in the state where the number is set, it means that the winning lottery on the side of the second ball entering section cannot be received by the difference from the upper limit number. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when such an event occurs, a predetermined notification is given.

FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing the effect setting process for big win in the present embodiment. As already explained, this effect setting process is a process (step S1504) that is executed when starting a game turn that results in a big hit in the process for starting fluctuation (FIG. 27) on the notification/effect control device 82 side. .

In step S5801, the current game state is grasped, and it is determined whether or not the game is in a high certainty game state. If it is not in the high certainty game state but in the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S5802, acquires the effect table for normal result notification, and determines the effect pattern of the current game round. In the effect table for normal result notification, according to the set variable display time, a plurality of effect patterns are set in which the jackpot result is notified just before the variable display time elapses (for example, 2 seconds before, the first timing). The present performance pattern is determined by lottery or the like from these plurality of performance patterns. In addition, when determining the effect pattern, the processing result of the stop result determination process for the last big win (step S1503) is also referred to, and the effect pattern corresponding to the stop result to be stopped is determined.

If it is determined in step S5801 that the game is in the high certainty gaming state, the process proceeds to step S5803. In step S5803, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot result is the normal jackpot result. If the result is not the normal jackpot result but the advantageous jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S5802 to determine the effect pattern based on the effect table for notifying the normal result.

If the determination in step S5803 is affirmative, and it is determined that the current game round is a game round that usually results in a big hit during the high certainty game state, the process proceeds to step S5804. That is, the case of proceeding to step S5804 means that the high-probability game state ends in the current game cycle and the normal game state is entered. In this case, in step S5804, a process of grasping the number of holding information on the side of the second ball-entering club is performed. In step S5805, it is determined whether or not the number of pieces of hold information on the side of the second ball-entering section is two or less. If the number is not 2 or less, that is, if there are 3 or 4 pieces of hold information on the second ball entering section side even if the high probability game state ends in the current game round, proceed to step S5802, An effect pattern determination process is performed based on the effect table for normal result notification.

On the other hand, if the number of pending information items on the second ball-entering section side is 2 or less, it is determined in step S5806 whether or not there are 0 items of pending information on the second ball-entering section side. If the number is not 0, but 1 or 2, in step S5808 an effect table for notifying the previous result is acquired to determine the effect pattern of the current game round. In the effect table for notifying the first result, according to the set variable display time, the jackpot result is reported earlier than the variable display time by a first predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds) (at the second timing, the jackpot A plurality of performance patterns for which the result is notified) are set, and the current performance pattern is determined by lottery or the like from these plurality of performance patterns. In addition, when determining the effect pattern, the processing result of the stop result determination process for the last big win (step S1503) is also referred to, and the effect pattern corresponding to the stop result to be stopped is determined.

After performing the processing of step S5807, a high speed flag is set in the RAM 244. FIG. The high-speed flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to specify the timing of notifying the game result in the current game round.

If it is determined in step S5806 that the second ball-entering section has no pending information, then in step S5809 an effect table for immediate result notification is acquired to determine the effect pattern of the current game round. In the effect table for immediate result notification, a plurality of effect patterns are set according to the set variable display time, in which the result of the big win is reported earlier by a second predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds) before the variable display time elapses. The present performance pattern is determined by lottery or the like from these plurality of performance patterns. Comparing the first predetermined period and the second predetermined period, the second predetermined period is set longer than the first predetermined period. That is, the result of the game round is notified earlier in the effect pattern determined in the effect table for immediate result notification than in the effect pattern determined in the effect table for early result notification. In addition, when determining the effect pattern, the processing result of the stop result determination process for the last big win (step S1503) is also referred to, and the effect pattern corresponding to the stop result to be stopped is determined.

After performing the process of step S5809, a super-high speed flag is set in the RAM 244. FIG. The ultra-high speed flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to specify the timing of notifying the game result in the current game round.

After the processing of step S5802, step S5808 or step S5810 is executed, the effect pattern determined by these processes is set as the present effect pattern in step S5811, and then the present effect setting process is terminated. .

Next, the processing for mid-variation according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the variable display control process (FIG. 26) on the notification/production control device 82 side is executed as one process (step S1406).

In the mid-fluctuation process, first, in step S5901, it is determined whether or not it is time to start fluctuation of all symbol rows. Incidentally, the RAM 244 is provided with an elapsed time counter for grasping the elapsed time from the start of the game round. will start updating. The effect pattern determined in the fluctuation start process is associated with the information of the elapsed time counter. By referring to the elapsed time counter, the MPU 242 can specify the execution timing of various effects. can. In step S5901, it is determined whether or not it is the variation start timing from the elapsed time counter and the performance pattern in the game round being executed. In addition, in the following description, the elapsed time counter and the effect pattern are referred to in the process of determining whether or not it is time to execute each effect, as in the process of step S5901.

When it is time to start fluctuation of all symbol rows, high-speed fluctuation start processing of all symbol rows is executed in step S5902. In this processing, the display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in response to the start of the high-speed fluctuation display, and by outputting a command to the display control device 212, the high-speed fluctuation display of all the pattern rows is performed on the pattern display device 41. to start.

After executing the process of step S5902, in the subsequent step S5903, the change start process of the display area KP is executed for the special display area OE. In this process, a command is output to the display control device 212 to start the variable display of the display portion KP in the special display area OE of the pattern display device 41 . At this timing, the variable display on the main display section 43 of the main controller 81 side also starts, and the variable display on the main display section 43 and the display section KP on the special display area OE simultaneously starts. After executing the process of step S5903, the change medium use process ends.

If it is not time to start fluctuation of all symbol rows in step S5901, it is determined in step S5904 whether or not it is time to decelerate the upper symbol row Z1. If it is time to decelerate, the deceleration process for the upper symbol row Z1 is executed in step S5905, and then the mid-variation process is terminated. In the deceleration process, the display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in response to the deceleration of the upper symbol row Z1, and a command is output to the display control device 212, so that the upper symbol row Z1 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. To switch the fluctuation display from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation.

If it is not the deceleration timing for the upper symbol row Z1 in step S5904, it is determined whether or not it is the deceleration timing for the lower symbol row Z3 in step S5906. If it is the deceleration timing, the deceleration process of the lower symbol row Z3 is executed in step S5907, and then the mid-variation process is terminated. In the deceleration process, the display lamp section 63 and the speaker section 64 are controlled in response to the deceleration of the lower symbol row Z3, and a command is output to the display control device 212 so that the lower symbol row Z3 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. To switch the fluctuation display from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation.

If it is not the deceleration timing for the lower symbol row Z3 in step S5906, it is determined in step S5908 whether or not it is the deceleration timing for the middle symbol row Z2. If it is time to decelerate, the deceleration process for the medium symbol row Z2 is executed in step S5909, and then the mid-variation process is terminated. In the deceleration process, the display lamp section 63 and the speaker section 64 are controlled in response to the deceleration of the middle symbol row Z2, and a command is output to the display control device 212, so that the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. To switch the fluctuation display from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the deceleration timing of the middle symbol row Z2 overlaps with the timing at which the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 stop. For example, the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 form a reach line. If so, deceleration processing of the middle symbol row Z2 for reach is performed in step S5909. Such processing will be described later in detail.

If it is not the deceleration timing for the middle symbol row Z2 in step S5908, it is determined in step S5910 whether or not it is the stop timing for the upper symbol row Z1. If it is time to stop, the process for stopping the upper symbol row Z1 is executed in step S5911, and then the mid-fluctuation process is terminated. In the stopping process, the display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in response to the stop of the upper symbol row Z1, and by outputting a command to the display control device 212, the upper symbol row Z1 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Stop the variable display.

If it is not the timing to stop the upper symbol row Z1 in step S5910, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to stop the lower symbol row Z3 in step S5912. If it is time to stop, the process for stopping the lower symbol row Z3 is executed in step S5913, and then the mid-fluctuation process is terminated. In the stop process, the display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in response to the stop of the lower symbol row Z3, and a command is output to the display control device 212 so that the lower symbol row Z3 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Stop the variable display.

If it is not the timing to stop the lower symbol row Z3 in step S5912, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to stop the middle symbol row Z2 in step S5914. When it is time to stop, the process for stopping the middle symbol row Z2 is executed in step S5915, and then the process for during fluctuation is terminated. In the stopping process, the display lamp section 63 and the speaker section 64 are controlled in response to the stop of the middle symbol row Z2, and a command is output to the display control device 212, so that the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Stop the variable display. The stop processing of the middle symbol row Z2 will be described later in detail.

If it is not the timing to stop the middle symbol row Z2 in step S5914, then in step S5916 various effects processing during fluctuation is executed, and then the during fluctuation processing is terminated. In this processing, the display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled based on the effect pattern set in the process for starting fluctuation, and by outputting a command to the display control device 212, the effect in the pattern display device 41 is performed. let it happen.

Next, the deceleration processing of the middle symbol row Z2 in step S5909 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S6001, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the ready-to-win display. If the ready-to-win display does not occur, the process advances to step S6002 to set the speed of the medium symbol row Z2 during high-speed fluctuation display to medium-speed fluctuation, and then the deceleration process ends.

If it is determined in step S6001 that it is a game cycle in which the ready-to-win display occurs, the process proceeds to step S6003. The process after step S6003 is the process of setting the variable display speed of the middle symbol row Z2, which is the final variable symbol row, to any one of low speed variation, high speed variation and super high speed variation in this ready-to-win display.

That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92, after the ready-to-win display is generated by the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 (FIG. 92(a)), the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol row Z2 as the final fluctuation symbol row 92(b), a high-speed variation shown in FIG. 92(c), and an ultra-high-speed variation shown in FIG. 92(d). The fluctuation speed is set so that the high-speed fluctuation is faster than the low-speed fluctuation, and the ultra-high-speed fluctuation is faster than the high-speed fluctuation. Further, the medium-speed fluctuation set when the reach does not occur is set to be faster than the low-speed fluctuation and slower than the high-speed fluctuation. More specifically, the low-speed fluctuation is the speed at which the game advances by 0.5 frames (design) per second, the medium-speed fluctuation is the speed at which the game advances by 1 frame (design) per second, and the high-speed fluctuation is the speed at which the game advances by 5 frames per second. It is the speed that progresses by (symbols), and the ultra-high speed fluctuation is the speed that progresses by 10 frames (symbols) in 1 sec.

If it is determined in step S6001 that reach has occurred, it is determined in step S6003 whether or not the high speed flag is set. As already explained, the high-speed flag is a flag that is set when there are 1 or 2 pieces of hold information on the side of the second ball-entering unit at the start of a game turn that usually results in a big win during a high-probability game state. . If not set, the flow advances to step S6004 to determine whether the super high speed flag is set. As already explained, the super-high speed flag is a flag that is set when the second ball-entering unit side has 0 pieces of hold information at the start of a game turn that usually results in a big win during a high-probability game state. If not set, the flow advances to step S6005 to set the variable display speed of the middle symbol row Z2 to low speed variation, and the deceleration process is terminated.

If it is determined affirmatively in step S6003, and it is a game turn that will result in a normal jackpot result in the high certainty game state, and there are 1 or 2 pieces of hold information on the second ball entering section side, in step S6006, The variable display speed of the middle pattern row Z2 is set to high speed variation. After that, in step S6007, after executing the first correction processing of the stop timing of the middle symbol row Z2, the deceleration processing ends.

As shown in FIG. 93, in this embodiment, of the variable display time before final display in each game cycle, the period during which variable display of each symbol row is performed and the period during which each symbol row is stopped before final display are displayed. The period during which the state (temporary stop, result display, result notification) is maintained is set for each variable display time. For example, in a game cycle in which the variable display time is set to 20 seconds, normally, after the variable display is performed for 18 seconds, the results are displayed for 2 seconds, and then the final display is performed. As already explained, in the temporary stop, at least one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 gently moves back and forth, or at least a part of characters such as octopuses (see FIG. 6) that constitute the main symbols and sub symbols are moving. At first glance, the pattern appears to be stationary, but it is performed so as to maintain an imperfectly stopped state (stationary display). Then, when the period (2 sec) during which the result display as the temporary stop is maintained passes, as the final display, the reciprocating slight movement and the character movement are not performed, and the game is completely stopped.

Further, for example, when the variable display time is 30 seconds in the normal state, the variable display is performed for 28 seconds, the result is displayed for 2 seconds, and then the final display is performed. Further, when the variable display time is 60 seconds, the variable display is performed for 58 seconds, the result is displayed for 2 seconds, and then the final display is performed. In other words, regardless of the length of the variable display time, the result display period during which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are temporarily stopped before the final display is uniformly 2 seconds.

On the other hand, the situation in which the preceding result notification flag or the immediate result notification flag is set, that is, in a game turn that usually results in a big hit during the high certainty gaming state, and when the number of pending information is small, the above The length of the result display that is temporarily stopped before the final display is changed.

That is, in a game round with a variable display time of 20 seconds, when the first result notification flag is set, the period during which the result display is performed is changed (extended) from 2 seconds to 6 seconds, and accordingly, the period during which the variable display is continued is It is changed (shortened) from 18 sec to 14 sec. Also, when the immediate result notification flag is set in a game round whose variable display time is 20 seconds, the period during which the result display is performed is changed (extended) from 2 seconds to 12 seconds, and accordingly, the period during which the variable display is continued is It is changed (shortened) from 18 sec to 8 sec.

In a game round with a variable display time of 30 seconds, when the first result notification flag is set, the period during which the result display is performed is changed (extended) from 2 seconds to 6 seconds, and accordingly the period during which the variable display is continued is changed from 28 seconds. It is changed (shortened) to 24 sec. Also, when the immediate result notification flag is set in a game round whose variable display time is 30 sec, the period during which the result display is performed is changed (extended) from 2 sec to 12 sec, and accordingly the period during which the variable display is continued is It is changed (shortened) from 28 sec to 18 sec.

In a game round with a variable display time of 60 seconds, when the first result notification flag is set, the period during which the result display is performed is changed (extended) from 2 seconds to 6 seconds, and accordingly the period during which the variable display is continued is changed from 58 seconds. It is changed (shortened) to 54 sec. Also, when the immediate result notification flag is set in a game round whose variable display time is 60 seconds, the period during which the result display is performed is changed (extended) from 2 seconds to 12 seconds, and accordingly, the period during which the variable display is continued is It is changed (shortened) from 58 sec to 48 sec.

Returning to the description of the deceleration processing of the middle symbol row Z2 (FIG. 91), in the first correction processing of step S6007, as well as grasping the variable display time of the current game round, , the process of correcting the stop timing so that the middle symbol row Z2 stops before 6 sec (first predetermined period) and the variable display ends.

If it is determined in step S6004 that the super-high speed flag is set, and the game turn that results in a normal jackpot result in the high-accuracy game state is 0, At step S6008, the variable display speed of the medium symbol row Z2 is set to super-high speed variation. After that, in step S6009, the second correction processing of the stop timing of the middle symbol row Z2 is executed, and then the deceleration processing is finished.

In the second correction process of step S6009, the variation display time of the current game round is grasped, and the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped not 2 seconds before the end timing of the variation display time, but 12 sec (second predetermined period). Then, processing is performed to correct the stop timing so that the variable display ends.

Thus, by changing the variable display speed of the middle symbol row Z2 in the ready-to-win display, the middle symbol row Z2 stops up to the final stop position without changing the final stop position of the middle symbol row Z2. You can change the pattern. Here, during the high-probability gaming state, the middle symbol row Z2 moves to the final stop position, and the period from the start of the result display to the start of the finalized display, that is, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is temporary. During the stop period, the expected number of game balls fired aiming at the second operation opening 134 is about 3 game balls fired during the normal 2 sec result display period ( 0.6 sec x 3), of which 0 to 1 can be expected to win, the first result is reported, and about 10 game balls are shot during the 6 sec result display period (0.6 sec x 10 ), three or more prizes can be expected among them, and the expected number of winning balls increases. In addition, during the 12 sec result display period in which the immediate result notification is performed, about 20 game balls are shot (0.6 sec x 20), of which 6 or more can be expected to win prizes, and the expected number of winning balls is further increased. To increase. As a result, the time is ensured for obtaining the hold information on the side of the second ball-entering section after the result notification is performed and the end of the high certainty gaming state is grasped.

By the way, in the present embodiment, in the game rounds in which each ready-to-win display is performed, the time required for the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 to stop and the ready-to-win lines to be formed is the second correction in the immediate result notification. It is set so that the period for displaying the result when processing is performed is secured. For example, when the shortest variable display time for the ready-to-win display is 20 sec, in a game cycle in which the ready-to-win display is performed, it takes until the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 stop and the ready-to-win line is formed. The time is set to be shorter than 6 seconds. Therefore, the inconvenience that the middle symbol row Z2 may stop earlier than the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 by performing the second correction processing as immediate result notification does not occur.

FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing the process of stopping the middle symbol row Z2, which is executed in step S5915 in the mid-variation process. In the mid-variation process, in the determination process of the stop timing of the medium symbol row in step S5914, the stop timing is determined based on the results of the first correction process and the second correction process.

First, in step S6101, a process of stopping the middle symbol row Z2 during fluctuation is performed. After that, in step S6102, as result notification processing, at least one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 gently moves back and forth, or at least part of characters such as an octopus that constitutes the main symbol and sub-symbol moves. I do. That is, the display of the result as temporary stop is started by the processing of steps S6101 and S6102.

In the subsequent step S6103, it is determined whether or not the high speed flag is set. If the high speed flag is set, the high speed flag is erased in step S6104, then the first driving notification is set in step S6105, and the stop processing ends.

As shown in FIG. 95(a), as the first driving notification, if the game cycle ends as it is, the high-frequency support mode ends and the winning lottery (distribution lottery) on the second ball entering section side is performed. A non-advantageous suggestion YB indicating that it will not be accepted. As the non-advantageous suggestion YB, for example, while pointing to the reservation number display area Da to make the player recognize that the number of reservation information is small, the character display "It's bad, it's bad" is displayed. Indicates a disadvantage. In addition, in the first driving notification, the remaining time until the end of the game round, that is, the remaining period until the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode after the game round ends, is displayed over time. Remaining time display ZK is performed. For the remaining time display ZK, for example, in a rectangular image, the color is changed over time from one of the left and right sides, and when the remaining time reaches 0, the color of the entire rectangle changes. Make it easily comprehensible. The non-advantageous suggestion YB and the remaining time display ZK are displayed at positions that do not overlap with the result display (combination of symbols announcing the result of the big win) by each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. As a result, the player will not be able to receive the winning lottery (distribution lottery) on the side of the second ball entry section after the current game round ends, and the remaining time until then. can be clearly understood.

Returning to the description of the stop processing of the middle symbol row Z2, if it is determined in step S6103 that the high speed flag is not set, it is determined in step S6106 whether or not the super high speed flag is set. If the super high speed flag is not set, the stop processing is terminated. If the super high speed flag is set, the super high speed flag is cleared in step S6107. After that, in step S6108, the second driving notification is set, and the stop processing ends.

As the second driving notification, as shown in FIG. 95(b), along with the non-advantageous indication YB and the remaining time display ZK, the low-frequency transition notification DE that explicitly indicates that the high-frequency support mode will end is performed. In the low-frequency transition notification DE, the common name of the high-frequency support mode, ie, "power support" is indicated, and "power support end" is displayed. The low-frequency shift notification DE is also displayed at a position not overlapping with the result display (combination of symbols for notifying the result of the big hit) by each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

In this embodiment, the flow of the game when the first result notification or the immediate result notification is performed will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

When the effect time for performing the variable display of the game round started at timing ta1 elapses at timing ta2, the results of the game round are displayed, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are temporarily stopped. Then, the result display (result notification) ends, and the fixed display is started at timing ta3 when the fluctuation display time from timing ta1 elapses. Then, the fixed display time elapses at timing ta4. In this case, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 fluctuate from the timing ta1 to the timing ta2, but are stopped (temporarily stopped) from the timing ta2 to the timing ta4. On the other hand, the main display section 43 fluctuates from timing ta1 to timing ta3, and stops from timing ta3 to timing ta4.

When the current game round is in a high-probability game state (high-frequency support mode) and the game result is a normal jackpot result, when the opening/closing execution mode is started at timing ta4, the support mode changes to the low-frequency support mode. Transition. When the opening/closing execution mode ends at timing ta5, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the low frequency support mode because the opening/closing execution mode is based on the normal jackpot result as described above. As a result, even if the game ball is launched aiming at the second working hole 134, it does not easily enter the second working hole 134, and instead of the winning lottery on the second ball entering part side, the first ball entering part side (the second ball entering part side) 1 operating port 133 side) need to switch to a game that receives a winning lottery.

In this case, the period from the notification of the result of this game round to the transition from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, that is, the low-frequency support mode after being notified that the transition to the low-frequency support mode is a period from timing ta2 to timing ta4, which is 2 sec (provisional stop period)+0.7 sec (fixed display period) in the present embodiment.

On the other hand, when the current game round is in a high-probability game state and the game result is a normal jackpot result, when the previous result is notified, the game round started at the timing tb1 has an effect time. At timing tb2, result display as a temporary stop is started, and at timing tb3, the variation display time of the current game round elapses. Then, the opening/closing execution mode is started after the confirmation display time from timing tb3 to timing tb4.

In this case, the period from the notification of the result of this game round to the transition from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, that is, the low-frequency support mode after being notified that the transition to the low-frequency support mode is the period from timing tb2 to timing tb4, and timing tb3 and timing tb4 are the same timing as timing ta3 and timing ta4, but timing tb2 is set as timing earlier than timing ta2. there is Therefore, the period from timing tb2 to timing tb4 is 6 sec (temporary stop period) + 0.7 sec (fixed display period) in the present embodiment, which is longer than the period from timing ta2 to timing t4, and low frequency support. A grace period is ensured to allow the player to enter the second operation port 134 after knowing that the mode will be changed.

In the case where the current game round is in a high-probability game state and the game result is a normal jackpot result, when immediate result notification is performed, the game round started at timing tc1 is timed to timing tc2 when the presentation time elapses. , the result display as a temporary stop is started, and the variation display time of the current game round elapses at timing tc3. Then, the opening/closing execution mode is started after the fixed display time from timing tc3 to timing tc4.

In this case, the period from the notification of the result of this game round to the transition from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, that is, the low-frequency support mode after being notified that the transition to the low-frequency support mode is the period from timing tc2 to timing tc4, and although timing tc3 and timing tc4 are the same timings as timings ta3, tb3 and timings ta4, tb4, timing tc2 is earlier than timings ta2, tb2. It is set as an early timing. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the period from timing tc2 to timing tc4 is 12 sec (temporary stop period) + 0.7 sec (final display period), and the period from timing ta2 to timing t4 and the period from timing tb2 to timing tb4 Longer than the period, the grace period for winning the second operation port 134 after knowing that the mode will be shifted to the low-frequency support mode is more secured.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the game state shifts to a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the current game state based on the game result, the game result is notified before the game result is notified in the normal game cycle. and By doing so, it is possible for the player to know in advance that the game state will be shifted to a disadvantageous one, and then to prepare for it (preparation such as obtaining a hold or making preparations).

If the number of pending information on the side of the second ball-entering section, which is the target of the support mode, is less than the upper limit in a game turn with a game result (normal jackpot result) that is in a low-frequency support state during the high-frequency support mode, The configuration is such that the game result is notified first, and then the transition to the low-frequency support mode is notified. As a result, if the holding information of the second ball-entering section is not acquired during the current game round, the opportunity to receive the winning lottery of the second ball-entering section will be lost, and I do not want to lose it. It can be a motivation to aim at the second operation opening 134 and shoot the game ball. In other words, as described above, by aiming at the second operating port 134, the second input that is the target of the support mode is activated just before the support mode switches from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. By storing the maximum amount of pending information on the ball side, you can feel the benefits of being able to fully enjoy the benefits of the high-frequency support mode.

The winning lottery (distribution lottery) on the side of the second ball-entering part is made more advantageous to the players than the lottery on the side of the first ball-entering part. As a result, it is possible to further arouse the feeling that it is a waste to lose the opportunity to participate in the winning lottery on the side of the second ball-entering club.

When the first result notification or the immediate result notification is performed, the variation speed of the final variation pattern row Z2 is changed to adjust the period until the corresponding pattern of the middle symbol row Z2 changes to the stop position. As a result, there is no need to change the stop result, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load at the time of effect change associated with early result notification or immediate result notification.

A first operating port 133 for acquiring holding information on the first ball-entering part side and a second operating port 134 for acquiring holding information on the second ball-entering part side can be arranged separately in the game area PE. and More specifically, when the game ball is shot aiming at the first operation port 133, the game ball does not reach or hardly reaches the second operation port 134, and the game ball is shot aiming at the second operation port 134. In the case where the first operation opening 133 is set, the game ball does not reach or hardly reaches the first operation opening 133 . As a result, the rarity of the high-frequency support mode in which the hold information on the second ball-entering section side is acquired is increased, and the significance of the early result notification and the immediate result notification in the game rounds that shift to the low-frequency support mode is improved. can be done. That is, for example, in a situation where the game ball is shot aiming at the first operation opening 133, the game ball easily reaches the second operation opening 134 (for example, the gauge of the first embodiment), low frequency support Even in the mode, winning to the second operation port 134 will occur very rarely, and as described above, it is advantageous to acquire the hold information on the second ball entrance side up to the upper limit just before the end of the high frequency support mode. This is because there is a possibility that the

Since the variable winning device 132 is arranged in the lower region PE4, even when the game ball is shot aiming at the left side region PE2, even when the game ball is shot aiming at the right side region PE3. , it is possible to generate a prize to the variable prize winning device 132 . Therefore, as described above, there is no inconvenience that the opportunity to win the variable prize winning device 132 is lost by making the player aim at the second operation opening 134 just before the end of the high-frequency support mode.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the game ball that has won the variable winning device 132 is guided to the V winning area 356, so that the winning lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the high probability mode. If the variable winning device 132 cannot win at the timing when it can be guided to the V winning area 356, the player suffers a great disadvantage. Therefore, in the above-described manner, the player is prevented from being disadvantaged by avoiding the phenomenon that the V winning area 356 is not won by aiming at the second operation opening 134. can be made

In the above-described embodiment, the timing at which the display of the result as a temporary stop is started is changed by changing the variation speed of the middle symbol row Z2. ), the fluctuation speed of the other symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed, or the fluctuation speed may be suddenly stopped without changing the fluctuation speed, and the result display may be started.

Although the decision to perform the first result notification or the immediate result notification is made at the start of the game round, it may be made in the middle of the game round. In this case, for example, when the deceleration process of the middle symbol row Z2 is performed, the number of holding information on the second ball entering section side is grasped, and the first result notification or the immediate result notification is performed according to the number. good.

Also in this embodiment, it is possible to apply a configuration for changing the fixed display time as in each of the above embodiments.

That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 97, in the stop start processing on the main control device 81 side, by lengthening the fixed display time of the game round that is the normal jackpot result in the high-probability game state, the high-frequency support mode A configuration may be adopted in which the timing of shifting from to the low-frequency support mode is delayed.

Specifically, in step S6201, it is determined whether or not the game is in a high certainty gaming state. If it is not in the high certainty game state, the first fixed display time is set to 0.2 sec in normal time at step S6202. On the other hand, if it is in the high-probability gaming state, it is determined in step S6203 whether or not the current game result is a normal jackpot result. If the result is not the normal jackpot result, the first fixed display time for the normal time is set in step S6202. If the result is a normal jackpot, the process advances to step S6204 to perform processing for grasping the number of pending information on the side of the second ball-entering section. Then, in step S6205, it is determined whether or not the number of pieces of hold information on the second ball-entering section side is two or less, and if the number is three or four, the process proceeds to step S6202. If the number is 2 or less, it is determined whether or not the number is 0 in step S6206. If the number is 1 or 2 instead of 0, the current first fixed display time is set to 4.7 sec in step S6207. On the other hand, if the number is 0, in step S6208, the current first fixed display time is set to 10.2 sec.

After the processing in step S6202, step S6207, or step S6208 is executed, processing for starting the first fixed display is performed in step S6209, and then processing at the time of stop start ends.

In the above configuration, when the first fixed display time of 0.2 sec is set in step S6202, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are temporarily stopped, the result display is started, and then the variable display time ends. The sum of the 2 sec up to the first fixed display time (0.2 sec) and the second fixed display time (0.5 sec) is 2.7 sec. On the other hand, when the first fixed display time of 4.2 sec is set in step S6207, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is temporarily stopped, and 2 sec from the start of the result display to the end of the variable display time. , the total of the first fixed display time (4.2 sec) and the second fixed display time (0.5 sec) is 6.7 sec, which is the same length of time as the previous result notification in the above embodiment. becomes. In addition, when the first fixed display time of 10.2 sec is set in step S6208, 2 sec from the start of the display of the result after the temporary stop of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 to the end of the variable display time. , the total of the first fixed display time (10.2 sec) and the second fixed display time (0.5 sec) is 12.7 sec. becomes. As a result, it is possible to secure a grace period for acquiring the holding information on the second ball-entering club side.

Further, according to this modified example, it is possible to substantially delay the timing of transition to the low-frequency support mode in the game cycle in which the low-frequency support mode is transitioned. That is, in the fifth embodiment, the transition to the low-frequency support mode was previously notified within the range of not changing the variable display time and the fixed display time, but in this modification, the fixed By extending the display time, the timing at which the current game result is reflected, that is, the timing at which the opening/closing execution mode is started is delayed. By doing so, when the high-frequency support mode, which is advantageous for the player, ends and there is little holding information on the side of the second ball-entering section, which is the target of the support mode, the start of the opening/closing execution mode is delayed. It is possible to extend the high-frequency support mode by that amount and secure the period for acquiring the hold information on the side of the second ball-entering club.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, a new playability is realized by using the configuration of changing the timing of reflecting the game results according to the number of reservations in the modification of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing V operation processing in this embodiment. The V operation process is a process for displacing the shutter 358 of the variable winning device 132 in the fifth embodiment. The V operation process is started in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec cycle).

The game board of this embodiment is substantially the same as the game board 24 of the first embodiment. It has a replaced configuration. That is, each working port is configured by the working port unit 33, and the game ball that has flowed into the upper working port 33a enters the first ball entering portion 33d and the second ball entering portion 33e.

As for the result of the big win, the kind of the result of the big win is determined by referring to the distribution table in the first embodiment. That is, a first-type jackpot result in which 16 rounds of round games are performed and a second-type jackpot result in which 4 rounds of round games are performed are set. Even if they are distributed, after the open/close execution mode, the high frequency support mode of 100 times is set. However, whether the winning lottery mode is high or low is determined by whether V winning occurs during the opening/closing execution mode, that is, whether game balls flow into the V winning area 356 in the variable winning device 132 or not. be.

In step S6301, it is determined whether or not the V period measurement flag is set in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. FIG. The V cycle measurement flag is a flag that is set when the conditions for operating the shutter 358 of the variable prize winning device 132 are established (when a decision is made to shift to the opening/closing execution mode), and the V cycle measurement is performed. After the flag is set, the shutter 358 is switched to guide to the V winning area 356 at a predetermined cycle. If the V period measurement flag is not set, the V operation process is terminated. On the other hand, if the V period measurement flag is set, the process proceeds to step S6302.

In step S6302, a process of subtracting 1 from the V cycle counter VS is executed. The V period counter is a counter for the MPU 202 to grasp the period after the V period measurement flag is set. In this embodiment, when the V period measurement flag is set, "7500" is input. (equivalent to 30 seconds).

In step S6303, it is determined whether or not the V cycle counter VS has reached 0. If not 0, the V operation processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V cycle counter is 0 in step S6303, the shutter 358 moves to the V winning area 356 in step S6304 by grasping the driving state of the drive unit 359 for the shutter. It is determined whether or not the ball is guided. If the drive unit 359 for the shutter is not under drive control and is guided to the ejection region 357 instead of the V winning region 356, the driving of the drive unit 359 for the shutter is started in step S6305. By doing so, the shutter 358 is switched to a mode of guiding the game ball to the V winning area 356 . Then, in step S6306, processing for inputting "250" to the V period counter VS is performed, and then this V operation processing is terminated. The value input in step S6306 corresponds to the period during which the shutter 358 is held in the state of guiding it to the V winning area 356, and corresponds to 1 sec in this embodiment.

In step S6304, when the drive unit 359 for the shutter is drive-controlled and the shutter 358 guides the game ball to the V winning area 356, the process proceeds to step S6307. In step S6307, the driving of the drive unit 359 for the shutter is terminated, thereby switching to a mode in which the shutter 358 is guided to the discharge area 357. FIG. Then, in step S6308, the V period measurement flag is erased, and then this V operation process is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, the switching of the shutter 358 occurs 30 seconds after the determination notification of the shift to the opening/closing execution mode is made, and the mode is such that the player is guided to the V winning area 356, and this state is maintained for 1 second. , and then switched to the mode of guiding to the discharge area 357 .

In the present embodiment, the confirmation notification of the transition to the opening/closing execution mode indicates the confirmation display shown in each of the above embodiments. That is, switching between the mode of being guided to the V winning area 356 and the mode of being guided to the discharge area 357 is performed at a predetermined cycle after the confirmation display is started.

FIG. 99(a) is a flow chart showing the process at the start of stop according to the present embodiment.

In this embodiment, in step S6401, a process of grasping the current common pending number CRN is executed. Then, in step S6402, a process of setting the first fixed display time corresponding to the number of common reservations CRN is performed. Such processing corresponds to the modification of the fifth embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the first fixed display time is set based on the tables shown in FIGS. 100(a) and 100(b).

As tables for determining the first fixed display time, a low probability mode table shown in FIG. 100(a) and a high probability mode table shown in FIG. 100(b) are provided. In step S6402, a table corresponding to the success/failure lottery mode is acquired to determine the first fixed display time.

In the low-probability mode table, when the game result is a loss result, the first fixed display time of 0.2 sec is uniformly set regardless of the value of the common reservation number CRN. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot result, 20 sec is set when the common reservation number CRN is 1 to 3, and 15 sec is set when it is 4 to 6. The confirmation display time is set to be short. Then, when the common pending number CRN is 7 to 8, the first fixed display time is set to 0.5 sec, and the value of the common pending number CRN is the upper limit (8) or near the upper limit. In some cases, the first fixed display time is set to be even shorter.

In the high-probability mode table, when the game result is a losing result, the first fixed display is uniformly 0.2 sec regardless of the value of the common pending number CRN, as in the low-probability mode table. Time is set. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot result, if the common pending number CRN is 1 to 6, the first fixed display time is set as in the table for the low probability mode, and is 1 to 3. In this case, 20 sec is set, and in the case of 4 to 6, 15 sec is set. When the common pending number CRN is 7 to 8, the first fixed display time is set to 0.5 sec or 15 sec. Which time is set is determined by lottery. For example, 0.5 sec is set with a probability of 50%, and 15 sec is set with a probability of 50%.

Returning to the description of the stop start time process, after executing the process of setting the first fixed display time according to the win/fail lottery mode, the game result, and the value of the common reservation number CRN in step S6402, in step S6403 , start processing of the first confirmation display is performed. After that, in step S6404, V allocation start processing is executed, and then stop start processing is ended.

In the V allocation start processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 99(b), it is determined in step S6501 whether or not the current game round is a game round resulting in a big win. If the result is not a big hit, the process for starting V distribution is terminated. If it is a game round with a jackpot result, in step S6502, a process of setting "7500" to the V period counter VS is performed (corresponding to 30 seconds). Then, in step S6503, processing for setting the V cycle measurement flag is performed, and then this processing for starting V allocation ends. As a result of this process, affirmative determination is made in step S6301 in the V operation process (FIG. 98), and drive control of the shutter driving section 359 in the variable winning device 132 is started.

In the game state transition processing (FIG. 16) in the present embodiment, if it is determined in step S803 that there is a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is set to 15 sec in the opening processing in step S804. do. Then, in the big winning opening opening/closing process of step S806, a round game is started in which winning to the variable winning device 132 is permitted based on the lapse of the opening period.

How the V prize is generated in this embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. In addition, in the following description, it is assumed that the mode is the low-probability mode.

First, the opening/closing execution mode executed when the common holding number CRN is 1 to 3 will be described. When the variable display of the game round started at the timing ta1 ends at the timing ta2 and the fixed display starts, and the common pending number CRN is small (1 to 3), the first fixed display time is set to 20 sec (see FIG. 100(a)). As in the above embodiments, the second fixed display time is set to 0.5 sec, so the total fixed display time is set to 20.5 sec. At timing ta3 when the fixed display time elapses, the opening/closing execution mode is started. In the open/close execution mode, the opening period is set to 15 sec as described above, so the first round of the round game is started at the timing ta6 when the opening period elapses, and winning to the variable winning device 132 is permitted. .

As described above, the switching control for distributing to either the V winning area 356 or the ejection area 357 is performed at a predetermined cycle after the confirmation of the shift to the opening/closing execution mode is made. That is, at timing ta4, which is 30 seconds after timing ta2, which is the start timing of the first confirmation display, the mode is switched to the mode of guiding to the V winning area 356, and this mode is maintained for 1 sec. At ta5, the mode is switched to guide to the discharge area 357 .

In this case, winning to the variable winning device 132 is not permitted at the timing (timing ta4 to timing ta5) in which the winning game ball is guided to the V winning area 356 side. Therefore, in the opening and closing execution mode this time, substantially no inflow of game balls into the V winning area 356 (V winning) occurs, and the winning lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode is set to the low probability mode. will be

On the other hand, when the variable display of the game round started at the timing tb1 ends at the timing tb2 and the fixed display is started, if the common pending number CRN is large (7 to 8), the first fixed display The time is set to 0.5 sec, which is shorter than when the common reservation number CRN is small (see FIG. 100(a)). In this case, the total fixed display time is set to 1.0 sec. At timing tb3 when the fixed display time elapses, the opening/closing execution mode is started, and at timing tb4 when the opening period of 15 seconds elapses, the first round of the round game is started, and winning to the variable winning device 132 is allowed. be.

As in the case of the timing ta2, switching control is performed to distribute to either the V prize area 356 or the discharge area 357 at a predetermined cycle after the determination notification of the shift to the opening/closing execution mode is performed. will be That is, at timing tb5, which is 30 sec after timing tb2, the mode is switched to the mode of guiding to the V winning area 356, and after this mode is maintained for 1 sec, the player is then guided to the discharge area 357 at timing tb6. It is switched to the mode to do.

In this case, winning to the variable winning device 132 is allowed at the timing (timing tb5 to timing tb6) in which the winning game ball is guided to the V winning area 356 side. Therefore, in the opening and closing execution mode this time, the inflow of the game ball (V winning) to the V winning area 356 is substantially generated, and the winning lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode is set to the high probability mode. will be

As described above, by changing the presence or absence of V winning during the opening/closing execution mode according to the number of the common reservation number CRN of the game round in which the transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the number of reservations and the high probability mode It is possible to create a new game property associated with the set probability to. For example, as shown in FIG. 100(c), the occurrence of the V prize in the low probability mode is when the decision to shift to the opening/closing execution mode is made in a situation where the common pending number CRN is 7 to 8. Therefore, if the common pending number CRN is used for this division, the probability of winning V in the low probability mode is 25%. On the other hand, the occurrence of the V prize in the high-probability mode occurs with a probability of 50% in the case where the confirmation notification of the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is made in the situation where the common reservation number CRN is 7-8. Therefore, the V winning probability in the high probability mode is 12.5%, which is lower than that in the low probability mode, by dividing by the common pending number CRN.

On the other hand, the common pending number CRN increases or decreases depending on whether the support mode is high or low. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, since the support by the electric accessory 34 of the lower operation opening 33b occurs with high frequency, winning on the side of the second ball entry portion 33e is likely to occur, and as a result, The value of the common pending number CRN tends to be close to the upper limit. On the other hand, in the low-frequency support mode, since the support by the electric accessory 34 cannot be expected, winning via the upper operation port 33a is the main. Therefore, it can be said that the value of the common pending number CRN is unlikely to be close to the upper limit. Then, when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode and a jackpot result is obtained, the V prize is unlikely to occur, so the success/failure lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is likely to be set to the low-probability mode, and the high-frequency support. If a jackpot result is obtained in the mode, the win/loss lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is likely to be set to the high probability mode because V winning is likely to occur.

In this way, by associating the V winning rate with the common pending number CRN, it is possible to vary the V winning rate depending on whether the common pending number CRN tends to increase or decrease. .

Since the common hold number CRN is the sum of the number of hold information on the first ball-entering unit 33d side and the number of hold information on the second ball-entering unit 33e side, the hold information on the second ball-entering unit 33e side is Even in the high-frequency support mode in which is likely to accumulate, in order for the value of the common reservation number CRN to become close to the upper limit value, it is necessary to generate a winning to the upper working port 33a. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which the V winning rate is determined by the number of reserved information on the second ball entering section 33e side, the difficulty of generating the V winning (setting the short first fixed display time) increases, and the game performance increases. can be improved.

The easiness of accumulating pending information may vary depending on the variable display time of each game round. FIG. 102 shows a variable display time table for reach generation.

As shown in FIG. 102(a), in the low-frequency support mode (normal game state), the variable display time set when reach occurs is, for example, 30 sec, 60 sec, 90 sec depending on the value of the variable type counter CS. is set. Different reach displays are associated with different lengths of variable display time. For example, normal reach A, normal reach B, and normal reach C are set for the variable display time of 30 sec. ) are set differently. Also, super reach is set for variable display times of 60 seconds and 90 seconds. Super reach is a reach display that is set so that the expectation of a big hit result is higher than normal reach, and the content of the reach display is set so as to be an advanced form of normal reach, for example. Super reach A is set for the variable display time of 60 sec, and super reach B is set for the variable display time of 90 sec. The super reach A and the super reach B are set so that the degree of expectation for the result of the big win and the content of performance are different, and the degree of expectation of the big win is set higher in the super reach B than in the super reach A.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 102(b), in the high-frequency support mode (high-probability gaming state), the variable display time set at the occurrence of reach is, for example, 3 sec, depending on the value of the variable type counter CS. 15 sec is set. Even in the high frequency support mode, different reach displays are associated with the length of the variable display time. For example, a short reach is set for a variable display time of 3 seconds, and a variable display of 15 seconds Long reach is set for time. The short reach and the long reach are different reach, for example, in the period during which the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in a variable manner after the upper and lower reach lines are formed. Then, between the short reach and the long reach, the long reach is set so that the degree of expectation of a big winning result is higher.

Incidentally, the variable display time set in the reach occurrence variable display time table is set longer than the variable display time set in the reach non-occurrence variable display time table. Further, the fluctuation display time table for reach occurrence is referred to when the result is a deviation. The fluctuation display time table for reach occurrence that is referred to when the result is a jackpot has different values of the fluctuation type counter CS assigned to each fluctuation display time (each reach display), and there is a reach display with a long fluctuation display time. , the value of the variation type counter CS is assigned so that it is more likely to be selected than in the case of the above-mentioned outlier.

As described above, when the variable display time of the game cycle is longer than usual, the digestion speed of the pending information is slowed down. In other words, it becomes easier for hold information to accumulate due to reach occurrence.

In particular, the reach display with a longer variable display time is set so that the expectation of a big win is higher, so it is possible to accumulate pending information based on the reach display that can be expected to result in a big win. there is In other words, it can be said that storing up to the upper limit value of the common pending number CRN is more advantageous for the player when the ready-to-win display with high expectation of big win is performed. By doing so, for example, even a player who is convinced of a big win result can be persuaded to shoot a game ball and acquire the hold information by the contents of the ready-to-win display. It is possible to suppress the so-called stopping strike.

The low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode differ in the easiness of accumulation of pending information, and the high-frequency support mode is easier to accumulate pending information than the low-frequency support mode. However, the speed of digesting the pending information is faster in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode. Then, even in the high-frequency support mode, an event may occur in which the common pending number CRN is not the upper limit value at the time of the big win. In particular, the reach display in high-frequency support mode was set to be shorter than the reach display in low-frequency support mode, so after the reach display started in high-frequency support mode, people were in a hurry to get hold information. However, there is a possibility that the common pending number CRN will not reach the upper limit by the end of the ready-to-win display (the end of the game cycle). By doing so, in the high-frequency support mode, the game can be played with the common number of reservations CRN close to the upper limit value, and the so-called stop shot can be suppressed.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the first fixed display time is set in relation to the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode. FIG. 103 shows a success/failure table and a sorting table according to this embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b), in the present embodiment, as a result of the winning lottery, in addition to the jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode is executed, a special loss result and a normal loss result are set. It is If the lottery result is a special failure result or a normal failure result, the opening/closing execution mode is not entered, but the set length of the first fixed display time is different.

In the success/failure table for the low-probability lottery mode referred to in the low-probability mode, as shown in FIG. 5 sec is set. On the other hand, the first fixed display time is set to 0.2 sec for the out-of-normal results sorted out with relatively high frequency. The first fixed display time set when the result is normal is the same as the first fixed display time set when the result is a big win, and the fixed display time of 0.2 sec is set when the result is a big win.

In the success/failure table for the high-probability mode referred to in the high-probability lottery mode, the same first fixed display time is set for each result, as shown in FIG. 103(b). Specifically, 0.2 sec is set as the first fixed display time for any of the big win result, the special loss result, and the normal loss result. In other words, the same first confirmation display time is set for the big win result and the normal loss result regardless of whether the win/loss lottery mode is high or low. 5 sec is set, and 0.2 sec is set in the high-probability mode, and the first fixed display time is set depending on whether the lottery mode is high or low.

It should be noted that the second confirmation display time is constant regardless of whether the lottery mode is high or low and the game result, and is set to 0.5 sec in both cases.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103(c), the jackpot results are distributed as the first type jackpot result A, the first jackpot result B, the second jackpot result A, and the second jackpot result. B is provided. The first-type jackpot results A and B correspond to the above-mentioned first-type jackpot results, and both are game results that shift to the opening/closing execution mode in which a round game of 16 rounds is executed. Also, the second type jackpot results A and B correspond to the second type jackpot results described above, and both are game results that shift to the opening/closing execution mode in which a round game of 4 rounds is executed.

The difference between the first-class jackpot result A and the first-class jackpot result B, and the difference between the second-class jackpot result A and the second-class jackpot result B is the length of the opening time in the open/close execution mode. That is, in the opening process of step S804 in the game state transition process (FIG. 16), if the first type jackpot result A or the second type jackpot result A, the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode is set to 15.0 sec. . On the other hand, in the case of the first type jackpot result B or the second type jackpot result B, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is set to 24.3 sec.

In this case, if the first type jackpot result A or the second type jackpot result A is obtained, the total of the first fixed display time, the second fixed display time and the opening time is 15.7 sec (0.2 sec + 0.5 sec + 15.0 sec). , the period from the start of the confirmation display of these results to the opening of the variable winning device 32 is 15.7 seconds. Also, in the case of the first type jackpot result B or the second type jackpot result B, the total of the first fixed display time, the second fixed display time and the opening time is 25.0 sec (0.2 sec + 0.5 sec + 24.3 sec). , the period from the start of the confirmation display of these results to the opening of the variable winning device 32 is 25.0 sec.

As a result, when a special loss result is obtained in the low probability mode, the period from the start of the confirmation display of the special loss result to the start of the next game round, the first type jackpot result B and the second In the case of the seed jackpot result B, the period from the start of the confirmation display of these results to the opening of the variable prize winning device 32 corresponds to the period of the same length (25.0 sec).

Next, fluctuation start processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the fluctuation start process is a process executed at step S506 in the game round control process (FIG. 13) as a process on the main controller 81 side. Patterns and stop results are set.

In this embodiment, in steps S6501 to S6506, similarly to the processing of steps S701 to S706, the winning judgment processing, the type judgment processing at the time of winning the jackpot, and the stop result setting processing for each jackpot are performed. It should be noted that in step S6504, it is determined whether it is either the first type jackpot result A or the first type jackpot result B, and if it is either, in step S6505, the first type jackpot result A And stop result setting processing for the first type jackpot result B is performed. In step S6505, if the result of the first-class jackpot is A, the stop result corresponding to the result of the first-class jackpot A is set, and if the result of the first-class jackpot is B, it corresponds to the result of the first-class jackpot B. Set the stop result. The stopping result corresponding to the first type jackpot result A and the stopping result corresponding to the first type jackpot result B are visually different from each other to the extent that they can be distinguished.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S6504, a stop result setting process for the second type jackpot result A and the second type jackpot result B is performed in step S6506. Then, in step S6506, if the second type jackpot result A is set, the stop result corresponding to the second type jackpot result A is set, and if the second type jackpot result is B, the second type jackpot result B is set. Set the corresponding stop result. The stopping result corresponding to the second type jackpot result A and the stopping result corresponding to the second type jackpot result B are visually different from each other to the extent that they can be distinguished. In addition, the stop result corresponding to the second type jackpot result A and the stop result corresponding to the second type jackpot result B are visually the same as the stop result corresponding to the first type jackpot result A and the first type jackpot result B. Identifiably different.

If it is determined in step S6502 that the jackpot is not won, the process advances to step S6507 to determine whether or not the result is a special loss. If it is not a special outage result, a stop result setting process for normal outage is performed in step S6508. In step S6508, the stop result is set so as to be visually identifiable from the stop result corresponding to each jackpot result.

If it is determined in step S6507 that the result is a special outage, a stop result setting process for special outage is performed in step S6509. In step S6509, the stop result is set so as to be visually identifiable from the stop result corresponding to each jackpot result and the stop result corresponding to the normal failure. In particular, the stop result corresponding to the special loss result is compared with the stop result of each jackpot result, and the stop result corresponding to the first type jackpot result B and the stop result corresponding to the second jackpot result B It is a very different stopping result.

After any one of steps S6505, S6506, S6508 and S6509 is executed, the same processes as steps S708 to S710 are executed in steps S6510 to S6512.

That is, in the present embodiment, as compared with the first embodiment, there are the first type jackpot result A and the first type jackpot result B as the first type jackpot result, and the second jackpot result as the second jackpot result. There are a seed jackpot result A and a second jackpot result B. In addition, there are normal failure results and special failure results as failure results. In the fluctuation start process of the present embodiment, the stop result is set so that these game results can be identified on the main display section 43 respectively.

Next, the stop start time processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 105 . As described above, the stop start process is a process for setting the first fixed display time.

In step S6601, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode. If the mode is not the low-probability mode but the high-probability mode, the process advances to step S6602 to set the first fixed display time of the current game round to 0.2 sec (see FIG. 103(b)). Also, even in the low probability mode (step S6601: YES), if it is determined in step S6602 that the result is not a special outlier, the first confirmation display time is set to 0.2 sec in step S6602 (Fig. 103(a)). On the other hand, in the low probability mode (step S6601: YES), if the result is a special loss (step S6603: YES), in step S6604, the first fixed display time of the current game round is set to 24.5 sec. Execute the process. After setting the first fixed display time in step S6602 or step S6604, the first fixed display start process is executed in step S6605, and then the stop start time process ends.

Next, the opening processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The opening process is a process executed at step S804 in the game state transition process (FIG. 16) as a process on the main controller 81 side.

In step S6701, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode to be started this time is the opening/closing execution mode based on the first type jackpot result A or the second type jackpot result A. In the case of the opening/closing execution mode based on these jackpot results, in step S6702, the opening time of the opening/closing execution mode this time is set to 15.0 sec (see FIG. 103(c)). On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6701 and the opening/closing execution mode to be started this time is the first type jackpot result B or the second type jackpot result B, in step S6703, the opening time of the opening/closing execution mode this time is 24. It is set as 3 sec (see FIG. 103(c)). After executing the processing of step S6702 or step S6703, the processing for starting the measurement of the opening time is executed in step S6704, and then the processing for opening is ended.

Next, in the present embodiment, as processing on the side of the notification/production control device 82, the stop result determination processing for the jackpot of the variation start processing (step S1404, FIG. 27) in the variation display control processing (FIG. 26) Step S1503) and stop result determination processing for reach will be described.

In the stop result determination process for the jackpot, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. judge. In the case of these jackpot results, in step S6802, it is determined whether or not it is the first type jackpot result A. In the case of the first type jackpot result A, in step S6803, the stop result that the combination of the same specific symbol (main symbol with an odd number) is established on one activated line L1 to L5 Determined as a result of the stoppage of times. Also, if it is determined in step S6802 that it is the second type jackpot result A instead of the first type jackpot result A, then in step S6804, the same non-specific pattern (even number The stop result in which the combination of the main symbols marked with is established is determined as the stop result of this game cycle.

If it is determined in step S6801 that neither the first type jackpot result A nor the second type jackpot result A is detected, that is, the game result of the game round to be started this time is either the first type jackpot result B or the second type jackpot result B. If there is, the process advances to step S6805. In step S6805, a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, a main symbol with "3", a main symbol with "4", and a main symbol with "1") is placed on one activated line L1-L5. combination) is established as the stop result of this game cycle. The stop result (3, 4, 1), which is a combination of predetermined symbols, is a stop result showing a so-called chance eye, unlike the stop result where the same combination of symbols is established as described above. In this case, the effect pattern to be set is such that the symbol row Z2 that is finally stopped in the ready-to-win display to be executed is not stopped, and a predetermined character (for example, a school of fish) is displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 so as to hide the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. , and when the predetermined character is moved to a position that does not overlap with the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the performance pattern is changed such that the above-mentioned chance numbers are stopped.

After executing any one of steps S6803, S6804 and S6805, in step S6406, the address of the stop symbol is stored, and then the stop result determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the stop result determination process for reach, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 108, in step S6901, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game round to be started this time is a special loss result. If it is not a special loss result but a normal loss result, then in step S6902, a stop result in which a combination of off-reach symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. In step S6901, when it is determined that the game result of the game round to be started this time is a special loss result, in step S6903, a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, "3 , a main symbol with "4", and a main symbol with "1") is determined as the stop result of this game round. That is, the stop result determined in step S6903 is the same as the stop result determined in step S6805, and is a so-called chance stop result. Also in this case, the effect pattern to be set is such that the pattern row Z2, which is to be finally stopped in the ready-to-win display to be executed, is not stopped, and a predetermined character (for example, a school of fish) is displayed so as to hide the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. When the predetermined character is made to appear in front of the rows Z1 to Z3 and is moved to a position not overlapping with the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the performance pattern is changed such that the chance eyes are stopped.

After executing the process of step S6902 or step S6903, in step S6904, after performing the process of storing the address of the stop symbol, this stop result determination process is terminated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the game rounds in the symbol display device 41, the stop result of the game rounds resulting in the first type jackpot result B and the second type jackpot result B, and the stop result of the game rounds resulting in a special loss result. are common, and are set so as to have the same stop result (chance number).

The game flow of this embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

First, the flow of the game when the first type jackpot result B or the second type jackpot result B is obtained will be described. If the game result of the game round started at the timing ta1 is the result of these jackpots, the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41 ends at the timing ta2, and the second chance (3. 4.1) is temporarily stopped. After that, at timing ta3, the main display unit 43 starts confirmation display, and the stop result corresponding to the game result is displayed (the stop result corresponding to the first type jackpot result B, or the second type jackpot result B corresponding stop result). In this case, the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41 generates a chance effect. The chance effect is, for example, a effect in which the background turns black while the chance eye is stopped, and a heartbeat sound is emitted as a sound effect. It continues throughout the opening. That is, after the fixed display time has passed at timing ta4, even if the opening/closing execution mode is started at timing ta5 and shifts to the opening, the chance effect is continuously performed (the display screen 41a remains as it is, and heartbeat sound effect is repeated).

As already explained, when the game result is a jackpot result, the first fixed display time is set to 0.2 sec, and the second fixed display time is set to 0.5 sec. The opening time in the opening/closing execution mode of the first type jackpot result B and the second type jackpot result B is set to 24.3 sec. Therefore, the chance effect is performed for a total of 25.0 seconds. Then, at timing ta5 when the opening time elapses, the chance effect ends, the big winning opening 32a is opened, and the big win effect starts on the display screen 41a.

On the other hand, if the game result of the game round started at the timing tb1 is a special loss result, the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41 ends at the timing tb2, and the second chance (3・4.1) is temporarily stopped. After that, at the timing tb3, the main display section 43 starts the confirmation display, and the stop result corresponding to the game result is displayed (the stop result corresponding to the special losing result). In this case, on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41, the above-described chance effect occurs. However, since the game result of this time is not a game result of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the chance effect of this time is performed during the confirmation display. However, as for the fixed display time this time, the first fixed display time is set to 24.5 sec and the second fixed display time is set to 0.5 sec, so the chance effect is executed over a total of 25.0 sec. will be That is, the chance production based on the special losing result is performed for the same length as the chance production performed in the case of the first type jackpot result B or the second type jackpot result B. However, in the case of the first type jackpot result B or the second type jackpot result B, at the timing tb4 corresponding to the timing ta4 at which the opening/closing execution mode is started, the opening/closing execution mode is not started and the first type jackpot result is not started. In the case of B or the second type jackpot result B, at the timing tb5 corresponding to the timing ta5 at which the big winning opening 32a is opened, the big winning opening 32a is not opened, and the next game round is started, and the symbol row Z1- The variable display of Z3 and the main display section 43 is started. When the hold information is not stored at timing tb5, the next game round is not started, and the chance presentation ends as it is (the background returns to the original color and the heartbeat sound effect stops).

When the opening/closing execution mode is started at the timing ta4, for example, it is preferable to change the display mode of the main display section 43 so that it is possible to clearly specify that the game state has changed. Further, for example, in a configuration in which a round display section indicating the number of round games in the open/close execution mode is provided, it is preferable to configure the display of the round display section to start at timing ta4.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the case of the 1st kind jackpot result B or the 2nd kind jackpot result B, which shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, after displaying the stop result of the symbols on the display screen 41a, the opening of the opening/closing execution mode is performed, and the first round is performed. When the period until the big winning opening 32a is opened as a round game is a special loss result that does not shift to the opening and closing execution mode, after displaying the symbol stop result on the display screen 41a, the next game round was set to be the same length as the period until the start of Therefore, it is not possible to determine whether or not the transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs from the length of these periods and the opening/closing mode of the big winning opening 32a. Therefore, even if it is a special failure result that does not cause a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to enjoy this period while expecting that a transition to the opening/closing execution mode may occur, which improves interest. is planned.

When the game result of the game cycle is the first type jackpot result B or the second type jackpot result B that shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, or the case that it is a special loss result that does not shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the pattern on the display screen 41a The stop results of the two were made common, and all of them were stopped at the chance eye. As a result, it is not possible to determine whether or not the transition to the open/close execution mode will occur from the result of the stoppage of the display screen 41a. can be more enjoyable.

While the display screen 41a is configured such that both results cannot be identified as described above, the main display section 43 is configured to differentiate the stop results so that both results can be identified. As a result, for example, the manager of the game hall can confirm which result is the result, and the correspondence between the game result and the opening/closing execution mode is ensured.

The effect of associating the fixed display time with the opening period as described above is implemented in the low-probability mode, but is not implemented in the high-probability mode. As a result, it is possible to smoothly play a high-probability mode game that can frequently result in a big win.

In the above-described embodiment, if the result is a special loss, and one or more pieces of the hold information are stored in the hold ball storage area 232, the above-mentioned fixed display time can be set, or the chance eye can be set. It may be configured such that it is stopped or a chance production is performed. As a result, after the chance performance, the large prize winning opening 32a is opened or the next game round is started, so that the difference in the impression given by the performance after the chance performance can be increased. .

In the above embodiment, the opening time of the opening/closing execution mode during the high probability mode may be shorter than the above. That is, in the high-probability mode, even if the result is a special loss, the first fixed display time is set to the same time as other game results. The opening time of the second type jackpot result B may be 15.0 sec, like the opening period of the first type jackpot result A and the second type jackpot result A. In this way, the opening/closing execution mode in the high-probability mode can be smoothly implemented.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments by combining a part or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) In the above-described first embodiment, an effect display in which a bubble image appears as a suspension notice is performed, or an effect is performed in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped in the suspension notice stop mode, but these effects are performed. may not be executed. That is, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the determined display time or the length of the game time per game cycle itself is used as the pending notice. In this case, when the suspension notice is given, the fixed display time is not limited to be longer than usual, it may be shortened, or a combination of both lengthening and shortening may be used. Also, a plurality of times with different lengths may be provided as the special time, and the length of the fixed display time may suggest the degree of expectation for a big win in the specific game round (the game round subject to the pending notice). For example, if the hold information corresponding to the outreach is specified in advance, the first type time is likely to be set as a special time, and if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is specified in advance, it is a special time than the first type time. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which a long type 2 time is easily set. In a configuration in which the fixed display time or the length of the game time per game round itself is used as a pending notice, the player's interest in the fixed display is increased to increase the degree of attention to the game. It is possible to reduce the number of displays and reduce the processing load on control. However, considering the ease with which the player can notice the pending notice, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of the above embodiment.

(2) In the above-described first embodiment, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the display screen 41a to perform the suspension notice. Alternatively, it may be a role production using a decorative movable body (movable accessory) for movable production. Furthermore, it does not necessarily have to be visual, for example, auditory using sound effects, olfactory using smell, and at least a part of the pachinko machine 10 (e.g., the firing handle 54 , or the effect operation unit 75) may be vibrated, or wind or water may be directed at the player. In short, it is sufficient that the player can feel that an effect related to the progress of the game has been performed, and the form is not particularly limited.

In addition, when a predetermined effect image is displayed to give a pending notice, another display device may be provided in addition to the pattern display device 41, and the effect image may be displayed on the display screen of the display device. In this case, the display screen of the other display device may be made smaller than the display screen 41a of the pattern display device 41, or the display screen may be smaller than the display screen 41a of the pattern display device 41 in order to prevent the player's attention and interest in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 from being diminished. It is preferable to dispose it at a position farther from the center of the front surface of the game board 24 than 41a. However, when compared with the main display section 43, it is preferable to enlarge the display area or arrange it at a position close to the center of the front surface of the game board 24. FIG.

(3) In the above-described first embodiment, when the suspension notice is performed, the configuration is such that the notice display effect is displayed in the confirmation display of each game cycle, but instead of or in addition to this, the suspension notice is performed. It is also possible to display a notification image for notifying the start of the look-ahead zone effect, such as "entering the XX zone", in the first game round. In this case, the notification image is first displayed in a large size on the display screen 41a at the confirmation display of the first game round, and then at the end of the confirmation display or at the start timing of the next game round, the notification image or "○○ zone" is displayed. is displayed in a smaller size, and this is continued until the specific game round. That is, the effect image displayed in the confirmation display of the first game round may be continuously displayed over the next game round, thereby making it easy to understand that the pending notice is continuing. In this case, in the first game round, the display part KP, or the display part KP and the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in front of the notification image, and the display part KP etc. can be visually recognized even while the notification image is displayed. configuration. In subsequent game rounds, the notification image and character display should preferably be displayed so as not to overlap the display portion KP or the display portion KP and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, the display positions of the notification image and character display may be set so as not to overlap the display section KP, etc., or the display of the display section KP, etc. may be moved to avoid overlap.

(4) In the above-described first embodiment, the result of specifying the destination performed during the variable display is reflected in the time length of the fixed display performed immediately after the variable display. It may be configured to be reflected in the time length of the fixed display in each time. In this case, the process of determining whether or not the hold information corresponding to the big hit or the losing reach is previously specified and the process of setting the first fixed display time based on the determination result are performed at the start timing of the variable display. may

(5) In the first embodiment, the first fixed display time is variable and the second fixed display time is fixed. It may be a variable time. In this case, even after the start of the confirmation display, the confirmation display time can be changed, and if the destination identification is performed during the confirmation display, or if the judgment processing for the result of the identification is performed during the confirmation display , the result can be reflected in the ongoing confirmation display.

Also, both the first and second fixed display times may be variable. In this case, both fixed display times may be set based on the same or the same conditions, or may be set based on different or different conditions. As a configuration for setting based on the same type of condition, for example, when the result of the previous specification is the first result, the first fixed display time is set based on the result, and the result of the previous specification is the first result. If the second result is different from the result, the second fixed display time can be set based on the result. In addition, as a configuration that is set based on different types or different conditions, for example, the first fixed display time is set based on the result of the previous specification, and the second fixed display time is set based on the common pending number CRN. can do.

(6) In the above first embodiment, the fixed display time is divided into the first fixed display time and the second fixed display time, but such division is not performed and the second fixed display time is not provided. may be configured. In this case, the second stop display command can also be omitted. Also, the number of divisions of the fixed display time is not limited to two, and may be three or more. In this case, each of the third and subsequent fixed display times other than the first and second fixed display times may be a variable time like the first fixed display time, or a fixed time like the second fixed display time. may be

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the fixed display time may be divided into the first fixed display time and the second fixed display time. In this case, as in the first embodiment, the first fixed display time may be variable and the second fixed display time may be fixed. The first fixed display time may be fixed and the second fixed display time may be variable, or both may be variable.

(7) In the above-described first embodiment, the first confirmation display time is set at the start timing of the confirmation display on the main display section 43. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The first fixed display time may be set at a timing prior to the start timing of . That is, the timing for setting the first fixed display time is after the start of the variable display on the main display section 43 and before the start of the fixed display (before the end of the fixed display when the configuration of (5) above is provided). However, any timing may be used. This is the same for the process (step S1203) of determining whether or not the reservation information corresponding to the jackpot or the losing reach has been specified in advance.

(8) In the above-described first embodiment, the number of times AN of holding notices is set (the number of times of setting the first fixed display time as special time) AN is set to a plurality of times, but it may be set to one time. In that case, the suspension notice may be performed in the game round immediately before the specific game round that is the target of the suspension notice, or may be configured to perform the suspension notice in the game round even earlier than that.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the set number of times AN is uniformly set to 2 times, but the number of times may differ or be likely to vary depending on the type of the previously specified result. For example, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is pre-specified, 3 times is likely to be selected as the set number AN, and when the hold information corresponding to the losing reach is pre-specified, 2 times is selected as the set number AN. It can be configured to make it easier.

(9) In the above-described first embodiment, the first fixed display time is uniformly set to the special time when displaying the advance notice display effect that causes the bubble image to appear. When the first fixed display time is set as a special time only when the advance notice display effect is displayed in the fixed display immediately after the variable display based on the result of specifying the destination, and the second and subsequent advance notice display effects are displayed Alternatively, when the display of the advance notice display effect is started from the next game round onward, the first fixed display time may be set to the normal time. In the case of executing the second and subsequent advance notice display effects, or in the case of starting the advance notice display effects from the next and subsequent game rounds, the notification/production control device 82 or the display control device 212, which is a control device on the sub side. can grasp that the advance notice display effect should be displayed at the start of the variable display, the timing of temporary stop of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is earlier than usual to secure time for the notice display effect. good.

Further, even when the first fixed display time is set to the special time, it may be configured such that there are cases where the advance notice display effect is displayed and cases where the advance notice display effect is not displayed. In this case, when the first fixed display time becomes the special time and the advance notice display effect is not displayed, and when the first fixed display time becomes the special time and the notice display effect is displayed at the same time, the big win is obtained. By providing a difference in the degree of expectation, it is possible to increase the variation of the degree-of-expectation-related production, and to diversify the game production. At this time, the main control device 81 may determine whether or not to display the notice display effect, or the notification/effect control device 82 or the display control device 212 may determine.

(10) In the first embodiment, when it is already determined that the special hold information is pre-specified, the processing for determining whether the special hold information is pre-specified is restricted. Alternatively or additionally, the configuration may be such that the processing for setting the first fixed display time to the special time is restricted.

(11) In the above-described first embodiment, at the start timing of the finalized display, one of a plurality of finalized display times consisting of a special time, a normal time, and a reduced working time is selected, and it is selected as the first finalization. Although it is configured to be the display time, the first fixed display time is set to the normal time (time for shortening depending on the common number of reservations CRN) at the timing before the start of the fixed display, and the fixed display is started. When the special hold information is specified in advance during the period, the first fixed display time may be changed to the special time at the start timing of the fixed display. With such a configuration, for example, even if there is a problem that the first fixed display time is not set to the special time, the setting of the normal time or the reduced working time performed in advance can remain, so the fixed display itself is executed. It becomes possible to suppress the inconvenience that becomes impossible.

(12) In the first embodiment, when the common pending number CRN is equal to or greater than K=3, the first fixed display time is set to the time saving time to be shortened. In addition, when the common pending number CRN is equal to or less than the reference number M (for example, 1), the first fixed display time may be longer than the normal time. This makes it difficult for the reserved information in the reserved ball storage area 232 to run out, making it possible to suppress interruptions in the progress of the game.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the special display area OE and the display section KP are provided within the display screen 41a. Alternatively, the display unit KP may be configured by a light-emitting display device having light-emitting means such as an LED. When the display unit KP is provided outside the display screen 41a, it is preferable that the display unit KP is provided around the display screen 41a in order to concentrate attention points.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, the upper pattern row, the middle pattern row, and the lower pattern row are variably displayed in the horizontal direction in the variable display area ME of the display screen 41a. The three symbol rows may be vertically variably displayed, or the symbols of each symbol row may be switched and displayed in individually set display areas. In other words, the symbols displayed in the display area may be alternated in ascending order or descending order. Also, the number of symbol rows is not limited to a plurality, and the configuration may be such that only one symbol row is provided. In addition, in a configuration having a plurality of symbol rows, the number of symbol rows may be two, or may be four or more.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed on the same display screen 41a. It may be configured to display, or may be configured to display one symbol row and the remaining two symbol rows on separate display screens. In this case, the "picture display means" and the "display means" can be interpreted as collectively referring to them, or as corresponding to one of them.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the suspension information is acquired based on the winning of the operation openings 33a and 33b, and the suspension information is stored with a predetermined number (four) as the upper limit. may not be stored. By doing so, it is possible to simplify the configuration. This is the same for the winning to the through gate 35 as well.

(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, up to four pieces of hold information based on winnings to the upper working port 33a are stored. may Also, the upper limit of the number of pending information items to be stored in the lower operation port 33b and the through gate 35 based on each winning may be less than four, or may be five or more. Further, the upper limit storage number of the pending information based on the winning to the operation ports 33a, 33b and the through gate 35 may be different.

(17) In each of the above-described embodiments, the determination is made in the order of winning to the operating ports 33a and 33b. The pending information based on the above may be preferentially targeted for the suitability determination, or vice versa.

(18) In Modification 1 of the first embodiment, all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are uniformly re-varied when re-variation is performed. A variable configuration may also be used. For example, it is determined whether or not there is any of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that are stopped and displayed that can be used as a stop mode of the suspension notice, and if it is determined that there is a usable symbol row, It is good also as a structure which re-varies only symbol row|line|columns other than.

(19) In the modification 1 of the first embodiment, the stop result is changed through the re-variation of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, but the change may be made without the re-variation. In this case, the symbols Z1 to Z3 that are stopped and displayed may be changed to other symbols instantaneously. An image other than the pattern may be displayed in the display area Z3, and then when the shielding image or the image other than the pattern is erased, the changed pattern may appear. It should be noted that when only some of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that are stopped and displayed are to be changed, it is not always necessary to display a shielding image or an image other than the pattern for the entire symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It may be configured such that it is displayed only for some of the symbol rows.

(20) In the modified example 1 of the first embodiment, the notification/effect control device 82 decides whether or not to change the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 again. Alternatively, the display control device 212 may perform this.

(21) In the modification 1 of the first embodiment, the destination is specified during the progress of the game round, and based on the result, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are suspended in the ongoing game round. The symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changed again only when they are stopped and displayed in the stop mode. Also in the case of starting the suspension notice stop mode from the game round later than the game round in progress when the first specification is performed, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed again. In that case, whether or not to execute re-variation is interwoven with the case of stopping display in the suspension notice stop mode without re-fluctuation and the case of stopping display in the suspension notice stop mode after re-fluctuation. It is preferable to provide a re-variation lottery means for randomly re-varying.

By adopting such a configuration, even if the stop result of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the initial stop display does not become the suspension notice stop mode, the game is such that the change is performed again until the stop result is confirmed. people can expect. As a result, the player's sense of anticipation can be maintained, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased. In addition, with the configuration of Modification 1, there is an aspect that the player can easily determine which reservation information corresponds to the big hit or the lost reach based on the fact that the change is performed again. Re-fluctuation makes it difficult to specify the hold information in which the jackpot or the loss reach is previously specified, and it is possible to add the fun of guessing the hold information. The re-fluctuation lottery may be performed by the main controller 81, or may be performed by the notification/effect control device 82 or the display control device 212, which is a sub-side control device.

(22) In the first modification of the first embodiment, the main control device 81 sets the first fixed display time to the special time, and in response to this, the notification/production control device 82 or the display control device 212 Although the configuration is such that the columns Z1 to Z3 are re-varied, even though the main control device 81 sets the first fixed display time to normal time, the notification / effect control device 82 or the display control device 212 is unique. A configuration may be further added in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are determined to be changed again. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of re-variation, reduce the player's discomfort when re-variation is performed, or misunderstand it as a special performance and have excessive expectations. It is suppressed.

However, since the normal time is shorter than the special time, it may be difficult to secure time for re-fluctuation. Therefore, when re-fluctuation is executed while the first fixed display time is set to normal time, re-fluctuation is started before the start of fixed display, and if the first fixed display time is special time, It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the comparison is performed ahead of schedule. As a result, it is possible to secure an appropriate re-variation time, and it is possible to suppress inconveniences such as the game cycle ending in the middle of re-variation and the time to display the stop result displayed again is not properly secured. be done.

(23) In the first modification of the first embodiment, regardless of whether or not the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are to be changed again, the first finalized display time is uniformly special when the pending notice is executed. Although it is configured to be time, it may be configured not to set the first fixed display time as a special time if re-fluctuation is not performed even if the suspension notice is performed. In this case, the first fixed display time may be set to the normal time, but since it is necessary to secure time for the advance notice effect display that causes the bubble image to appear, the first fixed display time that can be set is shorter than the special time. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a second special time longer than the normal time is further provided and set to the second special time. In such a configuration, it is preferable that the main controller 81 determines whether or not to change the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 again.

(24) In the modified example 1 of the first embodiment, the destination is specified during the progress of the game round, and based on the result, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are suspended in the ongoing game round. In the case of stop display in the stop mode, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are always changed again regardless of the progress of the game round when the destination is specified, but the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are being displayed with high speed fluctuation. (Refer to FIG. 25 (c)) If the destination is specified, the re-variation is not executed, and the re-variation is performed only when the stop variation display is in progress or at least one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has been stopped. A variable configuration may also be used. In other words, the presence or absence of re-variation may be determined based on the progress of the game cycle, and re-variation may be executed when it is determined to execute re-variation. If it is determined not to execute the re-variation, the stop result stored in the register of the MPU 242 of the notification/production control device 82 (the stop result set at the start timing of the variable display) is rewritten to the suspension notice stop mode. , the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be stopped and displayed from the beginning in the stop mode of the suspension notice. Further, the determination of whether or not to execute the re-variation may be made based on the contents of the pending command (the command containing the information regarding the result of specifying the destination) transmitted from the main control device 81 and the timing of receiving the command. .

(25) In the first modified example of the first embodiment, when the first fixed display time is set to the special time and when it is set to the normal time or the reduced working time, the first stop display command includes Although the information contained therein is made different, the same information may be contained in these cases. That is, regardless of the setting result of the first fixed display time, the first stop display command includes at least information regarding the length of the first fixed display time, information regarding whether or not to execute the pending notice, and the start timing of the pending notice. may be configured to include information about

(26) In the modification 2 of the first embodiment, in the stop start time processing of FIG. Although it is configured to be executed at the start timing of the confirmation display on the main display unit 43, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to be executed at a timing before the start timing of the confirmation display, for example. That is, the timing for setting the first fixed display time may be any timing after the start of the variable display on the main display section 43 and before the start of the fixed display.

In addition, in the process of setting the variable display time for the time of complete loss in FIG. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be executed at a timing before the start timing of the variable display. That is, the execution timing of the determination process may be any timing after the start of the fixed display performed immediately before the variable display and before the start of the variable display.

(27) In the second modification of the first embodiment, the process of determining whether or not the special hold information is specified by the destination specification is performed both at the start of the variable display and at the start of the fixed display. However, only one of them may be configured. For example, by configuring to perform only at the start of the variable display, it is possible to set the variable display and the fixed display in the same game round as a special time, one of the variable display and the fixed display is the special time and the other is normal It is suitable when you want to avoid running out of time.

(28) In the modification 3 of the first embodiment, the special game round was illustrated, but this can also be applied to the structure of the normal game round described in the second embodiment.

(29) In the third modification of the first embodiment, the second information area 342 contains information about the first fixed display time. If it is easy to adjust the data value setting, it may be included in the first information area 341 .

(30) In the modification 3 of the first embodiment, the information about the first fixed display time is assigned to the least significant bit LB1, but may be assigned to the most significant bit LB8. In this case, the identification bits for identifying the first information area 341 (upper byte or preceding command) and the second information area 342 (lower byte or subsequent command) are In any case, it is preferable to use bits other than the most significant bit.

(31) In the above-described first embodiment, prior to the variable display of the pattern on the main display section 43, the variation command and the type command are transmitted from the main control device 81 to the notification/effect control device 82. However, the transmission may be performed after the variable display of the pattern is performed. For example, during the period in which the pattern display device 41 performs high-speed variation, the main control device 81 outputs a variation start command and a type command corresponding to the game turn in which the variation display is started. Just do it.

(32) In the above-described second embodiment, when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the fixed display time is set to be longer for any of the result of losing the lottery result, the opening result A, and the opening result B. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the fixed display time is lengthened only when the result is an outlier. That is, it may be configured such that the fixed display time is set based on the result of the winning lottery or the result of allocation of the open type. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity due to the lengthening of the period from the notification of the opening result to the opening of the electric accessory 34 and misunderstanding of the malfunction by the player.

(33) In the above second embodiment, when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the confirmation display time when the result of the general figure success or failure lottery is a lost result, and the confirmation display when the open result is A Although the time and the maximum fixed display time in the case of the opening result B are the same length, some of them may be different from others, or they may be different from each other. However, considering the reduction of the processing load on the main controller 81 and the saving of the amount of usage of the ROM 203, the configuration of the above embodiment is preferable.

(34) In the above-described second embodiment, both the result of the general-purpose lottery and the release type of the electric accessory 34 are notified, but only one of them may be notified. In addition, when notifying the open type of the electric accessory 34, it will also be the result of the general game winning lottery at the same time.

(35) In the second embodiment, the special display effect is a special effect when the electric accessory 34 is released in the first high winning support state when the support mode is the low frequency support mode. However, it may be configured to be executable even when the electric accessory 34 is opened and closed in the low winning support state. In this case, the special display effect is easier to perform in the first high prize support state than in the low prize support state, that is, when the support state of the electric accessory 34 is the first high prize support state, the special A configuration in which a display effect is performed may be employed. However, from the viewpoint of highlighting the first high winning support state and from the viewpoint of suppressing player confusion, the configuration of the above-described embodiment is preferable.

Further, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the special display effect may be performed even when the electric accessory 34 is released in the first high winning support state. In addition, since the high frequency support mode is a state in which the frequency of opening the electric accessory 34 is high in the first place, the electric accessory 34 is not opened in the first high winning support state when the support mode is the high frequency support mode. may be

(36) In the above-described second embodiment, in the two lottery systems of normal symbols and special symbols, the fixed display time of one of the normal symbols is changed based on the game state. 1 special design (symbols that are variably displayed based on winning one of the upper working port 33a and the lower working port 33b) and the second special design (one of the upper working port 33a and the lower working port 33b winning It can also be applied in relation to the symbol that is variably displayed based on). As such a configuration, a pachinko machine (so-called small winning RUSH machine) including more special losing results (so-called small winning) than complete losing results in the lottery result of the second special symbol can be mentioned.

In the above pachinko machine, a difference is provided in the degree of advantage of the game state depending on the length of the game time for one game round of the second special figure. Specifically, when the game state is to be in a disadvantageous state, the variation display time of the second special figure is made extremely long. As a result, the opening timing of the variable prize winning device 32 is greatly delayed from the time of winning the prize to the operation port, and the frequency of opening the variable prize winning device 32 per unit time is greatly reduced. Conversely, when the game state is to be in an advantageous state, by shortening the variable display time of the second special figure, the opening frequency of the variable winning device 32 per unit time is increased. By adopting such a configuration, even if the game ball is entered in the operation opening corresponding to the second special figure (hereinafter referred to as "second operation opening") under a disadvantageous state, the player is unlikely to receive a profit, It is a specification that makes it easier to receive profits only after winning the second operation opening under advantageous conditions. In addition, the fluctuation display time of the first special figure in the disadvantageous state is set to the same length of time as a general pachinko machine (shorter time than the fluctuation display of the second special figure in the disadvantageous state), and the disadvantageous state In the case of , it is possible to play a game by winning a game ball in the operation opening corresponding to the first special figure (hereinafter referred to as "first operation opening").

By the way, under the above configuration, when the game is in a disadvantageous state, the game ball may enter the second operation opening unintentionally. At this time, if the configuration is such that the game round of the first special figure is started after the game round of the second special figure is finished, the first special figure will be played until the game round of the second special figure is completed. The game round is not started, and the state in which the game cannot be progressed continues for a long time. Therefore, the above pachinko machine adopts a configuration of simultaneous variation so that the game round of the first special symbol can be executed even while the game round of the second special symbol is being executed. For this reason, in the same way as the situation that occurs between the normal symbol and the special symbol described in the second embodiment, in the case of a disadvantageous state, the second special symbol at the end of the game round of the first special symbol game round is being executed. Therefore, by making the fixed display time in the game round of the second special figure in the disadvantageous state longer than that in the advantageous state, the variable display time can be shortened accordingly, and the game can be played quickly. Termination can be supported.

In that case, it is preferable to extend the confirmation display time only when the result of the winning lottery of the second special figure is completely off. When the result of the winning lottery of the second special figure is the result of the special loss, the result corresponds to the result of opening the variable winning device 32, so the game round of the first special figure can be executed while this is fixedly displayed. This is because it is not appropriate to use

In addition, in a pachinko machine equipped with a small winning RUSH function, by including a special losing result in the lottery result of the 1st special game, the game round of the 1st special game whose lottery result is a special losing result While the game round) and the game round of the second special figure (the second game round) in which the lottery result is a special losing result are progressing at the same time, the first game round ends before the second game round. In some cases, the second game round can be forcibly terminated (compulsorily terminated in a state of being completely out). This is assumed to be the act of intentionally winning the second operation opening in a disadvantageous state, and playing the game by winning the first operation opening while waiting for the opening of the variable winning device 32 based on the winning. This is because It should be noted that the opening pattern of the variable winning device 32 is different between the second special figure and the first special figure even for the same special loss result, and in the former case, the game ball is variable in a manner in which it is possible to win or easy to win. While the winning device 32 is opened, in the latter case, the variable winning device 32 is opened in such a manner that the game ball cannot win a prize or is difficult to win compared to the case of the second special figure.

In the above case, when forcibly ending the second game cycle, the second game cycle is not forcibly terminated based on the end of the confirmed display of the first special figure, but the confirmed display of the first special figure is It is preferable that the second game cycle is forcibly terminated (starts confirmation display) based on the start of the second game cycle. For example, when there is a request to lengthen or shorten the fixed display time of the first game cycle, the former configuration delays the forced end timing depending on the length of the fixed display time, or makes it early. In the latter configuration, even if the length of the fixed display time is changed, the forced termination timing is suppressed from being affected, and the flexibility of the fixed display time can be improved.

(37) In the modification of the second embodiment, determination processing (step S4702 in FIG. 71) for determining whether or not it is determined to be a game pause, and processing for setting the fixed display time based on the result (step Although S4703) is configured to be performed when the variable display is started, it may be configured to be performed when the fixed display is started as in the first embodiment. That is, when it is determined that the game is paused during the variable display, the fixed display time may be shortened in the fixed display immediately after the variable display. By adopting such a configuration, the presence or absence of a game pause can be quickly reflected in the fixed display time (and the game time related to one game round), and the result of the general figure win-or-fail lottery and the opening of the electric accessory 34 It is possible to inform the player of the type more quickly. Further, with the above configuration, when it is determined that the game is restarted during the variable display, the final display time is returned to the time for the game in the final display immediately after the variable display. be able to. As a result, it is possible to further suppress the act of intentionally shortening the game time related to one game round of the normal game round while there is no intention to end the game.

(38) In the modified example of the second embodiment, the configuration in which the patterns of multiple lottery systems consisting of normal and special symbols fluctuate simultaneously was exemplified, but it is not limited to the configuration in which multiple lottery systems coexist. , even if a plurality of lottery systems coexist, they are not limited to the configuration in which they are varied simultaneously. For example, even in a configuration having only a single lottery system, when the game ends with the pending information remaining, the remaining pending information is quickly digested by the configuration of the above modification. , the effect that the next player can easily start the game can be obtained.

(39) In the modification of the second embodiment, it is determined that the shooting of the game ball is stopped, the special figure game round is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the special figure reservation information is not stored. Although it is determined that the game is paused when all of them are satisfied, the configuration is not limited to this, and it is determined that the game is paused when at least one of them is satisfied. may be

(40) In the modified example of the second embodiment, when determining whether or not the game is paused, it is determined whether or not the shooting of the game ball is stopped. Alternatively, in addition, it may be configured to determine whether or not the performance operation unit 75, the ball lending button, and the return button have been operated, or to refer to the operation history. In short, it is only necessary to determine whether or not the game is paused based on the operation status of the operation means that can be operated by the player.

(41) In the above-described third embodiment, when the front door frame 14 is opened, when the lower tray 72 is full, or when ball clogging occurs, an error is detected (predetermined abnormality occurs). ), a value is set in the error counter EK, an error flag is set, and error processing is performed. However, the object of the error is not limited to the above. For example, it may be that the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11, that the inner frame 13 is opened, or that the top tray 71 is full. Further, it is not necessary to treat any of the above events as error targets, and one or more of them may be treated as error targets. For example, the opening of the front door frame 14 and the filling of the lower tray 72 may be treated as error events, while the occurrence of clogged balls may not be treated as an error event.

(41) In the third embodiment, the error counter EK and the error flag are set to reduce the progress speed of the game cycle, but the events for which the progress speed is reduced are also the above. is not limited to For example, the firing stop switch of the firing handle 54 may be operated. The firing stop switch is a switch that prevents the game ball from being fired while the firing handle 54 is being operated. Further, a sensor for detecting the remaining game balls on the upper tray 71 is provided, and based on the fact that the main control device 81 grasps that the number of remaining game balls on the upper tray 71 is less than a predetermined number by the sensor, the advancing speed is determined. may be reduced.

(42) In the above-described third embodiment, the game progress speed is reduced by extending the first confirmation display time. Both the display time and the second fixed display time may be extended, the variable display time may be extended, or a combination of these may be used to reduce the progress speed.

(43) In the above-described third embodiment, the configuration is such that the first fixed display time of the game cycle that is executed when the error counter EK is greater than 0 or when the error flag is set is extended. A configuration may be adopted in which the first fixed display time of part of the game rounds that are carried out in the situation is extended. For example, it may be configured to extend or not extend the first confirmation display time at intervals of a predetermined number of times (for example, once), or extend if the predetermined result (for example, the result is out) in the above situation However, if the result is different from the predetermined result (for example, the jackpot result), it may be extended. Also, various counters (C1, C2, C3, CS, etc.) for judging the success or failure of the game rounds executed in the above situation may be used to determine the game rounds to be extended and the game rounds not to be extended.

(44) In the third embodiment, the error counter EK is set to a value (CRN+1 or CRN) corresponding to the common pending number CRN at the time when an error event occurs. The error counter EK may be set to a value corresponding to the common pending number CRN at the time when a predetermined period (for example, 10 sec) has elapsed from the timing of occurrence, or the common pending number CRN at the time when the error event occurred. A value obtained by adding a predetermined number larger than 1 to the error counter EK may be set. Alternatively, a value may be set according to the common pending number CRN at the timing when the game is stopped after the occurrence of an error (for example, the timing when the firing handle 54 is returned to the initial position or the timing when the firing handle 54 is released). Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a value is set according to the common number of reservations CRN at the timing when a predetermined period has passed since the timing when the game was stopped. Assuming that the common number CRN after a predetermined period has passed, for example, it is possible to take into account the time lag until the game ball shot just before the error occurs enters the upper working hole 33a as the starting ball entry part. It is possible.

(45) In the third embodiment, the time set as the first fixed display time is not limited to the above (5.0 sec), and may be longer or shorter than this. In addition, the time set for the first fixed display time may be uniform and not the same time. A long time is likely to be set when the error event occurs shortly after the error event occurs. A configuration may be adopted in which the set time becomes shorter as the time elapses, or vice versa. Based on the premise that the game result of the game round that is being performed at the time the error event occurs is most likely to be overlooked, the first game round that is being performed at the time the error event occurs It can be said that the configuration in which the fixed display time is the longest is preferable.

(46) In the third embodiment, the length of the first fixed display time may be determined in relation to the elapsed time from the occurrence of the error. For example, it can be said that the shorter the period from the occurrence of the error event to the start timing of the first confirmation display, the higher the possibility that the error is still being dealt with and the game result is overlooked. Therefore, if the first fixed display time is set longer as the elapsed time is shorter in relation to the elapsed time from the occurrence of the error event as described above, the possibility of overlooking the game result is reduced. It is possible to reduce it further.

(47) In the third embodiment, the length of the first fixed display time may be determined in relation to the variable display time of each game round. For example, if the first fixed display time is set to be short for game rounds in which a long variable display time is set, and is set to be long in game rounds to which a short variable display time is set, As in (46) above, it is possible to set the first fixed display time in relation to the elapsed time from the occurrence of the error, and in setting it in relation to the elapsed time, it is necessary to actually measure the elapsed time. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced. In addition, the first fixed display time is set to be long for game rounds in which a long variable display time is set, and the first fixed display time is set to be short in game rounds to which a short variable display time is set. good too. Based on the premise that the longer the variable display time is set, the higher the possibility of a big win result, the game results of the game rounds that are likely to attract the player's high interest can be obtained by doing as described above. It is possible to suitably avoid an overlooked event.

(48) In the above-described third embodiment, the configuration is such that the delay effect is performed, but it may be configured such that the fixed display time is simply extended and the delay effect is not performed. In particular, when an error occurs, processing for recovery will be performed, so it is believed that a configuration that does not add new processing for presentation will greatly contribute to early recovery.

(49) In the above-described third embodiment, when an error event occurs, the configuration may be such that the error event occurrence information is output to, for example, a hall computer as an external output. In this case, when the error counter EK is greater than 0, or when the error flag is set, in a situation where the first fixed display time is extended, the error event occurrence information is continuously output. , based on the fact that the error counter EK becomes 0 or the error flag is erased, if it is configured to stop the output of the occurrence information of the error event, the manager of the game hall can set the first fixed display time It is possible to clearly grasp the situation where the extension of the period is being carried out.

(50) In the above-described third and fourth embodiments, the position of the character provided in the game machine may be displaced when the first fixed display time is extended. That is, it is a configuration in which a delayed effect is produced through positional displacement of the role. is arranged at a different second position, a delay effect is performed. The first position and the second position may be different positions to the extent that they can be visually identified by the player or the manager of the game hall. , may be arranged at a position that is invisible or difficult to be visually recognized by the player or the manager of the game hall, and may be made visible or easily visible by displacing to the second position.

(51) The delay effect in the above third and fourth embodiments is not limited to the above mode, and for example, the background color is changed, or the brightness of the display screen 41a or the game board 24 is changed (reduced). Alternatively, it may be configured to be performed by another display lamp unit 63 or the like.

(52) In the above-described third and fourth embodiments, when the first fixed display time is extended, the delay effect is performed during the first fixed display time. The delay effect may be performed during the second fixed display time, or may be performed during the variable display time and the second fixed display time, or during the second fixed display time, or not during the first fixed display time.

(53) In the modified example of the third embodiment, the configuration is such that the error flag is erased when the firing handle 54 is operated. It may be configured to erase the error flag based on the touch of the player's hand, etc., although the operation is not performed, or other operation units of the gaming machine (operation buttons for performance, ball rental buttons, etc.) may be configured to erase the error flag when is operated or when a hand or the like touches the operation unit. In addition, when the game ball is launched, the game ball is launched and enters a predetermined ball entry portion, the game ball payout condition is satisfied, the winning/failure judgment is performed, etc. The configuration may be such that the error flag is erased when the condition is satisfied (the condition has already been satisfied).

(54) In the modified example of the third embodiment, the error flag is erased when the game start operation is performed on the condition that the error is resolved. The error flag may be erased when the game start operation is performed even if the game is not performed.

(55) In the modification of the third embodiment, the error flag is not set even if an error event occurs when a game operation is being performed, and the game operation is not being performed. The error flag may be set as a condition.

(56) In the above-described fourth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the player is notified that the operation flag is set so that the player can grasp it. For example, the presence or absence of the operation flag may be notified by light emission control of a light emitting unit such as an LED built in the operation button 77 or provided near the operation button 77, or may be displayed on the display screen 41a. may be

(57) In the fourth embodiment, when the operation flag is set, the time set as the first fixed display time may be longer or shorter than 30 seconds. Alternatively, the length of time to be extended may be set as a predetermined time (30 sec) in advance, and the extension of the predetermined time may be allocated to each piece of pending information by dividing the stored pending information. Specifically, when the common pending number CRN is 2, the predetermined time may be allocated between 15 sec and 15 sec and set as the first fixed display time for each game round.

(58) In the modification of the fourth embodiment, the variable display time of the game cycle is set as the first fixed display time. time to end) may be set as the first fixed display time.

(59) In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the first fixed display time of the game round resulting in a big hit is set as the variable display time of the game round, but the game result is not limited to this. However, not only the game round resulting in the game result, but also the first fixed display time of other game rounds may be set as the variable display time of the game round. For example, when a game round that results in a big hit is specified by the process for holding notice, the variation display time of the game round that is performed before the game round that results in the big hit is set to the first time. It may be configured to be set as a fixed display time. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the performance from being overlooked in the configuration in which the continuous performance is generated over a plurality of game rounds by the suspension notice as in the first embodiment.

In addition, as the first fixed display time of the game round resulting in the big win, the total time of the variable display time of the game round resulting in the big win and the variable display time of the game round performed before that. It is good also as a structure which sets. In this case, as the effect during the first confirmation display, in addition to the effect of the game round resulting in the big win, the effect of the game round to be executed before that may be performed.

(60) In the above-described fifth embodiment, when the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode and results in a normal jackpot, the variable display of the symbols ends early. As the game round in which the support mode ends, the variable display of the symbols may end early in the predetermined number of game rounds (50th game round).

(61) In the fifth embodiment, when the high-frequency support mode advantageous to the player ends, the pattern fluctuation display ends early. is terminated, the above configuration may be applied.

(62) In the above-described fifth embodiment, the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol row Z2 is changed to end the fluctuation display of symbols earlier, but the fluctuation speeds of the other symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are also changed. Alternatively, instead of changing the speed of variation, a configuration may be adopted in which the variation display of the symbols is terminated by suddenly stopping.

(63) In the above fifth embodiment, when the number of holdings on the side of the second ball-entering section is small, the pattern fluctuation display is terminated early. Then, it may be determined whether or not to end the variable display of symbols early. For example, when the hold information on the side of the first ball-entering section is stored, but the hold information on the side of the second ball-entering section is not stored, the variable display of the symbols is quickly terminated and the second ball-entering section is stored. Even if the holding information on the side of the club is not stored, if the holding information on the side of the first ball-entering club is not stored, the variable display of symbols may not be terminated early.

(64) In the fifth embodiment, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 134a may be taken into account to determine the end timing of the variable display of the symbols. For example, if the electric accessory 134a is immediately opened, it can be said that the holding information on the second ball entrance side can be quickly replenished. It can be said that it is difficult to replenish the holding information on the 2nd ball side. Therefore, the opening timing of the electric accessory 134a is grasped, and if the opening timing is the first timing, the fluctuation display of the pattern is finished at the timing corresponding to the first timing, and the opening timing is earlier than the first timing. If the second timing is later than the first timing, the variable display of the symbols may be ended at a timing corresponding to the second timing and earlier than the first timing. Also, the variable display of the symbols may be terminated in accordance with the timing of opening the electric accessory 134a. For example, the end timing of the variable display may be set such that the game ball is launched at the timing when the variable display of the symbols is completed so that the ball enters the second operation opening 134 .

(65) Needless to say, in the above-described fifth embodiment, the first driving notification effect and the second driving notification effect are not limited to those described above.

(66) In the fifth embodiment, the variation pattern is set based on the number of holdings on the side of the second ball entry section at the start of the game turn that results in a normal jackpot in the high frequency support mode, Although the effect of the game round is performed according to the variation pattern, the variation pattern may be changed in the middle of the game round. For example, at the start timing of deceleration processing of the middle symbol row, the holding number on the side of the second ball entering section is grasped again, and the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol row Z2 is set according to the holding number. By doing so, when the holding information on the side of the second ball-entering section is acquired during the game round and the holding information is supplemented, it is possible to perform a normal effect. Therefore, even if the number of games held at the start of the game round is small, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped first.

(67) In the above fifth embodiment, when the hold information on the side of the first special figure and the hold information on the side of the second special figure are stored, the second special figure than the hold information on the side of the first special figure A configuration of so-called priority elimination may be applied in which the hold information on the side of the drawing is preferentially targeted for the suitability determination. More specifically, the reservation information on the second special figure side acquired after the reservation information on the first special figure side is subject to the judgment before the reservation information on the first special figure side. may be As described above, the distribution table for the first ball-entering section and the distribution table for the second ball-entering section have different advantages, and the second special figure side is more advantageous for the player. Where it is, it is not preferable for the player that the hold information on the first special figure side is judged in the high frequency support mode in which the second special figure side reservation information is likely to be acquired. Therefore, by applying the above priority digestion configuration, it is possible to postpone the hold information on the first special figure side in the high frequency support mode, and when it is notified early that the result will be a normal jackpot In addition, it is possible to easily acquire the reservation information on the second special figure side which is advantageous for the player.

(68) In the configuration for extending the first fixed display time as in the modification of the fifth embodiment, if the hold information is acquired (replenished) during the first fixed display time, the set Alternatively, the processing may be terminated without waiting for the first fixed display time to elapse.

(69) In the sixth embodiment described above, the larger the number of reservations, the shorter the first fixed display time. V winning may be made easier to occur.

(70) In the sixth embodiment, the operation of the shutter 358 in the variable prize winning device 132 determines whether or not the V winning occurs. can be realized. For example, when the accessory is provided upstream of the variable winning device 132 in the game area PE and the accessory is arranged at the first position, the game ball is guided to the variable winning device 132, When arranged at the second position different from the first position, the configuration is such that the game ball is not guided to the variable winning device 132 or is difficult to be guided. Then, the operation of the accessory is configured to start from the timing at which the confirmation notification in the game round is started, and the timing at which the accessory is placed at the first position is the opening of the variable winning device 132 in the opening/closing execution mode. The time from the fixed notification to the opening timing of the variable prize winning device 132 is adjusted so that it overlaps or does not overlap with the timing. As a result, even if the opening/closing execution mode is entered or the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 132 is performed, it is possible to create a situation in which winning of the variable winning device 132 is likely to occur and a situation in which winning of the variable winning device 132 is unlikely to occur. .

(71) In the sixth embodiment, the V winning rate is changed based on the value of the common hold number CRN. A configuration may be adopted in which one of the pieces of information is used to vary the V winning rate. For example, if the game board 124 of the fifth embodiment is applied, the holding information on the second ball entrance side is hardly acquired during the low probability mode (low frequency support mode), and the high probability mode (high frequency support mode), it becomes difficult to acquire the holding information on the first ball entering section side. Therefore, for example, during the low probability mode (low frequency support mode), the first fixed display time is set so that the V winning rate varies depending on the number of pending information on the first ball entrance side, and the high probability mode (high frequency support mode) During the support mode), the first fixed display time may be set so that the V winning rate varies depending on the number of pending information on the second ball entering section side.

(72) In the sixth embodiment, when the number of common reservations CRN is 7 or 8 during the high probability mode, the first fixed display time is set by lottery. The length of the first fixed display time may be determined according to the number of holds, such that 15.0 sec is set in the case of 8, and 0.5 sec is set in the case of 8. In this case, as long as the common pending number CRN is 8 (maximum number) and the result is a jackpot, a V prize will be generated, and the pending number and the consecutive house rate are completely linked. can do. In such a configuration, it is preferable to make it more difficult to acquire the hold information during the high-frequency support mode than the above so as not to cause an Eternal Renso. Specifically, the frequency of the electric accessary 34 being in the open state is made lower than the above, or the fluctuation display time during reach non-occurrence during the high frequency support mode is made shorter than the above, or high A configuration is conceivable in which the variable display time at the occurrence of reach during the frequency support mode is made shorter than the above.

(73) In the seventh embodiment, adjusting the first confirmation display time of the special losing result and the opening time of the opening/closing execution mode based on the first type jackpot result B and the second type jackpot result B, respectively. , the fixed display time of the special losing result and the sum of the fixed display time and the opening time of these jackpot results are made to be the same length, but the first fixed display time adjustment, the opening time adjustment, and the second fixed display time adjustment The relationship between the special losing result and these jackpot results may be defined by adjusting each of the two fixed display times or by adjusting one or more combinations.

(74) Needless to say, in the seventh embodiment, the chance effects are not limited to those described above.

(75) In the seventh embodiment, when the result is a special loss, the first fixed display time is set based on the relationship between the first type jackpot result B and the second type jackpot result B. However, it is also possible to set the above-described first fixed display time at a predetermined ratio in the case of the normal outlier result. Specifically, for example, in the case of a normal failure result, a predetermined lottery may be held, and when the lottery is won, the first fixed display time may be set.

(76) In each of the above embodiments, the number of winning balls (“1”) based on the ball entering the second ball entering portion 33e or the second operating port 134 However, it is not limited to this. The number of prize balls based on the entry into the second ball entry portion 33e and the second operating opening 134 is equal to or greater than the number of prize balls based on the entry into the first ball entry portion 33d and the first operation opening 133. It is also possible to set

However, as already explained, setting the number of prize balls to "1" based on the number of balls entering the second ball entering portion 33e or the second operating port 134 shown in the above embodiment accelerates the progress of the game. Therefore, in emphasizing the difference between the normal game state and the high certainty game state, it has a close relationship with shortening of the variable display time and the like. If the number of prize balls entered into the second ball entry portion 33e or the second actuation opening 134 is set to "2", "3", . obtain. For this reason, when trying to suppress the granting of excessive benefits, it is necessary to devise ways to reduce the ball entry rate (holding information acquisition rate), or reduce the shortening of the variable display time and fixed display time. It is assumed that measures such as This is a factor that hinders the speeding up of game rounds. Therefore, it is preferable to set the number of prize balls based on the number of balls entering the second ball entering portion 33e or the second operation opening 134 to "1" so that the increase in the number of game balls in the high probability game state can be suppressed.

(77) In each of the above-described embodiments, by devising the structure of the operating port unit 33, a game ball that enters the upper operating port 33a is directed to either the first ball entering portion 33d or the second ball entering portion 33e. While the game ball entering the lower operating opening 33b is configured to enter only the second ball entering portion 33e, this may be changed as follows. Specifically, the lower working port 33b and the associated electric accessory 34 may be provided separately from the upper working port 33a, and a structure corresponding to the second ball entry portion 33e may be added to the lower working port 33b. good. That is, the game ball entering the upper operating port 33a can enter either the first ball entering portion 33d or the second ball entering portion 33e, while the game ball entering the lower operating port 33b is provided separately. A configuration may be adopted in which the ball is entered into the second ball entering portion provided. In such a configuration, the number of winning balls when a ball enters the first ball entering portion 33d or the second ball entering portion 33e through the upper operation port 33a is set to "3", and the added second ball entering portion It is also possible to set the number of prize balls to "1" when a ball is entered through the lower operation port 33b.

(78) In each of the above embodiments, the notification/production control device 82 and the display control device 212 are provided separately, but one control device that integrates the functions of these control devices 82 and 212 may be provided. .

(79) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a jackpot is obtained when a coin is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, a mahball, or the like.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Further, the gaming machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like are not limited.

The invention described in each feature group below is "Some game machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays patterns. Triggered by the winning of the selected operation opening, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and the variable display of patterns is started. , a specific pattern combination is stopped and displayed, and the game state shifts to a specific game state (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-074175). There is room.” This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing a prize winning process for the operation opening by the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the acquisition means;
Attachment determination means (a function of executing a correctness determination process by the main controller 81) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
A benefit granting means (main controller 81) capable of granting a benefit to a player based on the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result indicating that the special information corresponds to the grant information. function to execute game state transition processing by) and
pattern display means (main display unit 43, pattern display device 41) capable of variably displaying patterns;
One game round is to cause the pattern display means to start variable display of the pattern based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and to stop and display the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. , display control means for controlling the display of the picture display means (function for executing game turn control processing by the main control device 81);
with
The display control means is
stop display period setting means for setting the stop display period for the stop display (function for executing stop start processing by the main controller 81);
stop display execution means (function for executing a final display process by the main controller 81) for executing the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means;
with
The stop display period setting means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the variable display or during the stop display immediately thereafter, sets the stop display period of the stop display immediately after the variable display to a first period (a first fixed display time is specified). and when the predetermined condition is not met during the variable display or during the stop display immediately after that, the stop display period of the stop display immediately after that is the first period. A game machine characterized by comprising means for setting a different second period (fixed display time when the first fixed display time is set to normal time).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make the stop display period of the game round different depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is established in the middle of the game round. As a result, it is possible to change the period from the start of the variable display of the pattern to the end of the stop display of the pattern (game time for one game round) according to the situation change occurring during the game round. Become.

By the way, in recent gaming machines, in general, patterns are variably displayed based on a predetermined variable display period, and once the variable display starts, the period cannot be changed. For this reason, for example, when there is a request to change the game time of a game round in the middle of the game round, if an attempt is made to respond by changing the variable display period, the design of the game machine has to be renewed. . Even if such a change could be realized, during the variable display, a visual or auditory game effect is usually performed in accordance with the variable display period in addition to the variable display of the pattern. , In some cases, these game effects are performed in a composite manner. For this reason, in preparation for the case where the variable display period is changed during variable display, it is necessary to have a configuration in which various effects adjustments can be executed during the variable display, which causes the inconvenience of greatly increasing the burden of designing the effects. be. In this regard, in this configuration, the stop display period is used to change the game time of the game cycle. As a result, it is possible to change the game time for one game round while keeping the variable display period as a predetermined period. Moreover, since the original purpose of the stop display is to show the result of grant determination, there are many cases where the game effect is not performed during the stop display period, or even if it is performed, it is simple. For this reason, even if the stop display period is changed, the adjustment burden in terms of presentation can be lightened, and the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. Thus, according to this configuration, it is possible to change the game time of a game round in the middle of the game round while suppressing inconvenience in game design. As a result, it is possible to increase the effect of the game by allowing the sudden addition of game effects, or to change the tempo of the progress of the game, thereby improving the amusement.

In characteristic A1, "the stop display period setting means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the variable display or during the stop display immediately after that, sets the stop display period of the stop display immediately after the variable display to the first "Means for setting a second period different from the period" is replaced by "the stop display period setting means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game round, sets the stop display period of the game round to the first period (first determination fixed display time when the display time is set to a special time), and if the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the game round, the stop display period of the game round is set to a second period different from the first period (second period 1 fixed display time is set to normal time)".

Feature A2. The feature A1, wherein the stop display period setting means includes stop display setting means for setting the stop display period at a timing after the start of the variable display and before the end of the stop display. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to change the length of the stop display period according to the change in the situation after the start of the variable display. At this time, in this configuration, the stop display period is set at the latest before the end of the stop display, so the stop display can be executed properly. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to change the game period for one game round while suppressing the occurrence of inconvenience in the execution of the stop display.

Feature A3. A feature characterized in that the stop display setting means includes means for setting a stop display period corresponding to the start timing of the stop display (function for executing stop start time processing by the main controller 81). The gaming machine described in A2.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to reflect a situation change that occurs before the start timing of the stop display in the length of the stop display period. As a result, it is possible to cope with a situation change that occurs at the end of the variable display, and it is possible to provide an optimum configuration when changing the game period of one game round in the middle.

Feature A4. During the stop display, an effect control means (a function of executing stop start processing by the notification/effect control device 82) is provided for controlling the game effect to be performed by a predetermined effect means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3.

While the length of the stop display period can be changed according to the change in the situation during the game, with the above configuration, it is possible to add or reduce the game effect according to the change in the situation during the stop display. Become. In other words, it is possible to use the stop display period as a period for adjusting effects, making it easier to adjust effects than when additions or reductions are made in variable displays where game effects are likely to occur frequently. it becomes possible to

Regarding the "predetermined effecting means" of feature A4, the "picture display means" may be configured to serve as it, or the role may be played by a means different from the "picture display means". .

Feature A5. The first period is longer than the second period,
The effect control means is characterized by comprising means for performing control such that a predetermined game effect (announcement display effect in which a bubble image appears) is performed when the stop display period is the first period. A gaming machine described in A4.

According to the above configuration, by setting the stop display period to the first period on the longer side, it is possible to execute a predetermined game effect. . As a result, it is possible to expand production opportunities and enhance production effects.

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to feature A4 or A5, wherein the effect control means includes means for ending the game effect performed during the stop display by the end of the stop display.

For example, if the game effect continues even after the stop display ends (after the game round ends), there is a concern that the player will have difficulty recognizing the boundary between the subsequent game rounds. In addition, overlapping the game effects to be executed in the next game round may reduce the distinguishability between the effects, or hinder the player's understanding of the effects. In this regard, according to the present configuration, the game effect performed during the stop display is finished by the end of the stop display. It is possible to improve the

Feature A7. a first control means (main control device 81) including the display control means;
A second control means (notification / production control device 82, display control device 212) including the production control means,
The first control means sends a predetermined command (first stop display command) including period information corresponding to the first period or the second period to the second control means in correspondence with the start timing of the stop display. The gaming machine according to any one of features A4 to A6, further comprising means for outputting to (a function of executing processing for confirmation display by the main control device 81).

According to the above configuration, the first control means is responsible for controlling the variable display and stop display of the pattern, and the second control means is responsible for controlling the execution of the game effect, so that the load of the control process can be distributed. This makes it possible to suppress concentration of loads compared to the case where each of the above controls is performed by a single control device. On the other hand, the second control means has no choice but to function as a subordinate device of the first control means due to the configuration in which the game effect is executed on the premise of the stop display. It is configured to output commands. Therefore, the reception timing of the predetermined command can be grasped as the start timing of the stop display, and the second control means can easily grasp the start timing of the stop display compared to the case where the command is output in advance. . Moreover, since the command includes period information corresponding to the first period or the second period, it is possible to grasp the length of the stop display period at the same time. As a result, the number of times commands are sent and received during stop display is reduced, and the load on both control means can be reduced.

Note that the feature A7 is defined as "having the first pattern as the pattern,
When a game cycle is executed, a second pattern different from the first pattern is variably displayed on the pattern display means or a display means different from the pattern display means, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is performed. A second pattern display control means (function for executing a variable display control process by the notification / effect control device 82) for performing display control of the pattern display means or the different display means so as to stop display,
a first control means (main control device 81) including the display control means;
A second control means (notification/production control device 82, display control device 212) including the display control means for the second pattern,
The first control means sends a predetermined command (first stop display command) including period information corresponding to the first period or the second period to the second control means in correspondence with the start timing of the stop display. (the function of executing the confirmation display process by the main control device 81) is provided".

Feature A8. When the stop display period is set to be the first period, the stop display period setting means sets the first period to be longer than the second period and is longer than the stop display period for which the stop display period is to be set. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, further comprising means for setting a period shorter than the period of variable display executed immediately before.

If the stop display period is lengthened unnecessarily, the impression that the waiting time from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display is likely to be long, and there is a risk of inducing a sense of dullness. In this regard, in this configuration, even when the stop display period is set to the longer first period, the period is set to be shorter than the variable display period. As a result, it is possible to proceed with the game at a good tempo even when the stop display period is long, and it is possible to ensure ease of play.

Feature A9. The stop display period has a variable period (one of the first fixed display time and the second fixed display time) in which a period corresponding to the first period or the second period can be set, and a fixed length. A fixed period (one of the first fixed display time and the second fixed display time) is included, and after one of the variable period and the fixed period elapses, the other of the variable period and the fixed period starts. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, characterized in that:

In the above configuration, since a fixed period of a fixed length is included in the stop display period, it is possible to suitably secure the minimum required stop display period even if the length of the stop display period is variable. becomes.

Feature A10. In the stop display period, the first stop display period (one of the first fixed display time and the second fixed display time) set based on the state of establishment of the predetermined condition and the state of establishment of the predetermined condition are irrelevant. and a second stop display period (the other of the first fixed display time and the second fixed display time) set to , and after either the first stop display period or the second stop display period elapses, The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, wherein the other of the first stop display period and the second stop display period is started.

According to the above configuration, in addition to the first stop display period whose length changes depending on whether the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second stop display period is set regardless of whether the predetermined condition is satisfied. . As a result, it is possible to make complex adjustments by setting the second stop display period as a fixed period to secure the minimum stop display period, or by making it a variable period that can be set based on conditions other than the predetermined conditions. Thus, it is possible to expand the range of selection compared to the case where the stop display period consists of only the first stop display period. In particular, when the first stop display period starts after the second stop display period elapses, the stop display period can be changed even after the start of the stop display, and the special information is generated during the stop display. It is also possible to deal with

Feature A11. The stop display period setting means
a first means for setting the stop display period to the second period;
a second means for changing the stop display period set to the second period by the first means to the first period based on the establishment of the predetermined condition;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the stop display period set as the second period is changed to the first period after the fact. In this case, for example, even if there is a problem that the stop display period is not set to the second period, the previously set first period can remain, so it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the stop display itself cannot be executed. become.

Feature A12. Lottery means (function for executing winning/losing determination processing by the main controller 81) for performing lottery processing based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a prize at the operation opening);
Based on the fact that the lottery process is performed by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the main display unit 43, the pattern display device 41) starts a game rotation operation, and the result of the lottery process is regarded as a notification result. A game round control means (a game round control process by the main controller 81) for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the game round operation is performed with the end of the game round operation as one game round. function) and
with
The game round control means is characterized in that it comprises means for defining a game period for one game round in the middle of a game round (function for executing stop start processing by the main control device 81). game machine.

According to the above configuration, since the game period of the game round can be defined in the middle of the game round, adjustment such as lengthening or shortening the above-mentioned game period can be made during the progress of the game round. can be done. As a result, when the game effect is performed using the game period, sudden addition or deletion of the game effect can be allowed, and the flexibility of the effect adjustment can be enhanced.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the features A1 to A11 may be applied to the feature A12. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature A13. Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing a prize winning process for the operation opening by the main control device 81);
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit set as a plurality of numbers;
determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the added information, and if a plurality of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination for the
A benefit granting means (main controller 81) capable of granting a benefit to a player based on the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result indicating that the special information corresponds to the grant information. function to execute game state transition processing by) and
A motion for a game cycle is started based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is used to indicate that the motion for a game cycle is terminated. As one game cycle control means (by the main controller 81) for controlling a predetermined notification means so that the game cycle operation of each game cycle is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A function to execute game round control processing),
with
The game round control means is means for prescribing the timing at which the game round operation of the next game round is started in the middle of the game round (execution of the stop start processing by the main controller 81). A game machine characterized by having a function to play.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to specify the start timing of the next game round in the middle of the game round, so that the start timing can be delayed or brought forward. As a result, when performing game effects using game rounds, sudden addition or deletion of game effects can be allowed, and the flexibility of the adjustment of effects can be enhanced.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the features A1 to A11 may be applied to the feature A13. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

It should be noted that the "predetermined condition" in feature A1 does not necessarily have to be a single condition, and may be composed of a plurality of conditions. For this reason, for example, in a configuration having a first condition and a second condition as conditions, the case where both of them are met is regarded as the case where the predetermined condition is met, and the case where at least one of them is not met. can be interpreted as the case where the predetermined condition is not satisfied. At that time, the case where both the first condition and the second condition are met is not necessarily limited to the case where those conditions are met at the same time. It may be a step-by-step process such as the establishment of Furthermore, it is also possible to interpret the fact that a certain specific condition is not satisfied as a "predetermined condition". In other words, the case where the specific condition is not established can be interpreted as the case where the predetermined condition is established, and the case where the specific condition is established can be interpreted as the case where the predetermined condition is not established. This also applies to the features A2 to A13.

Feature A14. Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing a prize winning process for the operation opening by the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the acquisition means;
Attachment determination means (a function of executing a correctness determination process by the main controller 81) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
A benefit granting means (main controller 81) capable of granting a benefit to a player based on the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result indicating that the special information corresponds to the grant information. function to execute game state transition processing by) and
a pattern display means (main display unit 43) capable of variably displaying a pattern;
The pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and stops and displays a stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. Display control means for performing display control (function for executing game round control processing by the main control device 81);
with
a first control means (main controller 81) including at least the display control means;
Second control means (notification/effect control device 82) for controlling a game based on commands output from the first control means;
with
The display control means is
stop display period setting means for setting the stop display period for the stop display (function for executing stop start processing by the main controller 81);
stop display execution means (function for executing a final display process by the main controller 81) for executing the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means;
with
A game characterized in that the first control means includes means for outputting a predetermined command (variation command) output based on the variable display including information on a stop display period. machine.

According to the above configuration, since the variable display command output based on the variable display includes the information about the stop display period and is output, it is possible to omit the dedicated command for the stop display period. It is possible to reduce the number of commands. In addition, since the command for variable display is also used as a notification command for the stop display period, the number of command exchanges between the first control means and the second control means can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the load of

In the feature A14, "predetermined command to be output based on the variable display" is replaced with "predetermined command including information on the mode of the variable display" or "predetermined command including information on the mode of the variable display". Alternatively, it may be read as "predetermined command to be output based on the fact that the variable display is performed".

Feature A15. The predetermined command includes a first information area (first information area 341) containing information about the type of the command, and a second information area (second information area 342) containing information about the variable display period. is set and
The gaming machine according to feature A14, wherein the first control means includes means for outputting information relating to the stop display period in the second information area.

According to the above configuration, since the information about the stop display period is included in the second information area and output, it is possible to suppress the generation of surplus bits and facilitate harmony with other commands.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing a prize winning process for the operation opening by the main control device 81);
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit set as a plurality of numbers;
determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the added information, and if a plurality of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination for the
A benefit granting means (main controller 81) capable of granting a benefit to a player based on the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result indicating that the special information corresponds to the grant information. function to execute game state transition processing by) and
pattern display means (main display unit 43, pattern display device 41) capable of variably displaying patterns;
One game round is to cause the pattern display means to start variable display of the pattern based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and to stop and display the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. , display control means for controlling the display of the pattern display means so that each game round is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means (function for executing game round control processing by the main controller 81; )When,
information corresponding to a determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to determination by the provision determining means, before the predetermined special information becomes subject to the determination; destination identification means (function for executing confirmation processing for holding notice by main controller 81) that identifies at the timing of
with
The display control means is
stop display period setting means for setting the stop display period for the stop display (function for executing stop start processing by the main controller 81);
stop display execution means (function for executing a final display process by the main controller 81) for executing the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means;
with
The stop display period setting means sets the stop display period of the stop display immediately after the stop display when the stop display is specified by the stop display during the variable display or immediately after that by the stop display period of the stop display. A game machine characterized by comprising means for setting based on a specified result (a function for executing stop start processing by the main controller 81).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to correlate the determination result of the addition determination for the special information to be previously specified and the stop display period of the game cycle. As a result, the length of the stop display period can be utilized as a suggestive effect such as the result of the specified destination, and the effect variations can be diversified. Moreover, in the above configuration, when the target is specified during the game cycle, the stop display period of the game cycle is set based on the result of the target specification, so that the contents of the special information are quickly reflected in the game cycle. be able to. For example, in a configuration in which the destination identification means performs destination identification during the progress of a game round and the result is reflected in the next and subsequent game rounds, the specific game round targeted for the destination identification is the game round in progress. If it is the next game round, it becomes difficult to secure an opportunity to change the stop display period. In this respect, according to the present configuration, since the stop display period can be changed including the game round in progress, it is possible to stably secure the change opportunity. In particular, in a configuration in which the stop display period is used as a suggestive effect, it is possible to expand opportunities for executing the effect and improve interest.

In addition, in feature B1, "the stop display period setting means sets the stop display period of the stop display immediately after the stop display when the first specifying means performs the specification during the variable display or during the stop display immediately after that. based on the identification result of the preceding identification means", and "the stop display period setting means, when the identification is performed by the preceding identification means during the game round, stops the game round means for setting the display period based on the specified result of the preceding specifying means".

Feature B2. The display control means comprises destination identification determination means (function for executing the process of step S1203 by the main controller 81) for determining whether or not the identification result of the destination identification means is a predetermined result,
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the stop display period setting means sets the stop display period based on the determination result of the destination identification determination means.

For example, in the case where the setting of the stop display period is reflected as it is each time the destination identification means performs the destination identification, if the destination identification is performed a plurality of times in one game round, the game will be stopped. The setting of the display period is forced to be redone, which may lead to an increase in the processing load. In this regard, in the present configuration, the processing for specifying the destination and the processing for determining the result thereof are performed separately, and the stop display period is set based on the result of the latter. At this time, by executing the determination process in accordance with the setting timing of the stop display period, the stop display period can be collectively set, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature B3. when it has already been determined that the identification result of the destination identification means is a predetermined result, the judgment processing in the judgment means for destination identification and the identification result of the destination identification means in the stop display period setting means The gaming machine according to feature B2, further comprising limiting means (a function of executing the processing of step S1202 by the main controller 81) for limiting at least one of the processing for setting the stop display period based on.

For example, in a configuration in which a suggestive effect suggesting the result of a previous specification or the like is performed over a plurality of game rounds, the game round in progress is subject to execution of the suggestive effect started from the previous game round. Sometimes. In such a case, if the stop display period is set based on the destination identification result that occurred during the game round, there is a risk that the setting will be changed or duplicated. In this regard, in this configuration, when it is already determined that the specified result of the destination specifying means is the predetermined result, the determination process by the determination means for destination specifying and the stop display period based on the result of specifying by the destination specifying means Since it is configured to limit at least one of the setting processes of , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of change and duplication of settings.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein even if the restriction is performed by the restriction means, the specification by the destination specification means is not restricted.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to continue the destination identification processing while restricting the determination processing by the destination identification determination means in order to suppress the setting change and duplication of the stop display period. As a result, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that even other game effects using the result of the previous specification are restricted, and it is possible to have a suitable configuration for diversifying and compounding the effects.

Feature B5. The stop display period setting means sets the stop display period to the first period (the first fixed display time) when the specified result of the destination specifying means is the first result (specification of information corresponding to the occurrence of a big win or reach). fixed display time when set to special time), and when the identification is not made by the destination identification means during the variable display or during the stop display immediately after that, or when the identification result of the destination identification means is the first result When the second result (specification of information corresponding to the out-of-normal result) is different from the The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, further comprising means for setting the fixed display time.

According to the above configuration, the stop display period can be varied according to the content of the result specified by the destination specifying means, and the length of the stop display period is used as a suggestive effect suggesting the result of the target determination, etc. can be realized in a practically preferred mode.

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the first period is longer than the two periods.

For example, if the first period when the result of the prior identification is the first result is shorter than the second period when the result of the prior identification is not the first result or the result of the prior identification is not the first result, it is usually Inevitably, the second period, which is a typical stop display period, must be set to a longer period, which may lead to a delay in the progress of the game. In this regard, in this configuration, since the first period is longer than the second period, the constraint of the first period can be eliminated in shortening the second period, and the second period is stopped and displayed. It is possible to make the period suitable for the original purpose of the period. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the delay in the progress of the game, and to have a suitable configuration for utilizing the stop display period as a suggestive effect.

Feature B7. Provided with effect control means (function for executing stop start processing by notification / effect control device 82) that controls so that game effect is performed by predetermined effect means,
The effect control means is means for controlling so that a special effect (announcement display effect in which a bubble image appears) is performed during the stop display period, which is the first period (the processing of steps S1602 and S1603 by the notification/effect control device 82). A gaming machine according to feature B6, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the above configuration, since the special notification is performed using the first period on the longer side, the special effect can be executed after appropriately securing the effect time. Furthermore, by adopting a configuration in which a special effect is performed during the stop display period, it is possible to clearly differentiate it from other effects performed during the variable display. In particular, during the stop display period, the pattern is stopped and displayed, and the grant determination result has already been displayed. Therefore, by executing the special effect in such a period, it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the pattern and effectively increase the degree of attention to the special effect. Moreover, since the special performance can be performed in the game round in progress when the destination is specified, it is possible to allow the addition of the special performance in the middle, and to expand the opportunities for performance.

Regarding the "predetermined effecting means" of feature B7, the "picture display means" may be configured to serve as it, or the role may be played by a means different from the "picture display means". .

Feature B8. Having a first pattern as the pattern,
When a game cycle is executed, a second pattern different from the first pattern is variably displayed on the pattern display means or a display means different from the pattern display means, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is performed. A second pattern display control means (function for executing variable display control processing by the notification / effect control device 82) that performs display control of the pattern display means or the different display means so as to stop display,
When the identification is performed by the destination identification means, the second pattern can be stopped and displayed with a stop result corresponding to the identification result of the destination identification device,
The display control means for the second picture,
When the stop display period is set to the first period by the stop display period setting means, the second pattern stopped and displayed with the end of the variable display is changed to the stop result corresponding to the specified result of the destination specifying means. Equipped with changing means for changing (function for executing re-variation processing by notification / production control device 82),
The gaming machine according to feature B6 or B7, wherein the changing means performs the change during a stop display period that is the first period.

According to the above configuration, the second pattern is displayed separately from the first pattern. Since the second picture is stop-displayed with the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination, it is assumed that the player is watching with high interest. In addition, in the present configuration, the second picture is configured to be stop-displayed with the stop result corresponding to the result of the previous specification, and the second picture is used to suggest the specified result of the previous specification. It is Therefore, the player can easily notice the suggestive effect, and can preferably increase the expectation for the subsequent game round. Moreover, according to this configuration, when the stop display period is set to the first period, the second pattern is changed to the stop result corresponding to the previously specified result. As a result, it becomes possible to add a change in the stop result in the middle, and it is possible to expand production opportunities. In addition, since the change is performed in the first period, which is the longer period, it is possible to properly secure the change period. Inconvenience such as this can be suitably suppressed.

In addition, the feature B8 is defined as "when the destination identification means performs the identification, the pattern can be stopped and displayed with a stop result corresponding to the identification result of the destination identification means,
The display control means is
When the stop display period is set to the first period by the stop display period setting means, the stopped display pattern is changed to a stop result corresponding to the specified result of the destination specifying means upon completion of the variable display. Equipped with a means of change,
The change means performs the change in the stop display period which is the first period."

Feature B9. The changing means variably displays the second pattern that was stop-displayed at the end of the variable display again during the stop display period, and means for stop-displaying the stop result corresponding to the specified result of the destination specifying means (notifying means). A gaming machine according to feature B8, characterized in that it has a function of executing re-variation processing and stop display processing by the effect control device 82 .

For example, if the stop result changes instantaneously, the player may not notice the change. In this respect, according to the present configuration, the re-variable display intervenes, making it easier to notice the change in the stop result, and it is possible to favorably secure the significance of the suggestive effect due to the change in the second picture. In addition, by re-variable display, it is possible to add the fun of guessing which stop result will be changed, which improves the amusement.

Feature B10. The gaming machine according to feature B9, wherein the changing means comprises means for again variably displaying the second pattern when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the stop display.

According to the above configuration, since the second pattern is again variably displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the stop display period, it is possible to easily confirm the stop result before the re-variable display. In addition, it becomes easier to recognize that the re-variable display has been performed, and it is possible to facilitate the player's understanding of the performance. Moreover, by providing a temporal buffer before the re-variable display, it is possible to arouse anticipation for the re-variable display and improve interest.

Feature B11. The display control means for the second picture,
a first changing means as the changing means;
When the stop display period is set to the second period by the stop display period setting means, the second pattern stopped and displayed with the end of the variable display is changed to a stop result different from the stop result of the stop display. and a second changing means for changing,
The game according to any one of features B6 to B10, wherein the second change means comprises means for starting the change before starting the stop display whose stop display period is the second period. machine.

According to the above configuration, since the second pattern can be changed even when the stop display period is the second period, the frequency of changing the second pattern can be increased. This reduces the player's discomfort when the second pattern is changed, and prevents the player from misunderstanding it as a special performance and having excessive expectations. However, since the second period is a period shorter than the first period, there is concern that it may become difficult to secure the change period. In this regard, in this configuration, when changing the second pattern in a situation where the stop display period is the second period, the change of the second picture is started before the start of the stop display, and compared to the case of the first period, the change of the second picture is started. It is configured to move forward. For this reason, it is possible to properly secure the change period, and problems such as not being able to properly perform the change and not being able to properly secure the display period of the stop result after the change are suppressed.

Feature B12. The display control means according to any one of features B8 to B11, wherein the display control means includes means for maintaining the stop display result of the first pattern even if the stop result of the second pattern is changed by the change means. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, even if the stop result of the second pattern is changed, the stop display state can be recognized by the first pattern, and the function and significance of the stop display can be secured. be possible.

If any of the features B9 to B12 is applied to the feature B8 that has been replaced, "second picture" → "picture", "second picture display control means" in each of the features B9 to B12 → Each reading of "display control means" can be changed.

Feature B13. A type 1 period and a type 2 period having different lengths can be set as the first period,
When the identification result of the first identification means is the first predetermined result and when the identification result is the second predetermined result different from the first predetermined result, the first period is the first type period. The gaming machine according to any one of features B5 to B12, wherein at least one of the set probability and the probability that the type 2 period is set is different.

According to the above configuration, the length of the first period can be different between when the identification result of the previous identification unit is the first predetermined result and when the identification result is the second predetermined result. As a result, when the stop display period of the first period is executed, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of guessing the content of the previous specification from the length thereof, and to improve the amusement.

Feature B14. Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing a prize winning process for the operation opening by the main control device 81);
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit set as a plurality of numbers;
determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the added information, and if a plurality of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination for the
A benefit granting means (main controller 81) capable of granting a benefit to a player based on the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result indicating that the special information corresponds to the grant information. function to execute game state transition processing by) and
pattern display means (main display unit 43, pattern display device 41) capable of variably displaying patterns;
One game round is to cause the pattern display means to start variable display of the pattern based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and to stop and display the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. , display control means for controlling the display of the pattern display means so that each game round is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means (function for executing game round control processing by the main controller 81; )When,
information corresponding to a determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to determination by the provision determining means, before the predetermined special information becomes subject to the determination; destination identification means (function for executing confirmation processing for holding notice by main controller 81) that identifies at the timing of
with
The display control means is
stop display period setting means for setting the stop display period for the stop display (function for executing stop start processing by the main controller 81);
stop display execution means (function for executing a final display process by the main controller 81) for executing the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means;
prepared,
The stop display period setting means includes means for setting the stop display period of the stop display based on the identification result of the destination identification means (function for executing stop start time processing by the main controller 81). Characteristic game machine.

According to the above configuration, an effect similar to that of feature B1 can be expected. Note that each configuration described in any one of the features B1 to B13 may be applied to the feature B14. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing a prize winning process for the operation opening by the main control device 81);
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit set as a plurality of numbers;
determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the added information, and if a plurality of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination for the
A benefit granting means (main controller 81) capable of granting a benefit to a player based on the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result indicating that the special information corresponds to the grant information. function to execute game state transition processing by) and
pattern display means (main display unit 43, pattern display device 41) capable of variably displaying patterns;
One game round is to cause the pattern display means to start variable display of the pattern based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and to stop and display the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. , display control means for controlling the display of the pattern display means so that each game round is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means (function for executing game round control processing by the main controller 81; )When,
with
The display control means is
stop display period setting means for setting the stop display period for the stop display (function for executing stop start processing by the main controller 81);
stop display execution means (function for executing a final display process by the main controller 81) for executing the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means;
with
The stop display period setting means
Grasping means for grasping the number of game rounds performed before execution of the specific game round corresponding to the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means (the main controller 81 executes the processing of steps S1208 to S1211 function) and
and a stop display setting means for setting a stop display period based on the grasp result of the grasping means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1211 to S1218 by the main controller 81). .

According to the above configuration, it is possible to set the length of the stop display period in consideration of the number of times the game is played before execution of the specific game time. As a result, for example, when a specific effect is performed during the stop display period of each game cycle that is executed prior to the specific game cycle, the number of executions is prevented from increasing depending on the number of stored special information. be done.

In addition, in the feature C1, the ``grasping means for grasping the number of game rounds performed before execution of the specific game rounds corresponding to the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means'' is replaced with the ``set target of the stop display period. It may be read as "grasping means for grasping what number of game times retroactively from the specific game times corresponding to the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means".

Feature C2. information corresponding to a determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to determination by the provision determining means, before the predetermined special information becomes subject to the determination; A destination specifying means (a function of executing confirmation processing for holding notice by the main controller 81) that specifies at the timing of
The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the stop display setting means comprises means for setting the stop display period based on the identification result of the destination identification means and the comprehension result of the comprehension means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to correlate the result of grant determination corresponding to the previously specified special information and the stop display period of the game cycle. As a result, the length of the stop display period can be utilized as a suggestive effect such as the result of the specified destination, and the effect variations can be diversified.

On the other hand, in the above configuration, a plurality of pieces of special information can be stored, and the destination identification means may perform destination identification under a situation where a large number of pieces of special information are stored. In such a case, the specific game round that is the target of the previous specification is executed with a large delay from the timing of the previous specification by the previous specification means. In such a case, if the first specific result is immediately reflected in the stop display period of the game round, the number of other game rounds intervening until the specific game round increases, resulting in a suggestive effect for which game round. It becomes difficult for the player to grasp whether it is or not, and there is a risk of causing confusion for the player. Further, for example, in a configuration in which, when the destination identification means has identified the destination, the setting of the stop display period as the special period is repeated until immediately before the execution of the specific game round, the number of repetitions depends on the number of stored special information. As a result, it is assumed that the player may misunderstand the production intention. In this regard, in this configuration, the stop display period is set based on the number of the target game round for which the stop display period is to be set, retroactively from the specific game round. As a result, in addition to being able to adjust the number of intervening game times between when the stop display period is set as the special period and when the specific game time is executed, the stop display is dependent on the number of special information stored. The occurrence of inconvenience such as an increase in the number of repetitions in which the period is a special period is also suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suitably exhibit the function as a suggestive effect during the stop display period, and the interest can be improved.

Feature C3. The grasping means
Storage number grasping means for grasping the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means when the special information to be specified by the destination specifying means is stored in the acquired information storage means (step S1301 by the main controller 81) function to execute the processing of
and means for grasping the number of times based on the result grasped by the memory number grasping means (function for executing the processing of steps S1208 and S1209 by the main controller 81). game machine.

For example, if the previously specified special information and subsequent special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, the subsequent special information may be included in the calculation, and the number of games played may not be properly grasped. There is In this regard, in this configuration, the number of times the previously specified special information is stored is grasped, and the number of times the game is played is grasped based on the result, so that the influence of subsequent special information can be eliminated. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature C4. The stop display setting means sets the stop display period to a first period ( fixed display time when the first fixed display time is set to the special time), and when the number of times grasped by the grasping means is greater than the predetermined number of times, the stop display period is set to a second period different from the first period. A gaming machine according to feature C2 or C3, characterized by comprising means for setting two periods (fixed display time when the first fixed display time is set to normal time).

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the number of stored special information is large, the stop display period can be set to the first period by limiting to game times relatively close to the specific game time. As a result, when the length of the stop display period is used as a suggestive effect such as a specific result, the player can easily associate the length of the stop display period with the specific game round, thereby functioning as a suggestive effect. can be suitably exhibited.

When the characteristic C4 is applied to the characteristic C2, "the stop display setting means sets the stop display period when the grasping result of the grasping means is the first result. means for setting the stop display period to a second period different from the first period when the grasping result of the grasping means is a second result different from the first result. It may be read as "provided."

Feature C5. The stop display period setting means sets the stop display period to the first period based on the number of memories grasped by the memory number grasping means and the predetermined number of times when the identification is performed by the destination identification means. Waiting number setting means (function for executing the process of step S1209 by the main controller 81) for setting the number of waiting times (waiting number counter WC) for waiting for the set process,
The gaming machine according to feature C4, wherein the stop display setting means sets the stop display period based on the number of times of waiting when the number of times of waiting is set by the number of waiting times setting means.

According to the above configuration, once the number of times of waiting is set, the stop display period can be set by managing the number of times of waiting. Therefore, it is not necessary to compare the stored number with the predetermined number of times each time the stop display period is set, or to determine which period to set the stop display period based on the result of the comparison. can be reduced.

Feature C6. The stop display period setting means sets the stop display period in a plurality of game rounds including the target game round when the stop display period is the first period in the target game round for which the stop display period is to be set. to the first period (a function of performing a process of grasping the execution number DN of the special period setting by the main control device 81).

Since the original purpose of the stop display is to show the result of grant determination to the player, if the stop display period is extremely long, the player is likely to get the impression that it is slow. becomes difficult to recognize the judgment result. Therefore, the difference between the first period and the second period tends to be limited, and there is concern that the player may not notice or overlook the first period as the stop display period. In this regard, according to this configuration, if the stop display period is set to be the first period in the target game round, the stop display period is set to be the first period in subsequent game rounds as well. For this reason, even if an oversight or the like occurs in the first game round, it can be noticed in the later game rounds, and the function as a suggestive effect can be exhibited favorably.

Feature C7. A first number of game rounds and a second number of game rounds, which are different in number from each other, can be set as the plurality of game rounds,
The first number of times as the plurality of game rounds when the specified result of the destination specifying means is the first predetermined result and when the specified result is the second predetermined result different from the first predetermined result. The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein at least one of the probability of setting the number of game rounds and the probability of setting the second number of game rounds is different.

According to the above configuration, when the specified result of the first specifying means is the first predetermined result and when the specified result is the second predetermined result, the number of times of the game in which the stop display period is the first period is can differ. As a result, it is possible to provide the user with the enjoyment of guessing the contents of the previous specification from the number of times of execution in the first period, and thus it is possible to improve the interest.

Feature C8. The plurality of game times is a predetermined specific number of game times (set number of times AN),
The stop display period setting means actually sets the stop display period to the first period based on the number of memories grasped by the memory number grasping means and the specific number of times when the identification is performed by the destination identification means. The game according to feature C6 or C7, characterized by comprising an execution count setting means for setting the execution count as a period (a function of executing a process of grasping the execution count DN of the special period setting by the main control device 81). machine.

Although the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means varies from time to time, in this configuration, the number of executions with the stop display period as the first period is set based on the magnitude relationship between the number of times of storage and the specific number of times. be done. For this reason, the stop display period can be set to the first period within the range of the number of memories stored each time, and it is possible to perform an appropriate suggestive effect.

Feature C9. According to any one of features C6 to C8, the execution count setting means includes means for setting the execution count so that the stop display period of the specific game round does not become the first period. game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is suppressed that the stop display period continues to be the first period even though the variable display of the specific game round has ended. As a result, it is possible to easily understand which game round is the target of the suggestive effect, and the function of the suggestive effect can be preferably exhibited.

Feature C10. The execution count setting means sets the specific number of times as the number of times of execution with the stop display period being the first period when the number of times stored by the memory number grasping means is equal to or greater than the specific number of times, and The gaming machine according to any one of features C6 to C9, further comprising means for setting the number of times of execution to be less than the specific number of times when the number of games is less than the specific number of times.

According to the above configuration, the number of times of execution is set differently depending on whether the number of times of memory is equal to or greater than the specific number of times, and when the number of times of execution is less than the specific number of times. , it becomes possible to expand the execution opportunities of the suggestive production.

Feature C11. The execution count setting means sets the specific number of times as the number of times of execution with the stop display period being the first period when the number of times stored by the memory number grasping means is equal to or greater than the specific number of times, and The game according to any one of features C6 to C9, further comprising means for limiting the setting of the first period when the number of stored games ascertained by the number ascertaining means is less than the specific number of times. machine.

According to the above configuration, since the setting of the first period is restricted when the number of memories is less than the specific number of times, it is suppressed that the change of the stop display period extends to the stop display of the specific game round. be. As a result, it is suppressed that it is difficult to understand which game round is the target of the suggestive effect, and the function of the suggestive effect can be preferably exhibited.

Feature C12. The stop display setting means sets the stop display period of the stop display immediately after the stop display when the stop display is specified by the stop display during the variable display or during the stop display immediately after that by the stop display setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C11, further comprising means for setting based on the identification result (function for executing stop start time processing by main controller 81).

According to the above configuration, since the stop display period of the game round in progress is set based on the result of the previous specification when the first specification is performed, the contents of the special information can be quickly reflected in the game round. . As a result, it is possible to set the first period including the stop display period of the game in progress, and it is possible to expand the opportunities for executing the suggestive effect.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing a prize winning process for the operation opening by the main control device 81);
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit set as a plurality of numbers;
determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the added information, and if a plurality of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination for the
A benefit granting means (main controller 81) capable of granting a benefit to a player based on the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result indicating that the special information corresponds to the grant information. function to execute game state transition processing by) and
pattern display means (main display unit 43, pattern display device 41) capable of variably displaying patterns;
One game round is to cause the pattern display means to start variable display of the pattern based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and to stop and display the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. , display control means for controlling the display of the pattern display means so that each game round is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means (function for executing game round control processing by the main controller 81; )When,
with
The display control means is
stop display period setting means for setting the stop display period for the stop display (function for executing stop start processing by the main controller 81);
stop display execution means (function for executing a final display process by the main controller 81) for executing the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means;
with
The stop display period setting means changes the stop display period of the immediately following stop display when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means changes during the variable display or during the stop display immediately thereafter. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing the processing of steps S1216 to S1218 by the main control device 81).

According to the above configuration, since the stop display period is changed when the number of stored special information changes, the number of stored special information and the length of the stop display period can be correlated. As a result, for example, if the number of stored special information is large, the stop display period is shortened to advance the start timing of the next game cycle, or conversely, if the number of stored special information is small, the stop display period is shortened. is lengthened, it is possible to make adjustments such as making it difficult for the special information in the acquired information storage means to run out. Moreover, in this configuration, when the special information is stored, the stop display period of the game cycle in progress can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect a change in the number of pieces of special information stored in the stop display period. As a result, especially when the stop display period is to be shortened, the responsiveness can be improved compared to the structure in which the time is adjusted after waiting for the next game round, and more efficient game progress is promoted. it becomes possible to

Feature D2. The stop display period setting means sets the stop display period to a first period (fixed display time when the first fixed display time is set to normal time) when the stored number is less than a predetermined number (K=3). , means for setting the stop display period to a second period shorter than the first period (the fixed display time when the first fixed display time is set to the reduced working time) when the stored number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number ( The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S1216 to S1218 by the main controller 81).

According to the above configuration, when the number of stored special information is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the stop display period is set to the short second period. can be shortened. As a result, efficient progress of the game can be promoted, and playability can be improved.

Feature D3. The display control means is
variable display period setting means for setting the variable display period for performing the variable display (function for executing variable display time setting processing by the main controller 81);
means for executing the variable display based on the variable display period set by the variable display period setting means (function for executing game turn control processing by the main controller 81);
The variable display period setting means sets the variable display period to the first type period when the number of memories is less than the specific number, and sets the variable display period to the first type period when the number of memories is equal to or greater than the specific number. The gaming machine according to feature D2, further comprising means for setting the type 2 period to be short.

According to the above configuration, when the number of special information stored is equal to or greater than the specific number, the variable display period is set to the short second period. The game period can be shortened. This makes it possible to realize smoother progress of the game compared to the case where only one of these periods is shortened. In particular, when the special information is stored, the stop display period of the game in progress can be set based on the number of stored special information, and the stop display period is shortened before the variable display period is shortened can do. This makes it possible to start shortening as soon as possible, and to promote further efficiency.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the predetermined number and the specific number are the same number.

According to the above configuration, when the period is shortened by the variable display, the period of the stop display before and after that can be shortened, and the shortening of the periods of the variable display and the period of the stop display can be appropriately harmonized. becomes possible.

Feature D5. The display control means includes memory number grasping means for grasping the number of memories of the special information at the timing corresponding to the setting timing of the stop display period in the stop display period setting means (the main controller 81 executes the processing of step S1216). function),
The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the stop display period setting means sets the stop display period based on the grasped result of the stored number grasping means.

For example, each time the special information is stored, the stored number at that time is reflected in the setting of the stop display period. There is a risk that you will be forced to redo the setting of the display period. In this regard, in this configuration, the stop display period can be set based on the number of times of memory at the set timing of the stop display period. Therefore, even if multiple times of memory occur, re-setting is suppressed, and the processing load can be reduced. becomes possible.

Feature D6. The stop display period setting means sets the stop display period to the first predetermined period when the stored number is greater than a predetermined reference number, and sets the stop display period to the first predetermined period when the stored number is equal to or less than the reference number. The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, further comprising means for setting a second predetermined period longer than one predetermined period.

According to the above configuration, when the number of stored special information is equal to or less than the reference number, the stop display period is set to the longer second predetermined period. It is possible to lengthen the game period related to the game round. As a result, the special information stored in the obtained information storage means is less likely to run out, making it possible to suppress interruptions in the progress of the game.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing a prize winning process for the operation opening by the main control device 81);
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit set as a plurality of numbers;
determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the added information, and if a plurality of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination for the
A benefit granting means (main controller 81) capable of granting a benefit to a player based on the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result indicating that the special information corresponds to the grant information. function to execute game state transition processing by) and
pattern display means (main display unit 43, pattern display device 41) capable of variably displaying patterns;
One game round is to cause the pattern display means to start variable display of the pattern based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and to stop and display the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. , display control means for controlling the display of the pattern display means so that each game round is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means (function for executing game round control processing by the main controller 81; )When,
information corresponding to a determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to determination by the provision determining means, before the predetermined special information becomes subject to the determination; destination identification means (function for executing confirmation processing for holding notice by main controller 81) that identifies at the timing of
with
The display control means is
variable display period setting means for setting the variable display period for performing the variable display (function for executing variable display time setting processing by the main controller 81);
means for executing the variable display based on the variable display period set by the variable display period setting means (function for executing game turn control processing by the main controller 81);
stop display period setting means for setting the stop display period for the stop display (function for executing stop start processing by the main controller 81);
means for executing the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means (function for executing the final display process by the main controller 81);
with
The variable display period setting means includes means for setting the variable display period based on the identification result of the previous identification means (function for executing the processing of steps S2904 to S2917 by the main controller 81),
The stop display period setting means includes means for setting the stop display period based on the identification result of the destination identification means (the function of executing the processing of steps S2504 to S2518 by the main controller 81). game machine.

According to the above configuration, since means for setting the variable display period and the stationary display period based on the information specified by the first specifying means is provided, the game period for one game round is provided according to the specified result of the first specifying means. can be changed. As a result, the length of the game period for one game cycle can be utilized as a suggestive effect such as the determination result, and the effect variations can be diversified.

Feature E2. The stop display period setting means sets the stop display period of the stop display immediately after the stop display when the stop display is specified by the stop display during the variable display or immediately after that by the stop display period of the stop display. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized by comprising means for setting based on a specified result (a function of executing stop start processing by the main controller 81).

According to the above configuration, since the stop display period of the game round in progress is set based on the result of the previous specification when the first specification is performed, the contents of the special information can be quickly reflected in the game round. . As a result, even if the game round to be specified first is the game round to be played next to the game round in progress, the opportunity to change the stop display period can be secured, and the opportunity to execute the suggestive effect can be secured. expansion is possible.

Feature E3. The display control means is
At a first timing after the start of the variable display and before the start of the stop display immediately after the variable display, a first destination for determining whether or not the identification result of the destination identification means is a predetermined result. identification determination means (function for executing the process of step S2504 by the main controller 81);
At a second timing after the start of the stop display immediately after the start of the stop display and before the start of the variable display immediately after the stop display, a determination is made as to whether or not the specified result of the preceding specifying means is a predetermined result. 2nd destination identification determination means (function for executing the process of step S2904 by the main controller 81);
with
The stop display period setting means includes means for setting the stop display period based on the determination result of the first destination identification determination means (function for executing stop start time processing by the main controller 81);
The variable display period setting means is a means for setting the variable display period based on the determination result of the second destination identification determination means (a function of executing the setting process of the variable display time for the complete failure by the main controller 81). )When,
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the variable display period and the stop display are obtained regardless of whether the result of the previous specification becomes the predetermined result during the stop display or the result of the previous specification becomes the predetermined result during the variable display. It is possible to start changing the period as soon as possible, and expand opportunities for changing the period.

Feature E4. The game according to feature E3, wherein the first timing is timing corresponding to the start timing of the stop display immediately after, and the second timing is timing corresponding to the start timing of the variable display immediately after. machine.

According to the above configuration, in the first destination identification determining means, the determination process is performed in accordance with the start timing of the stop display, that is, the set timing of the stop display period. The result can be reflected in the stop display period of the stop display. Further, in the second determination means for destination identification, determination processing is performed in accordance with the start timing of the variable display, that is, the setting timing of the variable display period. It can be reflected in the variable display period of the display. In other words, even if the destination is specified at any timing during the game, it can be quickly reflected in the stop display period and the variable display period, and it is possible to further expand the opportunities for change.

Feature E5. The display control means is
determining whether or not the specified result of the preceding specifying means is a predetermined result at any timing after the start of the variable display and before the start of the stop display immediately after the variable display; determination means for destination identification (function for executing the process of step S2504 by the main controller 81);
At any timing after the start of the stop display immediately after the start of the stop display and before the start of the variable display immediately after the stop display, it is determined whether or not the specified result of the preceding specifying means is a predetermined result. a second destination identification determining means (a function of executing the process of step S2904 by the main controller 81);
Prioritizing means for giving priority to one of the determination result of the first determination means for destination identification and the determination result of the second determination means for destination identification over the other function) and
with
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein the stop display period setting means and the variable display period setting means set each period based on the determination result of the side prioritized by the priority means.

According to the above configuration, since the first determination means for specifying the destination and the second determination means for specifying the destination are provided, when the result of the determination of the destination during the stop display becomes the predetermined result, and when the result of the determination of the destination becomes the predetermined result during the variable display. In any case where the predetermined result is obtained, the change of the variable display period and the stop display period can be started as soon as possible, and the chances of changing the period can be expanded. On the other hand, in the case of providing the above-described two determination means with different determination timings, if prior specification is made between one determination and the other determination, the determination results will compete and the period will be set. may lead to duplication or mid-way changes. In this regard, in this configuration, each period is set based on the judgment result of the side given priority by the priority means, so the judgment result can be unified, and duplication of period setting and midway change can be suppressed appropriately. becomes possible.

Note that the configuration of the feature E4 can be applied to the feature E5. In this case, a further effect can be obtained by applying the configuration of feature E4.

Feature E6. The priority means determines the determination means of the first determination means for destination identification and the second determination means for destination identification, which determines first that the identification result of the destination identification means is a predetermined result. The gaming machine according to feature E5, characterized in that priority is given to results.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to adopt a practically preferable mode in terms of unifying determination results. In particular, in the configuration in which priority is given to the judgment result of the judging means on the side that later judges that the specified result is the predetermined result, it is necessary to wait for the later judgment result, which easily causes a delay in setting the period. In this configuration, the occurrence of such a delay is suppressed, and it becomes possible to change the variable display period and the stop display period from an early stage.

Feature E7. having a first period (8.0 sec) and a second period (1.0 sec) shorter than the first period as a variable display period that can be set by the variable display period setting means;
The stop display period setting means has a first predetermined period (0.7 sec) and a second predetermined period (2.0 sec) longer than the first predetermined period as a settable stop display period,
The variable display period setting means comprises means for setting the variable display period to the second period when the identification result of the preceding identification means is a predetermined result,
Any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the stop display period setting means comprises means for setting the stop display period to the second predetermined period when the specified result of the preceding specifying means is a predetermined result. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, when the previously specified result is the predetermined result, the variable display period is shortened while the stop display period is lengthened, so that the proportion of the stop display in one game round can be increased. . This makes it possible to increase the presence of the stop display and increase the degree of attention to the suggestive effect.

Feature E8. The gaming machine according to feature E7, further comprising means for making the second predetermined period longer than the second period.

Normally, the stop display period is extremely short compared to the variable display period, but by adding an extreme change that reverses the long-short relationship between the stop display period and the variable display period, the player feels a great sense of discomfort. can give This makes it easier for the player to notice the suggestive effect, and it is possible to suitably increase the expectation for the subsequent game round.

Feature E9. Characteristic feature E7 or E8, further comprising means for making the total period of the second period and the second predetermined period shorter than the total period of the first period and the first predetermined period. game machine.

It is assumed that the player's interest is more likely to turn to the specific game round corresponding to the previously specified special information, but according to the above configuration, the time required to reach the specific game round can be shortened. As a result, it is possible for the player to play the specific game round as soon as possible, and the amusement can be improved.

Feature E10. The variable display period setting means sets a variable display period of a game round to be played before the specific game round corresponding to the predetermined special information, based on the identification result of the preceding identification means,
Any one of the features E1 to E9, wherein the stop display period setting means sets a stop display period of a game round to be performed before the specific game round based on a result of specifying by the preceding specifying means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, since the periods of the variable display and the stop display that are performed before the specific game cycle differ depending on the result of specifying by the first specifying means, the suggestive effect using the result of the previous specifying is performed. Above, it can be set as a practically preferred embodiment.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. First lottery means for performing the first lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition (winning of game balls to operation ports 33a and 33b) function) and
Based on the fact that the first lottery is performed by the first lottery means, a predetermined display means (main display section 43, pattern display device 41) starts to variably display the pattern, and corresponds to the result of the first lottery. a first display control means (a function of executing game turn control processing by the main controller 81) for performing display control of the predetermined display means, with stopping display of the stop result as one time of the first game turn;
A second lottery means ( A function of executing the propriety determination process for the general map by the main control device 81);
Based on the fact that the second lottery is performed by the second lottery means, the pattern is changed in the predetermined display means or a display means different from the predetermined display means (the pattern display device 41, the character object display section 44). A second display control for performing display control of the predetermined display means or the different display means by starting the display and stop-displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery as one of the second game times. Means (the function of executing the normal game round control process by the main control device 81);
with
As game states, it has a plurality of game states including a first game state (low-frequency support mode) and a second game state (high-frequency support mode) that is more advantageous for the player than the first game state. ,
A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81) for shifting the game state to one of the plurality of game states based on the lottery result of the first lottery,
The second display control means is
Stop display period setting means for setting the stop display period for performing the stop display (a function of executing the setting process of the normal figure fixed display time by the main control device 81);
Means for executing the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means (function for executing normal figure game round control processing by the main control device 81);
with
The stop display period setting means (main control unit) sets the stop display period so that the stop display period in the first game state is longer than the stop display period in the second game state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing a setting process of the normal pattern confirmation display time by the device 81).

Under the second game state advantageous to the player, the player is expected to continue the game until the game state ends, but under the first game state disadvantageous to the player, the first lottery It is conceivable that the player will finish the game when the corresponding first game cycle ends. However, in a configuration in which the first game round and the second game round corresponding to the second lottery coexist, the second game round may remain incomplete when the first game round ends. In such a case, the player may be worried about the result of the second lottery and may not be able to finish the game, or the player may end the game with an advantageous result. In this regard, in this configuration, the stop display period for the second game cycle in the first game state is longer than that in the second game state. In this case, in the first game state, it is possible to shorten the variable display period of the second game round by the length of the stop display period of the second game round. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period required until the stop result is displayed, and it is possible to quickly inform the player of the result of the second lottery. As a result, the occurrence of the above-described inconveniences is suitably suppressed, and playability is improved.

Feature F2. Characteristic feature F1, characterized in that the other of the first game round and the second game round can be executed while one of the first game round and the second game round is being executed. game machine.

In a configuration in which one of the first and second game rounds can be executed while the other is being executed, the second game round is not completed at the end of the first game round by lengthening the stop display period related to the second game round. Even in the case of the end, it is possible to increase the probability that the pattern of the second game round is in the stop display state. When the pattern of the second game cycle is in a stop display state, the result of the second lottery can be grasped immediately by visually recognizing the pattern, and the frequency of occurrence of the result waiting event itself is reduced by increasing the probability. This makes it easier to quickly notify the result of the second lottery.

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the second game state is a state in which the execution frequency of the second game rounds per unit time tends to be higher than in the first game state.

In the first game state, the execution frequency of the second game round per unit time is required to be lower than in the second game state. Under such restrictions, by making the stop display period of the second game round in the first game state longer than that in the second game state, the execution frequency of the second game round per unit time in the first game state It is possible to shorten the variable display period of the second game round while suppressing an increase in the . As a result, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the result of the second lottery while suppressing the loss of the function of the first game state.

Feature F4. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (lower operation opening 33b) into which the game ball fired by the shooting means can enter;
A first state (open state) in which a game ball can or easily enter the ball-entering portion, and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter the ball-entering portion or is more difficult to enter than in the first state. (closed state), variable ball entry means (electric accessory 34) that can be switched to,
Variable control means (main controller 81) that performs switching control to switch the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state based on the result of the second lottery by the second lottery means becoming a predetermined result function to execute electronic support processing by
a privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81) capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that the result of the first lottery is a specified result;
with
The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the first lottery means comprises means for performing the first lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section.

According to the above configuration, during the game, the player's attention to the first game round (first lottery) with a strong connection to the awarding of the privilege increases, and the second game round (second lottery) It is assumed that the interest will be lower than in the first game round. Therefore, even if the stop display period of the second game cycle is lengthened, it becomes less noticeable during the game, and it is possible to suppress the induction of the feeling of sluggishness. In this way, in a configuration in which a plurality of lottery systems of the first and second lottery coexist, by lengthening the stop display period of the pattern related to the lottery system of which the player is less interested, a sense of sluggishness during the game can be achieved. It is possible to quickly notify the result of the second lottery when the first game cycle ends while suppressing the inhibition of the desire to play.

Feature F5. A plurality of periods (4.0 sec, 10.0 sec, 16.0 sec) of different lengths are provided as the stop display period that can be set in the first game state,
The stop display period setting means selects one of the plurality of periods and sets it as the stop display period based on the result of the second lottery being a predetermined result in the first gaming state (main The gaming machine according to feature F4, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S3702 to S3704 by the control device 81).

Since the stop display period of the second game round is lengthened, the grace period from when the player grasps the result of the second lottery to when the variable ball entry means is set to the first state tends to be long. As a result, when it is grasped that the variable ball entry means is switched to the first state without the intention of ending the game, a so-called stop shot is induced in which a game ball is shot at the timing of switching to the first state. Concerned. In this respect, according to this configuration, the stop display period of the second game cycle is diversified, so that the period until the second variable ball-entering means is switched to the first state is suppressed from becoming uniform. be. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the timing of switching to the first state, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature F6. Notification control means (notification / effect control device 82, display control device 212 ),
The notification control means controls the predetermined notification means so that the specific notification is performed before switching to the first state when the variable ball entry means is switched from the second state to the first state. Equipped with means for specific notification to control,
The means for specific notification is
When the length of the stop display period related to the second game cycle is equal to or longer than a predetermined length, the specific notification is started during the stop display of the pattern related to the second game cycle, and the length is less than the predetermined length. a timing setting means for setting the start timing of the specific notification so that the specific notification is started before the start of the stop display of the pattern related to the second game round in the case of .
means for starting the specific notification based on the start timing set by the timing setting means;
The gaming machine according to feature F5, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when performing the specific notification by utilizing the stop display period, it is possible to properly secure the time for the specific effect even though the stop display period is variable.

Feature F7. Notification control means (notification / effect control device 82, display control device 212 ),
The notification control means controls the predetermined notification means so that the specific notification is performed before switching to the first state when the variable ball entry means is switched from the second state to the first state. Equipped with means for specific notification to control,
The means for specific notification is specified so that the specific notification is executed in a first execution period and the specific notification is executed in a second execution period different from the first execution period. The gaming machine according to feature F5, further comprising means for setting an execution mode of notification.

If the execution period of the specific notification is standardized, it may become possible to predict the switching timing to the first state from the start timing of the specific notification. In this regard, according to the present configuration, since the execution period of the specific notification is diversified, it becomes difficult to predict the timing of switching to the first state based on the start timing of the specific notification, and a so-called final blow is made. can be suppressed.

Feature F8. Characteristic feature F7, characterized in that a notification mode of the specific notification is common between when the specific notification is performed during the first execution period and when the specific notification is performed during the second execution period. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, it becomes difficult to determine the execution period of the specific notification from the notification mode of the specific notification. This makes it difficult to predict the timing of switching to the first state from the start timing of the specific notification, making it possible to suppress so-called stop shots.

In addition, in the feature F8, "the notification mode of the specific notification is common" may be read as "the notification mode of the specific notification is difficult to identify or cannot be identified". Even in this case, the same effect as in the above case can be obtained.

Feature F9. As game states, there are a first game state (low-frequency support mode) and a second game state (high-frequency support mode) in which the variable ball-entering means is more likely to be in the first state than in the first game state. and
As modes of the first state in the variable ball entry means, there are a first mode (low winning support state) and a second mode (first high Winning support state) and,
The variable control means includes means for performing the switching control so that the mode of the first state becomes the second mode based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
The game machine according to any one of features F5 to F8, wherein the predetermined condition can be established in the first game state.

According to the above configuration, in the second game state, which is likely to be the first state, the control state of the variable ball entry means (for convenience, referred to as the support state) in which one set of switching control is performed once or more times is changed at short intervals. Since it is likely to be repeated, even if one support state is lost, the player's mentality is likely to work that it should be compensated for in the next support state. On the other hand, in the first game state, in which the first state is unlikely to occur, the period from the end of the support state to the occurrence of the next support state tends to be long, and it is difficult to expect the next occurrence itself in the first place. For this reason, under the first gaming state, there arises a strong need to effectively utilize the opportunity of switching control by the second mode. In this regard, in this configuration, by providing the feature F1 through the feature F5, it is possible to suppress the game from ending with an opportunity to be switched and controlled by the second mode. It can be a configuration suitable for

Feature F10. The stop display period setting means includes means for setting the stop display period such that the stop display period related to the second game round is longer than the stop display period related to the first game round. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to shorten the variable display period for the second game round by the length of the stop display period for the second game round. As a result, when the player looks at the second game round while watching the first game round, the result of the second lottery can be grasped quickly and easily. As a result, the time required to return the line of sight to the first game round is shortened, and the occurrence of inconvenience such as overlooking the stop result of the first game round or the game performance during the first game round is suppressed. On the other hand, since the stop display period of the first game cycle is configured to be short, it is suppressed that the player looks at the first game cycle and gives the impression that it is boring, and the desire to play is inhibited. is suppressed.

Note that when the feature F10 is applied to the feature F2, "when the player shifts his/her line of sight from the first game round to the second game round during the game, the pattern of the second game round is displayed in a stop display state. As a result, the frequency with which the line of sight can be quickly returned to the first game round is increased, and the result of stopping the first game round and overlooking the game effect during the first game round can be suppressed more appropriately. It is expected to have the effect of

Feature F11. means for starting the stop display of the other of the first game round and the second game round based on the start of the stop display of one of the first game round and the second game round. The gaming machine according to any one of features F2 to F10, characterized by:

When there is a request to lengthen or shorten the stop display period of one pattern, for example, when the stop display of one pattern is completed, the stop display of the other pattern is started. In that case, depending on the length of the stop display period of one pattern, the start timing of the stop display of the other pattern may be delayed or earlier. In this regard, according to the present configuration, even if the length of the stop display period is changed, it is possible to suppress the influence on the start timing of the stop display of the other pattern, thereby improving the flexibility of the stop display period.

Feature F12. First lottery means for performing the first lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition (winning of game balls to operation ports 33a and 33b) functions to perform) and
Based on the fact that the first lottery is performed by the first lottery means, a predetermined display means (main display section 43, pattern display device 41) starts to variably display the pattern, and corresponds to the result of the first lottery. a first display control means (a function of executing game turn control processing by the main controller 81) for performing display control of the predetermined display means, with stopping display of the stop result as one time of the first game turn;
A second lottery means different from the first lottery (by the main controller 81) is established based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition (winning of the game ball to the through gate 35) different from the first condition. A function that executes pass/fail judgment processing for normal maps),
Based on the fact that the second lottery is performed by the second lottery means, the pattern is changed in the predetermined display means or a display means different from the predetermined display means (the pattern display device 41, the character object display section 44). A second display control for performing display control of the predetermined display means or the different display means by starting the display and stop-displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery as one of the second game times. Means (the function of executing the normal game round control process by the main control device 81);
with
The second display control means is
Stop display period setting means for setting the stop display period for performing the stop display (a function of executing the setting process of the normal figure fixed display time by the main control device 81);
Means for executing the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means (function for executing normal figure game round control processing by the main control device 81);
with
The stop display period setting means is means for setting the stop display period for the second game round such that the stop display period for the second game round is longer than the stop display period for the first game round. A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, since the stop display period of the second game cycle is relatively long, the variable display period of the second game cycle can be shortened accordingly. As a result, when the player looks at the second game round while watching the first game round, the result of the second lottery can be grasped quickly and easily. As a result, the time required to return the line of sight to the first game round is shortened, and the occurrence of inconvenience such as overlooking the stop result of the first game round or the game performance during the first game round is suppressed. On the other hand, since the stop display period of the first game cycle is configured to be relatively short, it is possible to suppress the impression that the player is playing the game in the first game cycle. Inhibition of motivation is suppressed.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. Lottery means for performing lottery processing based on the establishment of a predetermined predetermined condition (game ball winning prize to through gate 35) (function for executing winning/losing determination processing for normal figure by main controller 81);
Based on the lottery processing being performed by the lottery means, predetermined display means (the pattern display device 41 and the display unit 44 for the character object) starts variable display of patterns, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the lottery processing. Display control means for performing display control of the predetermined display means so as to stop display (function for executing normal figure game round control processing by main control device 81);
game pause determination means (function for executing game pause determination processing by the main control device 81) for determining whether or not the player has paused the game;
with
The display control means is
Stop display period setting means for setting the stop display period for performing the stop display (a function of executing the setting process of the normal figure fixed display time by the main control device 81);
Means for executing the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means (function for executing normal figure game round control processing by the main control device 81);
with
The stop display period setting means includes means for setting the stop display period based on the determination result of the game pause determination means (function for executing the processing of steps S4702 and S4703 by the main controller 81). Amusement machine.

According to the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the player is pausing the game, and the pattern stop display period is set based on the determination result. As a result, it is possible to correlate the game status of the player with the pattern stop display period. In this case, for example, by shortening the stop display period when the game is paused compared to when the game is in progress, the player who is about to finish the game can quickly know the results of the remaining game rounds. or the game cycle left by the previous player is completed quickly, making it easier for the next player to start the game. Conversely, by making the stop display period longer when the game is paused than when the game is in progress, the start timing of the next game cycle is delayed, which may contribute to securing a short break. can. In this way, by correlating the game status of the player and the stop display period of the pattern, it becomes possible to realize what could not be done with the conventional game machine, and the interest is improved.

In the feature G1, "game pause determination means for determining whether or not the player is in a game" is replaced by "game determination means (by the main controller 81) for determining whether or not the player is in a game." Function to execute the game pause determination process)" may be read. In addition, in the feature G1, while deleting the configuration of the "game pause determination means", "an operation means (shooting handle 54) for performing a game start operation by the player and an operation to specify that the operation means has been operated" specifying means", and further, "the stop display period setting means sets the stop display period based on the determination result of the game pause determination means" is replaced by "the stop display period setting means , means for setting the stop display period based on the identification result of the operation identification means (function for executing the processing of steps S4702 and S4703 by the main controller 81).

Feature G2. The stop display period setting means sets the stop display period to a first period (4.0 sec to 16.0 sec) when the result of determination by the game pause determination means corresponds to the fact that the player is playing the game. set, and when the judgment result of the game pause judging means is a result corresponding to the player pausing the game, the stop display period is set to a second period (0.5 sec) shorter than the first period. (a function of executing the processing of steps S4702 and S4703 by the main controller 81).

According to the above configuration, the stop display period is shorter when the game is paused than when the game is in progress. As a result, the player who is about to finish the game can quickly know the result of the remaining game rounds, or the game rounds left by the previous player are quickly digested and the next player can play the game. Ease of play is improved, such as making it easier to start

Feature G3. Equipped with an operation means (shooting handle 54) that can be operated by the player,
The game pause determination means includes means for determining whether or not the player has paused the game based on the operation status of the operation means (function for executing the process of step S4603 by the main controller 81). The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, characterized by:

In the above configuration, an operation means that can be operated by the player is provided, and it is determined whether or not the game is paused based on the operation status of the operation means. As a result, it is possible to determine the presence or absence of a game based on the actions of the player, making it easier to make an appropriate determination.

Feature G4. a shooting means (shooting handle 54) capable of shooting game balls based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry section (general prize winning opening 31, operation openings 33a and 33b, through gate 35) into which game balls shot by the shooting means can enter;
with
The game pausing determination means is means for determining whether or not the player is pausing the game based on the status of the shooting operation or the shooting status of the game ball from the shooting means (the process of step S4603 by the main controller 81). The gaming machine according to feature G3, characterized by comprising a function of executing

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the game is paused based on the state of the player's shooting operation or the state of shooting the game ball. In the game aiming at the entry of the game ball into the entering ball part, the shooting of the game ball is indispensable, but according to this configuration, it becomes easy to appropriately determine whether or not there is a game.

Feature G5. The lottery means is provided as first lottery means, and the display control means is provided as first display control means,
The first display control means starts the variable display of the pattern based on the lottery process being performed by the first lottery means, and stops displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the lottery process. The display control is performed once in one game,
Second lottery means ( A function of executing the propriety determination process for special figures by the main control device 81);
The pattern is variably displayed on the predetermined display means or a display means (main display unit 43, pattern display device 41) different from the predetermined display means based on the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means. and displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process as one of the second game times, and performing display control of the predetermined display means or the different display means. means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the main control device 81);
with
The game pause determination means determines that the game is in progress when the second game round is being executed even if the operation situation corresponds to the game pause (step S4604 by the main controller 81). A gaming machine according to feature G3 or G4, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing.

According to the above configuration, it is determined that the game is being played when the second game round is being executed even if the operation state of the operation means corresponds to the game pause, so that erroneous judgment of the game pause is suppressed. It is possible to improve the judgment accuracy.

Feature G6. The lottery means is provided as first lottery means, and the display control means is provided as first display control means,
Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (function for executing a prize winning process for the operation opening by the main control device 81);
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit set as a plurality of numbers;
Information determination processing is performed to determine whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined information, and if a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of pieces of special information are stored. Information determination means for sequentially performing the information determination process for information (function for executing the propriety determination process for special figures by the main control device 81);
When the information determination process is performed by the information determination means, the predetermined display means or a display means different from the predetermined display means (main display section 43, pattern display device 41) starts variable display of the pattern. second display control means (main control device) for performing display control of the predetermined display means or the different display means, with stopping display of the stop result corresponding to the result of the information determination process as one game round 81 function to execute game turn control processing);
with
The game pause determination means determines that the game is being played when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means even if the operation situation corresponds to the game pause (by the main controller 81). A gaming machine according to feature G3 or G4, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S4605.

According to the above configuration, it is determined that the game is being played when the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means even if the operation state of the operation means corresponds to the game pause, so that the game pause is erroneously determined. can be suppressed, and the determination accuracy can be improved.

Feature G7. The stop display period setting means, when the game pause determination means determines that the player is pausing the game during the variable display or during the stop display immediately thereafter, based on the result of the determination. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, further comprising means for setting a stop display period of the immediately following stop display.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to improve the responsiveness of changing the length of the stop display period with respect to changes in the game situation, and it is possible to quickly reflect the presence or absence of a game pause in the stop display period.

Feature G8. The stop display period setting means, when the game pause determination means determines that the player has resumed the game during the variable display or during the stop display immediately after that, sets the period immediately after based on the result of the determination. The gaming machine according to feature G7, characterized by comprising means for setting a stop display period of the stop display of .

According to the above configuration, when the game is restarted after the game is paused, the length of the stop display period can be quickly reflected, and the stop display period can be quickly returned to the in-game period.

Feature G9. A first lottery means that performs a first lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition (winning of a game ball to the through gate 35) function) and
Based on the fact that the first lottery is conducted by the first lottery means, a predetermined display means (symbol display device 41, character object display unit 44) starts to variably display a pattern, and the result of the first lottery is displayed. Stopping and displaying the corresponding stop result is one of the first game rounds, and the first display control means for performing display control of the predetermined display means (the function of executing the normal figure game round control processing by the main control device 81 )When,
A second lottery that performs a second lottery different from the first lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition different from the first condition (winning of game balls into operation ports 33a and 33b). Means (a function of executing the propriety determination process for special figures by the main control device 81);
Based on the fact that the second lottery is performed by the second lottery means, the predetermined display means or display means (main display unit 43, pattern display device 41) different from the predetermined display means (main display unit 43, pattern display device 41) is used to variably display the pattern. A second display control means ( a function of executing a game turn control process by the main control device 81);
with
The first display control means is
Stop display period setting means for setting the stop display period for performing the stop display (a function of executing the setting process of the normal figure fixed display time by the main control device 81);
Means for executing the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means (function for executing normal figure game round control processing by the main control device 81);
with
The stop display period setting means is means for setting the stop display period related to the first game round based on the execution status of the second game round (executing the processing of steps S4604 and S4702 to S4706 by the main controller 81). function).

According to the above configuration, the length of the stop display period of the first game round can be varied according to the execution status of the second game round. As a result, it is possible to give a fresh impression to the player, and to provide novel game characteristics.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the features G1 to G8 may be applied to the feature G9. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature G10. A first lottery means that performs a first lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition (winning of a game ball to the through gate 35) function) and
Based on the fact that the first lottery is conducted by the first lottery means, a predetermined display means (symbol display device 41, character object display unit 44) starts to variably display a pattern, and the result of the first lottery is displayed. A first display control means (a function of executing normal figure game turn control processing by the main control device 81) that performs display control of the predetermined display means so as to stop and display the corresponding stop result;
Acquisition means (operating opening by main controller 81) for acquiring special information based on establishment of a predetermined second condition different from the first condition (winning of game balls to operating openings 33a and 33b) function to execute the winning process for
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit set as a plurality of numbers;
Information determination processing is performed to determine whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined information, and if a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of pieces of special information are stored. Information determination means for sequentially performing the information determination process for information (function for executing the propriety determination process for special figures by the main control device 81);
When the information determination process is performed by the information determination means, the predetermined display means or a display means different from the predetermined display means (main display section 43, pattern display device 41) starts variable display of the pattern. second display control means for controlling display of the predetermined display means or the different display means (game turn control processing by the main control device 81) so as to stop and display the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination functions to perform) and
with
The first display control means is
Stop display period setting means for setting the stop display period for performing the stop display (a function of executing the setting process of the normal figure fixed display time by the main control device 81);
Means for executing the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means (function for executing normal figure game round control processing by the main control device 81);
with
The stop display period setting means is means for setting the stop display period related to the first game round based on the storage status of the special information in the acquired information storage means (processing of steps S4605, S4702 to S4706 by the main controller 81). A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function to execute

According to the above configuration, the length of the stop display period of the first game round can be varied according to the storage status of the special information regarding the second game round. As a result, it is possible to give a fresh impression to the player, and to provide novel game characteristics.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. Grant determination means (function for executing win/fail determination processing by the main controller 81) for executing grant determination as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, the production of the game round is started by a predetermined notification means, and after that, the result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is reported. A game round control means (a function of executing a game round control process by the main control device 81) for ending the effect;
Abnormality identification means capable of identifying the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality (function for executing error handling processing by the main controller 81);
Change means (stop start by main controller 81) capable of changing the length of the notification period in which the result notification is performed by the game round control means based on the fact that the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality is identified by the abnormality identification means A function of executing time processing, a function of executing processing during fluctuation by the notification / effect control device 82),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the length of the notification period during which the result notification of the game round is performed is changed based on the occurrence of an abnormality. As a result, for example, if the notification period is long, if the result notification of the game round is performed while taking measures based on the occurrence of an abnormality, the result notification may be overlooked. For example, if the notification period is shortened, in a configuration that shortens the overall length of the effect of the game round based on the occurrence of an abnormality, only the notification period of the result notification will remain long, and the effect balance will be lost. It is possible to solve the inconvenience that such a shortening effect is not recognized.

Feature H2. The changing means is characterized in that, based on the fact that the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality is identified by the abnormality identifying means, the length of the notification period during which the result notification is performed by the game round control means is lengthened. The gaming machine described in H1.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to solve the inconvenience that the result notification is overlooked when the result notification of the game cycle is performed while the countermeasures based on the occurrence of the abnormality are being performed.

Feature H3. Information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing by the main controller 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
with
The provision determination means is configured to sequentially perform the provision determination for the special information stored in the information storage means,
The changing means is characterized in that, when the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality is identified by the abnormality identifying means, the special information stored in the information storage means is subject to change of the notification period of the result notification. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2.

After the occurrence of the abnormality, it is assumed that the manager of the game hall or the like will deal with the abnormality, and the player will stop playing the game. If so, it is considered that new special information will not be acquired until the corresponding countermeasure is completed after the occurrence of the abnormality. From that point of view, as in the above configuration, it is sufficient to change the notification period of the result notification for the special information acquired when an abnormality occurs. It is possible to respond according to the game situation rather than the configuration such as playing. In addition, if the notification period for a predetermined number of game rounds is uniformly changed, the processing load itself may be reduced. Due to the fact that the number of rounds has not been completed, even after the game is restarted, there may be a problem that the notification period of the result notification is changed.

Feature H4. The changing means changes the notification period of the result notification, including the special information acquired by the acquiring means, until a predetermined period elapses after the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality is specified by the abnormality specifying means. The game machine according to feature H3, characterized in that it is targeted.

For example, in a configuration in which special information is acquired under the condition that a game ball is launched into a game area and the game ball enters a predetermined ball entry portion, shooting of the game ball is stopped based on the occurrence of an abnormality. However, there is a possibility that the game ball that has already been shot will enter the predetermined ball entry portion, and new special information may be acquired. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to change the special information acquired after the timing of stopping the game, and it is possible to deal with it more in accordance with the actual situation of the game. Become.

Feature H5. The changing means, when the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality is specified by the abnormality specifying means, on the condition that the game round being executed by the game round control means is before the start of the result notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the notification period of the result notification in the game round executed by the game round control means can be changed.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the result notification from being overlooked even for the game round in progress. In this case, since the condition is that the result notification is not started, the result notification before execution is not required without complicated processing such as changing even the result notification being executed in the game round being executed. It is only necessary to change the length of the notification period, and it is possible to secure more opportunities to confirm the result notification with a simple configuration.

Feature H6. An operation specifying means (function for executing the processing of step S5305 by the main controller 81) for specifying the game operation by the player is provided,
The changing means specifies the game operation by the operation specifying means after the occurrence of the predetermined error is specified by the error specifying means and the occurrence of the specified error is no longer specified by the error specifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, characterized in that it is possible to terminate the change of the notification period of the result notification based on this.

After the occurrence of an abnormality, when the player performs a game operation after the occurrence of the abnormality is no longer specified, the manager of the game hall has finished dealing with the abnormality, and the player is ready to restart the game. can be regarded as Therefore, in such a situation, by adopting a configuration that terminates the change as in the above configuration, there is an inconvenience that the notification period is changed even though the player has resumed playing the game. can be avoided.

Feature H7. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, wherein the predetermined abnormality is an abnormality that allows at least the progression of the game round by the game round control means to be continued.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to secure the significance of changing the length of the notification period of the result notification. In other words, if the progress of the game cycle is stopped based on the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality, it is considered that the result notification is not performed or the result notification is stopped while the result notification is performed, and the length of the notification period of the result notification This is because there is no point in changing the .

Feature H8. The changing means can change the length of the notification period during which the result notification is performed without changing the duration of the game round executed by the game round control means. The gaming machine according to any one of H7.

According to the above configuration, the duration of the game round is not changed. There is no deviation between the continuation period of the game round and the continuation period of the game round on the side of the different informing means. As a result, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of incongruity due to the occurrence of a shift in performance, and it is also possible to eliminate the need to perform processing (for example, processing to extend/shorten one of them) to eliminate the shift in performance. This also leads to avoiding an increase in the processing load.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. A shooting means (shooting handle 54) for shooting a game ball toward a game area (game area PE) based on a shooting operation by a player;
A starting ball entry portion (upper operation port 33a, lower operation port 33b) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
Giving determination means (function of executing win-or-fail determination processing by the main controller 81) for executing grant determination as to whether or not to grant a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering section When,
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a game round effect is started on a predetermined display means (main display unit 43), and the game round is displayed as a stop result corresponding to the grant determination result. a first control means (a function of executing a game round control process by the main control device 81) for performing the game round on the predetermined display means, with ending the effect of
Second control means for maintaining the display of the result displayed as the stop result for a predetermined period after the end of the game round by the first control means (function of executing stop start processing by main control device 81) When,
Based on the result of grant determination by the grant determination means being a result corresponding to grant of the privilege, the result display by the second control means is performed after the game round corresponding to the grant determination. Privilege giving means (function for executing game state transition processing by main control device 81) for giving the privilege after the predetermined period has elapsed since
A gaming machine comprising
Having an operation unit (operation button 77) operated by a player,
A change means (the processing of step S5501 by the main controller 81) capable of lengthening the length of the predetermined period during which the result display is performed by the second control means based on the operation of the operation unit. A game machine characterized by having a function to execute).

According to the above configuration, the game ball fired based on the shooting operation by the player enters the starting ball entrance portion, the grant determination is performed, the game round is started, and then the result In a series of games in which a display is performed and a privilege can be awarded, when the player operates the operation unit, the length of the predetermined period during which the result display continues after the game is played becomes longer. In other words, the period until the award is given after the game is played becomes longer. As a result, for example, a player who has started a game round but has to leave his seat due to urgent business will have a grace period before the privilege is granted, so the urgent business will be completed. becomes possible.

In other words, if there is something to do, it is fine not to shoot the game ball and start the game, but for example, it is expected that the effect of the game round will result in a big win and a privilege will be given. If you do, you may want to prepare a drink or go to the toilet to fully enjoy the jackpot. In the case of conventional gaming machines, when a game ball enters the starting ball entry section, the game machine proceeds from grant determination to game rounds and granting of benefits, so once the game starts, it can be played. It was difficult for the patient to control the progress. Therefore, by adopting the above-described configuration, it is possible to delay the awarding of the privilege by operating the operation unit even when the game is about to start, thereby meeting the various needs of the players. can.

In addition, in order to adjust the length of the period from the start of the game to the granting of the privilege, for example, a configuration for adjusting the length of the presentation of the game cycle is also conceivable. However, if this is done, it will be necessary to change the presentation contents of the game cycle when extending the length of the period by the player's operation, and there is a possibility that the processing load will increase. In this respect, if the length of the predetermined period during which the results are displayed is lengthened, it is only necessary to change the period during which the stopped results are displayed. It becomes possible to produce an effect.

Moreover, since the progress of the game is not stopped by the operation of the operation unit, but the length of the predetermined period is changed, the progress of the game can be stopped in a situation where unexecuted game times remain. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the game is left as it is and the following players cannot play.

Regarding the ``privilege granting means'', ``variable ball entry means which is provided in the game area and can be displaced between an open state in which a game ball easily enters and a closed state in which a game ball is less likely to enter than the open state. and payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on the fact that the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means; If the variable ball entry means is changed from the closed state to the open state, and then shifted to a specific state in which variable ball entry control is executed to close the variable ball entry means, the game ball must be entered into the variable ball entry means. Since it becomes impossible to receive the payout of game balls as a privilege, the significance of lengthening the predetermined period as described above is enhanced.

Feature I2. When the operation unit is operated in a situation where the length of the predetermined period is changed by the changing means, it is possible to prevent the change by the changing means from being performed. The gaming machine according to Characterizing Feature I1.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of the predetermined period being prolonged. For example, a configuration is conceivable in which the change by the change means is applied only to a predetermined number of game rounds, and when the application is completed, the change is automatically stopped. However, in this case, if the necessary extension is covered by the result display in the predetermined game round, there may be a problem that the extension of the result display for one round becomes too long. Specifically, for example, if it is desired to extend the period by 4 minutes, the length of the result display after the predetermined game round may be set to 4 minutes. Even if the player tries to restart the game later after finishing his business, he has to wait for the remaining two minutes. On the other hand, for example, if the display of the result of each of the eight reserved game rounds is extended to 30 seconds, in a configuration that can extend the total of 4 minutes in the same way, it is possible to extend the intermediate game rounds. It is also possible to prevent the execution of the game, and the degree of freedom of the game is improved compared to the configuration in which the game is uniformly extended.

Feature I3. The changing means, when changing the length of the predetermined period, lengthens the length of the predetermined period so that the length is within the maximum length of the game times by the first control means. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the results are displayed endlessly and the game is substantially stopped. In other words, even if the length is increased, the length is equivalent to one game round. After waiting for one round, the subsequent players are allowed to play.

Feature I4. The changing means, when changing the length of the predetermined period, lengthens the length of the predetermined period so as to be equal to or longer than the shortest length of the game times by the first control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3.

According to the above configuration, it is not an extension that does not give a grace period for finishing the business, but a grace period is substantially provided for only one game, and the effect of the feature I1 can be substantially exhibited.

Feature I5. Any of features I1 to I4, further comprising means for displaying a specific display indicating that the length of the predetermined period has been changed by the changing means together with the result display. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, it is clear to the player or the manager of the game hall that the change is made by the change means, not that the awarding of the privilege is not started or the next game round is not started due to some error of the game machine. can be grasped. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary error handling.

Feature I6. A storage means (operation flag) for storing operation information indicating that the operation unit has been operated,
The change means changes the result display when the operation information is stored in the storage means and when the content of the game round by the first control means becomes a predetermined specific content. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, wherein the length of the predetermined period of time during which the game is played is lengthened.

As the specific content, for example, it is possible to perform a reach display that confirms a big hit, or an effect in which a character that does not appear easily appears. Since there is a high possibility that the privilege will be granted later, it can be said that there is an increasing need to change the length of the predetermined period. Therefore, with the above configuration, it is possible to set in advance so that there will be time to finish the task when such a specific content occurs, and when the specific content occurs, the operator does not have to worry about the operation of the operation unit. This eliminates the need for it, and it becomes possible to fully enjoy the game rounds with specific contents.

Feature I7. Information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering section;
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
with
The provision determination means is configured to sequentially perform the provision determination for the special information stored in the information storage means,
Where the information in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the information storage means is subject to determination by the provision determination means is specified at a timing before the predetermined special information is subject to the determination. Provided with a specifying means (a function of executing confirmation processing for holding notice by the main control device 81),
The changing means, based on the result of specifying by the preceding specifying means, changes the result display of the special information to be the grant determination target one before the special information corresponding to the game round to be the specified content. The gaming machine according to feature I6, wherein the length of the predetermined period can be lengthened.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to enjoy not only the delay until the award of the privilege after the specific content has been achieved, but also the game round that has the specific content.

Feature I8. The gaming machine according to feature I6 or feature I7, wherein the specific content is content corresponding to a result of grant determination by the grant determination means that the privilege is granted.

According to the above configuration, the effect of feature I6 can be favorably exhibited.

Feature I9. When changing the length of the predetermined period, the changing means lengthens the length of the predetermined period so as to match the length of the duration of the game round that is the specific content,
Third control means (function for executing stop start processing by the notification/effect control device 82) capable of executing the performance of the game round to be the specific content in the predetermined period changed by the change means The gaming machine according to any one of features I6 to I8, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the specified content is repeatedly performed using the predetermined period of result display. As a result, even if the specific content is missed, it is possible to reconfirm it.

Features I10. Information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering section;
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
with
The provision determination means is configured to sequentially perform the provision determination for the special information stored in the information storage means,
Where the information in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the information storage means is subject to determination by the provision determination means is specified at a timing before the predetermined special information is subject to the determination. Provided with specifying means (function for executing confirmation processing for holding notice by main control device 81),
The changing means, based on the result of specifying by the preceding specifying means, changes the result display of the special information to be the grant determination target one before the special information corresponding to the game round to be the specified content. lengthening the length of the predetermined period so that the length of the predetermined period is the length of the duration of the game round that becomes the specific content;
Third control means (function for executing stop start processing by notification/effect control device 82) capable of executing the performance of the game round to be the specific content in the predetermined period changed by the change means The gaming machine according to any one of features I6 to I9, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, during the predetermined period of result display before the game round with the specific content, the performance of the game round with the specific content is performed. This makes it possible to achieve the same effect as the effect of feature I9.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. Transition determination means (function for executing win/fail determination processing by the main controller 81) for determining whether or not to transition the game state based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition;
Based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means being the transition correspondence result corresponding to the transition of the game state, the game state transition means for transitioning the game state (game state transition processing by the main controller 81) function) and
Based on the transition determination by the transition determination means, the production of the game round is started by a predetermined notification means, and the production of the game round is terminated as a stop result corresponding to the result of the transition judgment. A gaming machine comprising, as one game round, game round control means (a function for executing game round control processing by a main control device 81) for causing the performance of the game round to be performed by the predetermined notification means. ,
As the game state, an advantageous state (high frequency support mode) and a non-advantageous state (low frequency support mode) are set so that the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low,
The game round control means, when starting the game round, the duration setting means for setting the continuation period of the current game round according to the result of the transition determination (the variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) function to execute), and controls the predetermined notification means so that the current game round is performed over the duration set by the duration setting means,
A specific period is provided as a duration set by the duration setting means when the result of the transition determination is a non-advantageous transition response result (normal jackpot result) that transitions to the non-advantageous state. cage,
The game round control means is
The result of the transition determination is the non-advantageous transition correspondence result, and in the game round in which the specific period is set as the duration period, a first means (notification/production control device) for displaying the stop result at a first timing 82 function to stop the normal medium pattern row);
The result of the transition determination is the result corresponding to the non-advantageous transition, and in the game round in which the specific period is set as the continuation period, the stop result is set at a second timing that is earlier than the first timing. A second means for displaying with (the function of stopping the middle symbol row in the situation where the first result notification flag or the immediate result notification flag by the notification / effect control device 82 is set);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the configuration in which the game result is notified through the effect of the game round, it is possible to determine at a later timing the turning point where the degree of advantage for the player greatly differs, such as whether it is a win or a miss, or what kind of win it is. By doing so, the degree of attention of the entire game round can be increased. Based on this premise, it is conceivable that whether the transition to an advantageous state or a non-advantageous state with different degrees of advantage for the player should be notified at a later timing as much as possible. In particular, shifting to a non-advantageous state with a low degree of advantage for the player is not the timing of the front side, but the timing of the rear side, from the viewpoint of allowing the player to enjoy the game round while giving hope that there is a possibility of transitioning to an advantageous state. It is considered that it should be notified in a timely manner.

However, there is also the idea that if the current game state is in an advantageous state, and if the state shifts to a non-advantageous state when the game round ends, the benefit of the remaining advantageous state should be maximized. Therefore, with the above configuration, although the notification of the transition to the non-advantageous state is usually indicated by the stop result at the first timing, in the special case as described above, the Since it is indicated by the stop result at the second timing, which is the previous timing, it is possible to use the time difference between the first timing and the second timing to make preparations before moving to a non-advantageous state. can. By doing so, it is possible to meet the diverse needs of the players, and it is possible to make use of it in realizing novel game characteristics.

Regarding "first means" and "second means",
"first means for displaying the stop result based on the establishment of the first condition in the game cycle in which the result of the transition determination is the non-advantageous transition correspondence result and the specific period is set as the duration period; When,
The result of the transition determination is the non-advantageous transition response result, and the second condition, which is satisfied before the first condition, is satisfied in the game cycle in which the specific period is set as the duration period. A second means for displaying the stop result"
can be expressed as In this case, in each of the following features, "first timing" is read as "based on the satisfaction of the first condition", and "second timing" is read as "based on the satisfaction of the second condition". It should be read as "te" and so on.

Feature J2. Characteristic feature J1, wherein the game turn control means maintains the stop result until the continuation period elapses after the stop result is displayed by the first means or the second means. game machine.

According to the above configuration, once the stop result is displayed by the first means or the second means, it is not overturned, and so-called re-fluctuation cannot be expected. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to accept the transition to the non-advantageous state and to promptly start preparations before the transition to the non-advantageous state.

Feature J3. The gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, wherein the second means displays the stop result at the second timing in the game round during the advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, the case where the stop result is displayed at the second timing is the case where the advantageous state changes to the non-advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to play the game so as to maximize the benefit of the remaining advantageous state.

Feature J4. A shooting means (shooting handle 54) for shooting a game ball toward a game area (game area PE) based on a shooting operation by a player;
A ball entry portion (second operation port 134) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (function for executing information acquisition processing by the main control device 81) based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section;
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
with
The transition determination means is configured to sequentially perform the transition determination for the special information stored in the information storage means,
A variable receiving means (electric accessory 134a) capable of switching between a first state in which it is easier to accept a game ball into the ball entering portion and a second state in which it is more difficult to accept a game ball into the ball entering portion than in the first state;
Variable acceptance control means for executing variable acceptance control for switching the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then switching to the second state (function for executing electric worker support processing by the main controller 81) When,
with
As the control mode of the variable acceptance control by the variable acceptance control means, a high frequency state (high frequency support mode) and a low frequency state are selected so that the frequency of the variable acceptance means being in the first state is relatively high and low. (low frequency support mode) is set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3, wherein the high frequency state is set in the advantageous state, and the low frequency state is set in the non-advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, by shifting to the non-advantageous state, the frequency with which the variable receiving means is in the first state becomes low, and the state shifts to the low frequency state in which the frequency with which the ball enters the ball-entering portion decreases. Therefore, for example, if the current game state is an advantageous state and a high frequency state, before shifting to the low frequency state, it is better to shoot the game ball so that it will enter the ball entering section as much as possible. As a person, I will do something special. By applying the configuration of the feature J1 to such a gaming machine, it is possible to preferably exhibit the effect of the feature J1.

Feature J5. A shooting means (shooting handle 54) for shooting a game ball toward a game area (game area PE) based on a shooting operation by a player;
A first ball entry portion (first operation port 133) and a second ball entry portion (second operation port 134) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
Information for acquiring first special information based on the game ball entering the first ball entering section and acquiring second special information based on the gaming ball entering the second ball entering section Acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing by the main controller 81);
a first information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the first special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined first predetermined number as an upper limit;
a second information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the second special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined second predetermined number as an upper limit;
with
The transition determination means is
First transition determination means (based on the hold information of the first ball-entering section side by the main controller 81) that sequentially performs the first transition determination as the transition determination for the first special information stored in the first information storage means. function to execute the validity judgment process) and
Second transition determination means (main controller 81) for sequentially performing a second transition determination more advantageous for the player than the first transition determination as the transition determination for the second special information stored in the second information storage means. A function that executes a win-or-fail judgment process based on the hold information on the second ball entry section side by),
with
In the advantageous state, it is easier to enter the ball in the second ball-entering portion than in the first ball-entering portion, and in the unadvantageous state, it is easier to enter the ball in the first ball-entering portion than in the second ball-entering portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4, characterized in that the ball is easily thrown.

According to the above configuration, when the transition to the non-advantageous state is made as a non-advantageous transition correspondence result, the first transition determination is performed rather than the second ball-entering section that performs the second transition determination that is advantageous for the player. It becomes easier to enter the ball in the ball entry part. Therefore, for example, when the current situation is in an advantageous state, before the state shifts to a non-advantageous state and it becomes difficult to enter the second ball entering section, a ball entering the second ball entering section is generated, and the second ball entering section is generated. 2. It is preferable for the player to acquire the special information. Therefore, by applying the configuration of the feature J1 to such a gaming machine, it is possible to preferably achieve the effect of the feature J1.

Feature J6. A shooting means (shooting handle 54) for shooting a game ball toward a game area (game area PE) based on a shooting operation by a player;
A ball entry portion (second operating port 134) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (function for executing information acquisition processing by the main control device 81) based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section;
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
with
The transition determination means is configured to sequentially perform the transition determination for the special information stored in the information storage means,
The second means displays the stop result at the second timing when the number of the special information stored in the information storage means is equal to or less than a specific number smaller than the predetermined number. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5.

According to the above configuration, when the number of pieces of special information for which transition determination is performed is equal to or less than the specific number which is smaller than the predetermined number which is the upper limit number of storage, the second means determines that the result is a non-advantageous transition handling result. The display will be performed at an early timing. By doing so, for example, in a configuration in which the ball is less likely to enter the ball-entering portion due to the non-advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the ball-entering portion before transitioning to the non-advantageous state. It is possible to induce the player to obtain the special information by allowing the player to stop the game, and it is possible to save the player by displaying the stop result in advance.

Feature J7. Characteristic feature J6, wherein the first means displays the stop result at the first timing when the number of the special information stored in the information storage means is larger than the specific number. game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the stop result from being displayed first even though the number of pieces of special information is sufficiently stored. As a result, displaying the stop result first can be exceptionally performed from the standpoint of saving the player while ensuring the performance effect of the game round.

Feature J8. The shooting means shoots game balls at a predetermined cycle,
The gaming machine according to feature J6 or feature J7, wherein the difference between the first timing and the second timing is set to be longer than the predetermined period.

According to the above configuration, by displaying the stop result first at the second timing, at least one game ball is shot. By doing this, even though the stop result is displayed first, not even one game ball can be shot, and the ball does not enter the ball-entering section. can do.

Feature J9. characterized in that a difference between the first timing and the second timing is set to be longer than a length obtained by multiplying a difference between the predetermined number and the specific number by the predetermined cycle. A gaming machine described in J8.

According to the above configuration, at least the game balls for the deficit up to the predetermined number are shot. As a result, the game balls launched after the stop result is displayed can make up for the shortage.

Feature J10. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J9, further comprising means for displaying the remaining duration of the current game round when the second means displays the stop result. .

According to the above configuration, it is possible to clearly grasp how long it will take to transition to the non-advantageous state by displaying the remaining duration. This makes it easier to make preparations before shifting to the non-advantageous state.

It should be noted that the above configuration is more preferably provided with "means for updating the remaining duration every predetermined period" because the remaining duration that decreases moment by moment can be clearly indicated.

Feature J11. The predetermined notification means is display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns,
The game round control means variably displays the plurality of patterns as an effect of the game round, and displays a combination of the patterns corresponding to the transition determination result as the stop result. ,
Any one of features J1 to J10, characterized in that when the stop result is displayed at the second timing by the second means, the speed of the variable display of the plurality of patterns can be changed. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

By changing the speed of the variable display of patterns as in the above configuration, there is no need to change the combination of patterns in order to stop the combination of patterns corresponding to the result of transition determination. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that a result different from the result to be displayed is displayed.

For more details about the above configuration,
"The predetermined notification means is a display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns,
The game round control means variably displays the plurality of patterns as an effect of the game round, and displays a combination of the patterns corresponding to the result of the grant determination as the stop result. ,
When the stop result is displayed at the second timing, the second means changes the speed of the variable display of the plurality of patterns so as not to change the combination of the patterns to be stopped as the stop result. Is possible"
can be expressed as

Feature J12. information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing by the main controller 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Grant determination means for sequentially executing grant determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the information storage means corresponds to predetermined grant information (function for executing right/wrong determination processing by the main controller 81 )When,
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, the production of the game round is started by a predetermined notification means, and after that, the result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is reported. A game round control means (a function of executing a game round control process by the main control device 81) for ending the effect;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result corresponding to the grant information (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81) When,
A gaming machine comprising
an effect period setting means (a function for executing variable display time setting processing by the main control device 81) capable of setting an effect period (variable display time) during which the effect of the game round is executed by the game round control means;
Notification period setting means capable of setting the notification period in which the result notification corresponding to the result of the grant determination is performed (function to execute fluctuation middle processing by notification / effect control device 82, stop start time processing by main control device 81 function) and
with
The game round control means executes the effect of the game round over the effect period set by the effect period setting means, and thereafter, the game over the notification period set by the notification period setting means. Executes the result notification corresponding to the result of the grant determination for the time,
The privilege granting means is configured to grant the privilege after the notification period has elapsed,
The notification period setting means is
When the number of the special information stored in the information storage means is the first predetermined number, the first means for setting the length of the notification period as the first specific period function to stop the middle pattern row of ),
when the number of the special information stored in the information storage means is a second predetermined number smaller than the first predetermined number, the length of the notification period is set to a second specific period longer than the first specific period A second means (a function of stopping processing of the medium symbol row in a situation where the first result notification flag or the immediate result notification flag by the notification / effect control device 82 is set),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the number of special information is small, the period during which result notification is performed becomes long, and when the number of special information is large, the period during which result notification is performed becomes short. In general, the smaller the number of special information, the longer the length of the performance period of the game round, so that the situation in which the special information is not stored is less likely to occur, or a large amount of special information is stored. In this case, the speed at which the special information is digested is improved to smoothen the progress of the game. In that respect, it can be said that the above configuration matches the relationship between the length of the presentation period of the game cycle and the number of special information. In other words, by adopting the above configuration, it can be said that the above effect can be expected depending on the length of the notification period, even if the length of the performance period of the game round is not changed as in the conventional case. In this way, if the length of the notification period can be changed according to the number of special information, it is possible to make the game cycle consisting of a set of the effect period and the notification period significantly different from the conventional configuration, which is novel. It is possible to make a great use of it for the realization of amusement.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. Determination means (main controller) for determining whether or not to execute specific control (open/close control of variable winning device 132) for awarding a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition. 81), and
When the determination result by the determination means is a specific result corresponding to the execution of the specific control, a specific control means for executing the specific control (a function of executing a large winning opening opening/closing process by the main controller 81); ,
Based on the determination by the determination means, the notification effect means (the function of executing the game round control process by the main control device 81) that can execute the notification effect for notifying the determination result by the predetermined notification means )When,
When the determination result by the determination means is the specific result, a specific period (fixed display time, opening period setting means (function for executing stop start time processing by main controller 81, function for executing opening processing by main controller 81) for setting time);
with
The period setting means is
First setting means capable of setting the first period as the specific period (for example, a function of setting the first fixed display time when the common hold number CRN is 1 to 6 in the stop start time processing by the main controller 81) When,
A second setting means capable of setting a second period shorter than the first period as the specific period (for example, when the common hold number CRN is 7 to 8 in the stop start processing by the main controller 81, the first determination function to set the display time) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Given the flow of the game in which the determination conditions are established to perform the grant determination, and the benefit is granted according to the determination result, there is a high level of interest in the notification effect for notifying the grant determination result. Furthermore, on the premise that the player will feel joy by being granted the privilege, it is confirmed that the privilege will be obtained for a specific period from the notification of the judgment result to the awarding of the privilege. It can be said that this is a point where the degree of attention of the player can be lowered due to the sense of relief. In this regard, conventionally, in such a specific period, an effect is performed to congratulate the granting of the privilege, thereby eliminating the decrease in the degree of attention. However, even if such an effect is performed, it is still the waiting time for the specific control after all, and there is a limit to increasing the degree of attention.

Therefore, by setting the length of the specific period to be the first period or the second period as in the above configuration, the length of the waiting time as described above is generated, and it is possible to apply such length to the effect. However, it is possible to make one think that the merits and demerits are related to subsequent profits (for example, the privilege obtained during the specific control varies). As a result, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature K2. Feature K1 characterized in that the degree of advantage for the player differs between when the first period is set by the first setting means and when the second period is set by the second setting means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, the length of the specific period does not only make one think that it is related to profit, but it is actually related to profit. As a result, it is possible to realize a new game feature that utilizes a specific period of time, which conventionally was merely a waiting time.

In addition, the above configuration, for example,
"When the first period is set by the first setting means and when the second period is set by the second setting means, an advantageous event (V winning) that is advantageous to the player will occur after that. have different probabilities of occurring in
can be expressed as

Feature K3. Characteristic K2 characterized in that the case where the second period is set by the second setting means is more advantageous for the player than the case where the first period is set by the first setting means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, a shorter waiting time is advantageous for the player. As a result, the specific control is performed continuously in a situation where the privilege is confirmed and the excitement does not cool down, and the configuration with less waiting time is more advantageous, and there is a chance that the degree of attention will decrease. You can fully enjoy the game without giving. On the other hand, a longer waiting time is disadvantageous to the player, but if it is assumed that the length of the notification effect will be longer as it is more advantageous to the player, the waiting time on the disadvantageous side will be longer. Even if this is the case, the total length of the notification effect is considered to be not much different from that of the advantageous side, and the lengthening of the specific period does not necessarily mean that it will be redundant.

Feature K4. A control mode of the specific control is common between a case where the first period is set by the first setting means and a case where the second period is set by the second setting means. The gaming machine according to feature K2 or feature K3.

According to the above configuration, regardless of whether the first period or the second period is set, the control mode of the specific control is the same, so the benefit itself obtained by the specific control does not change. This makes it possible to obtain the effect of the feature K2 without significantly changing the configuration of the existing specific control.

Feature K5. displacement means (shutter 358) capable of displacing between a first position and a second position which is different from the first position and is more advantageous to the player than the first position;
Displacement control for displacing the displacement means from the first position to the second position and then to the first position at a predetermined cycle based on notification of the determination result by the determination means. displacement control means (function for executing V operation processing by the main controller 81) for executing
The gaming machine according to any one of features K2 to K4, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the displacement control by the displacement control means is performed at a predetermined cycle. When the period is set and when the second period is set, the timing at which the displacement means is arranged at the second position advantageous to the player does not overlap with the specific control, or both overlap. Even if it does, it is possible to make a difference such as at what timing during the specific control it overlaps. This makes it possible to produce a difference in the degree of advantage depending on the length of the specific period.

Feature K6. A shooting means (shooting handle 54) for shooting a game ball toward a game area (game area PE) based on a shooting operation by a player;
A starting ball entry portion (upper operation port 33a, lower operation port 33b) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
Variable ball entry means (variable winning device 132) capable of displacing between an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a closed state in which game balls are less likely to enter than in the open state;
Payout means (payout control device 97) for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means;
Variable ball entry control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening/closing process by the main controller 81) for executing variable ball entry control to change the variable ball entry means from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state; ,
with
The determination means performs the grant determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entering portion,
The specific control is the variable ball entry control by the variable ball entry means,
The displacement means are
When arranged at the first position, guiding the game ball entered by the variable ball entry means to a first area (ejection area 357) disadvantageous to the player,
Characteristic feature K5 characterized in that, when arranged at the second position, the game ball entering the variable ball entering means is guided to a second area (V winning area 356) advantageous to the player. game machine.

According to the above configuration, when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is guided to the first area. The degree of advantage for the player differs depending on whether the player is guided to the second area. As a result, the effect of the feature K5 can be favorably achieved without greatly changing the existing configuration of paying out prize balls corresponding to the balls entering the variable ball entering means.

Feature K7. A shooting means (shooting handle 54) for shooting a game ball toward a game area (game area PE) based on a shooting operation by a player;
A starting ball entry portion (upper operation port 33a, lower operation port 33b) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
with
The determination means performs the grant determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entering portion,
By entering the game ball into the starting ball entering section, the state in which the specific period is set as the first period by the first setting means, and the specific period is set to the second period by the second setting means The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6, wherein the state set as .

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the determination of whether or not to perform the specific control is performed based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section, the length of the specific period is also determined based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section. Change. By doing so, it is possible to realize a novel game property that is greatly different from conventional games, such as a big hit determination being made when a ball is entered into the starting ball entering section.

Feature K8. Information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing by the main controller 81) for acquiring special information based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section;
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
with
The determination means is configured to sequentially perform the grant determination for the special information stored in the information storage means,
When the number of the special information stored in the information storage means is less than a specific number, the first period is set by the first setting means, and the special information stored in the information storage means is the specified number. The gaming machine according to feature K7, wherein the second period is set by the second setting means when the number is greater than or equal to the number.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the special information for grant determination is acquired based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section, and the special information is stored up to a predetermined number as the upper limit, the number of stored special information The length of the specific period is set based on. By doing so, even the so-called special information waiting for grant determination can be involved in the game, and the importance of acquiring the special information, that is, making the ball enter the starting ball entering section, is increased. can improve sexuality. Moreover, since the specific period related to the specific control is set using special information that is different from the special information that triggered the specific control, the conventional method that had only a one-to-one relationship between the special information and the specific control It is possible to provide a novel game property that is greatly different from the game property.

Feature K9. Feature K8 characterized in that the case where the second period is set by the second setting means is more advantageous for the player than the case where the first period is set by the first setting means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, the greater the number of special information stored, the more advantageous the player is. By doing so, for example, even if the player who grasps that the specific control is performed before or during the notification effect, if the number of special information is small, the starting ball entering section It is considered that a game ball is fired to make it enter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent so-called stopping shots.

Feature K10. The notification effect means is a duration setting means (variation display time setting process by the main controller 81) for setting the duration of the notification effect when the notification effect is executed based on the result of the determination by the determination means. function to execute), and executes the notification effect based on the duration set by the duration setting means,
The continuation period setting means sets the continuation period longer when the judgment result by the judging means indicates that the specific control is to be executed than when the specific control is not to be executed. The gaming machine according to feature K9, characterized by having a configuration that is easy to set.

In general, long performances are performed in game rounds in which a big win is achieved, and measures are taken to fully enjoy the performances of the game rounds. However, if the game is too long, a player who has grasped that a big win will occur midway through or in advance, or a player who wants to quickly obtain a privilege based on the big win may feel that the game round is redundant. On the other hand, there are also players who want to enjoy long presentations as described above, and it may be difficult to satisfy the different demands of the two players. Therefore, as in the above configuration, the longer the notification effect that is the specific control, the longer the time for acquiring the special information is ensured, thereby increasing the possibility that the second period that is advantageous to the player will be set. This can be a meaningful time for both the player who wants to enjoy the performance for a long time and the player who feels that the long performance is meaningless.

Feature K11. A variable receiving means (electric accessory 134a) capable of switching between a first state in which it is easier to accept a game ball into the starting ball entering portion and a second state in which it is more difficult to accept a game ball into the starting ball entering portion than in the first state; ,
Variable acceptance control means for executing variable acceptance control for switching the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then switching to the second state (function for executing electric worker support processing by the main controller 81) When,
with
As the control mode of the variable acceptance control by the variable acceptance control means, a high frequency state (high frequency support mode) and a low frequency state are selected so that the frequency of the variable acceptance means being in the first state is relatively high and low. (low-frequency support mode) is set as the gaming machine according to feature K9 or feature K10.

As in the above configuration, by using the variable receiving means for assisting the ball entering the starting ball entering section, the ease with which the special information is accumulated changes. Specifically, in a high-frequency state in which the first state for accepting balls into the starting ball-entering section is frequently obtained, special information is easily acquired, and in a low-frequency state in which the frequency of the first state is lower than that in the high-frequency state. Then, it becomes difficult to acquire special information. Therefore, in the high frequency state, the second period is more likely to be set by the second setting means, and in the low frequency state, the first period is more likely to be set by the first setting means. Therefore, it is possible to relate not only the frequency with which grant determination is performed, but also the length of the specific period and its advantage, and it is possible to improve the playability.

Feature K12. The notification effect means is a duration setting means (variation display time setting process by the main controller 81) for setting the duration of the notification effect when the notification effect is executed based on the result of the determination by the determination means. function to execute), and executes the notification effect based on the duration set by the duration setting means,
The continuation period setting means determines that the determination result by the determination means during the low frequency state is better when the determination result by the determination means during the high frequency state is a determination result that the specific control is executed. The gaming machine according to feature K11, characterized in that it is easier to set the continuation period shorter than in the case where is the determination result that the specific control is executed.

Assuming that special information is more likely to accumulate during the high-frequency state than during the low-frequency state, the possibility of setting the second period increases when the specific control is performed. On the other hand, as in the above configuration, during the high frequency state, the duration of the notification effect for which the specific control is performed is likely to be shorter than during the low frequency state, the specific control is performed. Even if special information is to be acquired after a different notification effect is started, there may be a situation where it is too late. By doing so, it is possible to increase the significance of proceeding the game in a state in which the special information is stored as close to the predetermined number as the upper limit as much as possible, and the variable acceptance means is in the first state during the high frequency state. It is possible to suppress the so-called stopping action of shooting a game ball aiming at a situation.

<Characteristic group L>
Feature L1. A starting ball entry portion (upper operation port 33a, lower operation port 33b) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PE) can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering section;
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Variable ball entry means (variable winning devices 32, 132) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is difficult or impossible to enter a game ball;
Variable ball entry control means capable of executing variable ball entry control to change the variable ball entry means from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state (function for executing the big winning opening opening/closing process by the main controller 81) When,
Shift determination means for sequentially executing shift determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the information storage means corresponds to predetermined shift information (function for executing right/wrong determination processing by main controller 81) )When,
When the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is a transition result that corresponds to the transition information, the game state is changed to a specific state in which the variable entrance control is performed by the variable entrance control means. Transition means for transition (function for executing game state transition processing by main control device 81);
Based on the transition determination by the transition determination means, the production of the game round is started by a predetermined notification means, and after that, the result corresponding to the result of the transition determination is reported. A game turn control means for ending the production (a function of executing a variable display control process by the notification / production control device 82);
A gaming machine comprising
A period setting means for setting a specific period in which the result notification is performed (function for executing stop start processing by the main controller 81),
When the result of the transition determination for the special information is a specific result different from the transition result, the period setting means sets the specific period to the variable input when the transition means transitions to the specific state. A game machine characterized in that it is possible to set a period of length corresponding to a waiting period until the ball means is switched from the closed state to the open state.

In the flow of a series of game rounds, the effect of the game round is started based on the transition determination, the result corresponding to the result of the transition determination is notified, and the game round ends. If it is a result of transition, the game is shifted to a specific state in which variable ball entry control is performed by the variable ball entry means after the game round, and if the result of the transition determination is not a transition result, the above game is played as long as the special information is stored in the storage means. Times are performed sequentially. In terms of this kind of gameplay, an effect is performed in the effect of the game cycle to make the player expect that the transition result will be the result, and a device is provided to increase the attention of the player. Since the result of the transition determination that triggered the game cycle is notified as the result notification, the player can clearly recognize that the result is not the transition result, for example. Then, no matter how exciting the performance of the game round is, if the result notification is finally performed, the interest will be focused only on the result notification, and the result confirmation work will be performed. It may become a game property that is only performed. On the other hand, if the result notification is not performed after the performance of the game round, or if the result notification is made difficult to understand, for example, it will be difficult for the manager of the game hall to confirm the result of the transition determination. inconvenience may occur.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the specific period during which the result is notified is set to a length corresponding to the waiting period until the variable ball entry means is switched from the closed state to the open state when the result of the transition determination is the transition result. It is possible to set. Therefore, even if it is notified as a result notification that it is a specific result (outlier result) that is not a transition result, it is possible that the result is notified through the fact that the next game round production is not started until the specific period elapses. It is possible to make the user see the result notification while giving them the expectation that the result may be a transition result rather than a specific result (outlier result). With such a configuration, there is no need to make the result notification difficult to understand, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention until the final timing of the result notification (the start timing of the performance of the next game cycle). .

Feature L2. The period setting means sets the specific period in which the result notification is performed when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the specific result. The gaming machine according to feature L1, characterized in that it is set to be shorter than the specific period during which the notification of the result in a certain case is performed.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to reduce the difference corresponding to the waiting period until the variable ball entering means is opened when the transition result is obtained. Therefore, it is possible to associate the specified period in the case of the specified result with the specified period and the waiting period in the case of the transition result. Also, in this way, there is no need to shorten the standby period side, and it is possible to sufficiently secure a period for preparing for control of the variable ball-entering means and performing an effect.

Feature L3. The period setting means sets the specific period when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the specific result to be the total period of the specific period when the transition result is the transition result and the waiting period. The gaming machine according to feature L2, characterized in that it is set to .

According to the above configuration, the specified period in the case of the specified result and the specified period and the waiting period in the case of the transition result have the same length. As a result, it becomes impossible to determine whether the specific result or the transition result is obtained from whether or not the next game cycle is started and from the opening/closing mode of the variable ball-entering means. Therefore, it is possible to suitably enhance the effect of making both results difficult to understand.

Feature L4. When the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the specific result, the transition means does not shift to the specific state, and the game round control means determines that the specific period in which the specific result is notified has passed. In any of the features L1 to L3, wherein, on condition that the special information is stored in the information storage means, the performance of the game round for the next special information is started. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, the identification result is a so-called failure result that does not transition to the specific state. Moreover, for example, unlike the so-called small hit result in which the variable ball entry means is opened and closed less times than in a specific state, the variable ball entry means is not opened and closed, resulting in a complete failure. By doing so, the advantage is greatly different between the result of transition to the specific state and the result of not transition to the specific state. can be suitably increased.

Feature L5. The game round control means is a means (notification/ The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics L1 to L4, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S6503 by the effect control device 82.

According to the above configuration, it is not possible to determine whether it is a transition result or a specific result from the result notification by the game round control means. This makes it possible to suitably enhance the effect of making both results difficult to understand.

Feature L6. A high-probability mode and a low-probability mode are provided as determination modes for the transition determination by the transition determination means so that the probability of the transition result being relatively high or low,
The period setting means sets the specific period to have a length corresponding to the standby period when the result of the transition determination is the specific result in the low probability mode. When the result of the transition determination in the probability mode is the specific result, the specific period is set so as to be a period different from the specific period set in the low probability mode. The gaming machine according to any one of L5.

If the player's psychology that he/she expects the transition result is high only in the low-probability mode in which the probability of the transition result is low, the specific period is set as the feature L1 based on the specific result. It can be said that the performance effect can be suitably enhanced by making Therefore, by adopting the configuration described above, it is possible to fully exhibit the performance effect of the feature L1, and not to hinder the progress of the game in the high-probability mode.

Feature L7. Based on the transition determination by the transition determination means, the specific notification means (main display unit 43) different from the predetermined notification means starts the effect of the game round, and then the result of the transition determination. A second game round control means (a function of executing a game round control process by the main control device 81) that terminates the effect of the game round after performing the result notification corresponding to
When the result of the transition determination is the transition result, the second game turn control means performs transition result notification corresponding to the transition result as the result notification, and when the result of the transition determination is the specific result. , The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L6, wherein as the result notification, specific result notification different from the transition result notification is performed.

According to the above configuration, by confirming the notification of the result by the second game round control means, it is possible to clearly distinguish whether the result of the transition determination is the transition result or the specific result. As a result, it is possible to allow the administrator of the game hall to confirm the result while obtaining the performance effect of the configuration of the feature L1.

Regarding the relationship between the "predetermined notification means" and the "specific notification means", for example, if the specific notification means is smaller than the predetermined notification means or the like, a difference in identifiability can be generated. The notification means desired to be shown to the players and the notification means desired to be shown to the manager of the game hall can be made compatible. In addition, by making it possible for the game ball to flow between the predetermined notification means and the specific notification means, even if the player tries to check both notification means, the game area will be interposed therebetween. When shifting the line of sight from one notification means to the other notification means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be distracted by the game ball flowing down and to feel a sense of incongruity when the results of the two notification means do not match each other.

<Characteristic group M>
Feature M1. information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing by the main control device 81) for acquiring determination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Giving determination means (function for executing win/fail determination processing by the main control device 81) for executing grant determination as to whether or not to grant a privilege to the player with respect to the determination information stored in the information storage means;
Privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player based on the fact that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result corresponding to granting the privilege (game by main controller 81) function to execute state transition processing),
with
As the game state, a high probability state and a low probability state are set so that the probability that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result is relatively high or low,
State setting means for setting the game state to the high-probability state (function for executing transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode by the main control device 81),
The gaming machine, wherein the state setting means is capable of setting the high-probability state according to the number of the determination information stored in the information storage means.

According to the above configuration, the determination information is acquired based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the determination information is stored in the information storage means, and the addition determination is performed on the determination information. A high-probability state and a low-probability state are set in which the probability of grant determination is relatively high and low, and the setting is performed according to the number of determination information stored in the information storage means. For this reason, it is a novel game that is completely different from conventional game machines that are set to a high probability state or a low probability state depending on the result of grant determination and the type of privilege granted based on the result. becomes possible.

In particular, since it is configured to perform according to the number of information for determination, for example, if the number of information for determination is large, if it is a configuration that is likely to be in a high probability state, the game is performed to establish the acquisition condition as much as possible. On the other hand, if it is the opposite configuration, although it is desired to perform the award determination that triggers the acquisition of the privilege, special game characteristics such as making the grant determination while trying not to satisfy the acquisition condition as much as possible are also realized. It becomes possible. In this way, since the ease with which benefits are granted differs depending on the relationship with the fulfillment of acquisition conditions, it is possible for the player to participate in the ease with which benefits are granted, and interest is enhanced through active participation in the game. is planned.

Feature M2. A specific period (a period in which the variable winning device 132 is in an open state) in which a specific event (V winning) that triggers the setting of the high probability state can occur is set by the setting means,
a first means for allowing the specific event to occur in the specific period when the number of the determination information stored in the information storage means is a first number;
a second means for limiting occurrence of the specific event in the specific period when the number of the determination information stored in the information storage means is a second number different from the first number;
The gaming machine according to feature M1, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the novel game property of setting a high probability state according to the number of determination information of the feature M1 can be easily understood and simple for the player, such as whether or not a specific event occurs during a specific period. It can be realized by configuration. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp that the number of judgment information is involved in the setting of the high-probability state, and it is possible to fully enjoy the playability of the feature M1.

Feature M3. The specific event can occur at a specific timing after a predetermined period has elapsed from a predetermined start timing,
The first means is set so that the specific timing is included in the specific period,
The second means is characterized in that the specific timing is not included in the specific period, or is set so that the specific timing is less likely to be included than in the case of being set by the first means. The gaming machine described in M2.

According to the above configuration, the effect of feature M2 can be achieved by setting the period, such as whether or not the timing at which the specific event can occur is included in the specific period. As a result, it is possible to realize the playability of the feature M1 with a simple and easy-to-understand configuration such as the setting of the period without requiring complicated control or processing that is visually difficult to understand.

Feature M4. The first means sets a waiting period until the start of the specific period as a first period so that the specific timing is included in the specific period,
The second means sets the waiting period as a second period different from the first period, so that the specific timing is not included in the specific period or is set by the first means. The game machine according to feature M3, characterized in that it is set so that the specific timing is less likely to be included.

According to the above configuration, the first means and the second means do not make the specific period different, but make the standby period before the specific period different. As a result, there is no need to change the action mode of the character if it is configured such that the character operates during a specific period and the privilege is easily granted. Therefore, it is possible to realize the playability of the feature M1 while ensuring the fairness in appearance.

Feature M5. The state setting means
The privilege is granted by the privilege granting means based on the result of the grant determination, based on the number of the judgment information stored in the information storage means in a situation where the grant determination is made by the grant determination means. Depending on the situation, whether or not the high probability state is set can be changed depending on whether or not the number of pieces of determination information stored in the information storage means is the same. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M4, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the number of pieces of judgment information may be the same or different during the period from when the grant determination is made until the privilege is granted based on the result of the grant determination. , whether or not the high probability state is also set. In other words, whether or not the high probability state is reached depends on whether or not the acquisition condition is met during the period from when the grant determination is performed until the privilege is granted. By doing so, after the grant determination is made, the so-called waiting time until the privilege is granted is used to set the key part of the game, which is novel. It is possible to realize great playability.

Feature M6. As the game state, the first game state (high-frequency support mode) in which the predetermined acquisition condition is likely to be satisfied, and the second game state (low-frequency support mode) in which the predetermined acquisition condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the first game state ), and the gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M5.

According to the above configuration, the number of pieces of determination information stored that greatly contributes to the setting of the high-probability state differs between the first game state and the second game state. For example, if the configuration is such that the higher the number of determination information stored, the more likely it is to be set to a high-probability state, the first game state in which a predetermined acquisition condition is likely to be established is set to a higher-probability state than the second game state. becomes easy. On the other hand, if the configuration is reversed, the easiness of establishing the predetermined acquisition condition and the easiness of being set to the high-probability state are contradictory, resulting in a novel sense of gameplay.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature group A to feature group M to each configuration of feature group A to feature group M described in detail above. However, it is also possible to combine and apply each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: operation means (shooting handle 54) operated by a player, game ball shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, and game balls shot to a predetermined game area (game area PE), and each game part arranged in the game area. A game machine that gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a port 31, etc.).

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 32... Variable winning device, 33a... Upper operation opening, 33b... Lower operation opening, 34... Electric accessory, 35... Through gate, 41... Symbol display device, 43... Main display part, 54... Launch handle , 77... operation button, 81... main control device, 82... notification/effect control device, 101... display control device, 133... first operation opening, 134... second operation opening, 232... reserved ball storage area, 341... second 1 information area, 342... second information area, 356... V winning area, 357... discharge area.

Claims (1)

a shooting means capable of shooting game balls based on a predetermined shooting operation;
Predetermined ball entry means capable of entering the game ball shot by the shooting means;
information acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means;
a specific determination means for executing a specific determination based on the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means;
variable ball entry means capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can enter or is likely to enter, and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state;
variable control means for executing variable ball entry control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state based on the result of the specific determination;
display means capable of variably displaying patterns;
It is regarded as one game round that the variable display of the pattern is started on the display means based on the specific determination being made by the specific determination means, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the specific determination is stopped and displayed. , game round control means for controlling the game round to be performed;
with
The game cycle control means has means for setting a stop display period during which symbols are stopped and displayed,
In a situation where the result of the specific determination is the first result corresponding to the execution of the variable ball entry control, a predetermined game ball launched in a manner capable of reaching the variable ball entry means reaches the variable ball entry means a first means for enabling stop display of the stop result corresponding to the first result in a first specific period longer than a predetermined period until the
In a situation where the result of the specific determination is a second result that does not correspond to the execution of the variable entry control, the stop display of the stop result corresponding to the second result is performed in a second specific period longer than the predetermined period. a second means for allowing the
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images